Skip to main content

Full text of "Lycoming College catalog"

See other formats


NOTICE  OF  NON-DISCRIMINATION  POLICY 

Lycoming  College  welcomes  applications  from  pro- 
spective students  regardless  of  age,  sex,  race,  religious 
preference,  physical  disability,  financial  resources, 
color,  national  or  ethnic  origin.  This  policy  is  in 
compliance  with  the  requirements  of  Title  VI  of  the 
Civil  Rights  Act  of  1964,  Title  IX  of  the  Educational 
Amendments  of  1972  and  all  other  applicable  federal, 
state  and  local  statutes,  ordinances  and  regulations. 


I 


A  QUICK  LOOK  AT  LYCOMING 

Location  Williamsport,  Pennsylvania  17701 

Phone  (717)  326-1951 

Founded  1812 

Enrollment  (Fall,  1979)  1159  (684  men  and  475  women) 

Accreditation  Middle  States  Association  of  Colleges  and  Schools 

University  Senate  of  The  United  Methodist 
Church 

Church  Affiliation  United  Methodist 

Student/ Faculty  Ratio  Fifteen  to  one 

Library  Volumes  142,000;  902  current  periodical  titles 

Size  of  Campus  Main  campus:  20  acres;  Athletic  field:  12  acres 

Number  of  Buildings  Nineteen 

Calendar  4-4-1  (1  =  Optional  May  term) 

1980-81  Fixed  Charges  Tuition  $3720 

Room  &  Board  $1770 

Total  $5490 

May  and  summer  term  charges  are  not  included  in 
these  figures. 

Books  and  supplies  normally  cost  $75  to  $150  per 
year.  Allowance  must  be  made  for  laundry,  travel, 
clothing  and  personal  needs. 

Financial  Aid  Lycoming  students  received  more  than  $2.8  mil- 

lion in  financial  assistance  last  year.  Prospective 
students  should  discuss  their  financial  needs  with 
the  Director  of  Student  Financial  Aid. 


CONTENTS 

Page 
Introduction  to  Lycoming 5 

Admission  to  Lycoming 7 

Expenses  and  Financial  Aid  9 

The  Academic  Program 15 

Student  Services 35 

The  Curriculum 41 

College  Directory 132 

The  1980-1981  Academic  Calendar 146 

Campus  Facilities 148 

Campus  Map 149 

Index 151 


2*1 


\ 


CHAPTER  I 
INTRODUCTION  TO  LYCOMING 


THIS  IS  LYCOMING 

Lycoming  College  is  an  independent,  coeducational  institution  dedi- 
cated to  a  liberal  arts  and  sciences  program. 

The  college's  academic  relevance  derives  from  its  enduring  commit- 
ment to  the  value  of  a  liberal  education,  carefully  designed  mission  and 
highly  trained  faculty.  Its  principal  aim  is  to  help  each  student  develop 
a  central  core  of  integrated  values,  skills,  information  and  strategies  that 
can  lead  to  a  productive  and  fulfilling  life  in  many  fields  while  allowing 
continuous  growth  and  development. 

The  college  awards  bachelor  of  arts  degrees  in  29  major  fields.  The 
curriculum  is  challenging.  Its  balance  and  diversity  allows  students  to 
study  in  breadth  and  depth.  There  are  opportunities  to  design  individ- 
ual fields  of  study  and  to  study  off  campus  and  at  other  colleges  and 
universities. 

The  ratio  of  faculty  to  students  is  15  to  1.  Most  classes  are  small.  All 
faculty  members  teach.  In  fields  where  the  Ph.D.  is  considered  the 
terminal  degree,  about  70  percent  of  Lycoming's  faculty  hold  that  degree 
from  some  of  the  nation's  outstanding  colleges  and  universities.  And 
faculty  members  take  their  counseling  and  advising  seriously.  They  care 
about  students  as  human  beings. 

Lycoming  houses  about  885  of  its  1,150  students.  Most  students 
find  the  campus  friendly  and  comfortable.  Students  come  from  all 
economic  classes,  religious  beliefs  and  geographic  areas.  They  work  and 
play  in  an  atmosphere  of  respect  and  tolerance. 

Lycoming's  location  has  been  described  as  the  best  of  both  worlds. 
The  college  is  situated  on  a  slight  prominence  near  downtown  Williams- 
port,  a  small  city  nestled  along  the  West  Branch  of  the  Susquehanna 
River  in  the  hills  and  valleys  of  Northcentral  Pennsylvania.  Yet  it  is  only 
a  few  hours  away  from  metropolitan  centers  such  as  New  York  City, 
Philadelphia,  Pittsburgh,  Washington,  Baltimore,  Syracuse  and 
Rochester.  The  Williamsport  metro  area  is  home  to  about  80,000 
persons. 

Lycoming  enjoys  a  relationship  with  The  United  Methodist  Church. 
It  supports  the  Methodist  tradition  of  providing  an  education  for 
persons  of  all  faiths. 

Fully  accredited,  Lycoming  is  a  member  of  the  Middle  States 
Association  of  Colleges  and  Schools  and  the  University  Senate  of  The 
United  Methodist  Church.  It  is  a  member  of  the  Association  of  American 
Colleges,  the  Pennsylvania  Association  of  Colleges  and  Universities,  the 
Commission  for  Independent  Colleges  and  Universities,  the  National 
Commission  on  Accrediting  and  the  National  Association  of  Schools 
and  Colleges  of  The  United  Methodist  Church. 


HISTORY 

Lycoming  College  was  founded  in  1812  as  the  Williamsport  Academy,  an 
elementary  and  secondary  school.  Thirty-six  years  later,  the  academy 
became  the  Williamsport  Dickinson  Seminary  under  the  patronage  of 
The  Methodist  Episcopal  Church.  The  seminary  operated  as  a  private 
boarding  school  until  1929  when  a  college  curriculum  was  added  and  it 
became  the  Williamsport  Dickinson  Seminary  and  Junior  College.  In 
1947,  the  junior  college  became  a  four-year  degree-granting  college  of 
liberal  arts  and  sciences.  It  adopted  the  name  Lycoming,  derived  from 
the  Indian  word  "lacomic,"  meaning  "Great  Stream."  The  word  Lycom- 
ing has  been  common  to  Northcentral  Pennsylvania  since  colonial  days. 


CHAPTER  II 
ADMISSION  TO  LYCOMING 

POLICY  AND  STANDARDS 

Lycoming  College  welcomes  applications  from  prospective  students 
regardless  of  age,  sex,  race,  religious  preference,  financial  resources, 
color,  national  or  ethnic  origin  or  physical  impairment.  Admission  is 
based  on  the  following  standards: 

— graduation  from  an  accredited  secondary  school; 
— completion  of  a  college  preparatory  program  that  includes  Eng- 
lish and  mathematics  plus  units  in  foreign  language,  natural 
science  and  social  science; 
— satisfactory  College  Entrance  Examination  Board  Scholastic  Ap- 
titude Test  (SAT)  or  American  College  Test  (ACT)  scores. 

A  secondary  school  student  of  exceptional  maturity  and  with 
significant  academic  preparation  may  apply  to  Lycoming  as  a  candidate 
for  early  admission.  If  admitted,  the  student  enters  the  college  after 
completing  the  junior  year  in  school.  Special  students  who  are  not 
enrolled  in  a  degree  program  and  who  wish  to  enroll  in  one  or  more 
courses  in  any  semester  are  welcome  to  apply. 

Lycoming  is  fully  approved  for  the  educational  program  for  veter- 
ans under  Federal  Public  Laws  550,  634,  894. 

APPLICATION  AND  SELECTION  PROCESS 

For  students  considering  a  fall  semester  admission,  applications  should 
be  filed  by  April  1.  The  application  should  be  accompanied  by  a  $15 
application  fee,  an  official  secondary  school  transcript  forwarded  by  the 
school  guidance  office  and  the  results  of  either  the  Scholastic  Aptitude 
Test  (SAT)  or  the  American  College  Test  (ACT).  Applications  are 
considered  after  April  1  on  a  space-available  basis. 

The  completed  application  is  evaluated  individually  by  identifying 
each  applicant's  academic  achievements,  talents,  qualities  and  interests. 
Lycoming  notifies  applicants  of  their  acceptance  as  soon  as  possible  after 
all  credentials  have  been  received  and  evaluated.  In  some  instances, 
additional  information  may  be  needed  to  complete  the  evaluation. 

Admitted  applicants  must  notify  the  college  of  their  intent  to  enroll 
by  May  1,  the  national  candidates'  reply  date.  This  notification  must  be 
accompanied  by  a  $100  advance  deposit  which  is  applied  to  the  first  term 
tuition.  After  May  1,  the  $100  deposit  is  not  refundable. 

ADVANCED  STANDING  BY  TRANSFER 

The  college  welcomes  transfer  students  from  other  accredited  colleges 

and  universities  according  to  the  following  standards  and  procedures: 

— applicants  must  be  in  good  academic  standing  with  a  minimum 

cumulative  grade  point  average  of  2.0  at  their  current  or  previous 

college; 

7 


— all  courses  passed  that  are  comparable  to  the  curriculum  at 

Lycoming  will  be  accepted  for  transfer; 
— the  grades  earned  in  all  transferable  courses  are  included  in  the 

computation  of  the  cumulative  grade  point  average; 
— academic  standing  at  Lycoming  will  be  based  on  an  evaluation  of 

all  courses  attempted  at  all  other  institutions; 
— the  final  eight  courses  for  the  bachelor  of  arts  degree  must  be 

taken  at  Lycoming; 
— official  copies  of  transcripts  from  all  institutions  attended  must  be 

submitted  as  a  part  of  the  admission  application. 

ADMISSIONS  OFFICE  LOCATION  AND  HOURS 

Prospective  students  and  their  families  are  invited  to  campus  for  a 
student-conducted  tour  and  a  meeting  with  an  admissions  officer  who 
will  provide  additional  information  about  the  college  and  answer  any 
questions. 

The  admissions  office  is  located  on  the  first  floor  of  Long  Hall.  For 
an  appointment  telephone  (717)  326-1951,  ext.  221  or  write  Office  of 
Admissions,  Lycoming  College,  Williamsport,  PA  17701.  Office  hours 
are: 
Weekdays    — September  through  April  9:00  a.m.  to  4:30  p.m. 

— May  through  August  9:00  a.m.  to  4:00  p.m. 

Saturdays    — September  through  April  9:00  a.m.  to  12:00  noon 

— May  through  August  No  Saturday  Hours. 


CHAPTER  III 
EXPENSES  AND  FINANCIAL  AID 

EXPENSES  FOR  THE  ACADEMIC  YEAR  1980-81 

The  following  expenses  are  effective  for  the  regular  fall  and  spring 
semesters.  The  college  reserves  the  right  to  adjust  fees  at  any  time.  The 
fees  for  each  semester  are  payable  not  later  than  the  second  day  of 
classes  for  the  semester. 

FEES 

Comprehensive  Fee  

Board  and  Room  Rent 


PER  SEMESTER 

PER  YEAR 

$1,860 

$3,720 

885 

1,770 

Total  $2,745  $5,490 

One-Time  Fees  and  Deposits 

Application  Fee  $        15 

Admissions  Deposit 100 

Contingency  Deposit 50 

Part-Time  Student  Fees 

Application  Fee  $        15 

Each  Unit  Course 465 

Additional  Charges 

Applied  Music  Fee  (half-hour  per  week  per  semester)  $    130 

Applied  Music  Fee  (group  session  per  semester)  65 

Cap  and  Gown  Rental prevailing  cost 

Laboratory  Fee  per  Unit  Course 5  to  35 

Registration  Fee 25 

Parking  Permit  (for  the  academic  year)  10  to  15 

Parking  Permit  With  Reserved  Space  (for  the  academic  year)  ...         50 

Practice  Teaching  Fee  (Payable  in  Junior  Year) 130 

R.O.T.C.  Basic  Course  Deposit 

(Payable  at  Bucknell  University)  40 

R.O.T.C.  Advanced  Course  Deposit 

(Payable  at  Bucknell  University)  40 

Transcript  Fee  (No  charge  to  full-time  students)  3 

Medical  Questionnaire  Fee 

(Payable  to  Medical  Datamation,  Inc.)  10 

The  comprehensive  fee  covers  the  regular  course  load  of  three  to 
four  courses  each  semester.  Resident  students  must  board  at  the  college 
unless,  for  extraordinary  reasons,  authorization  is  extended  for  other 
eating  arrangements.  If  a  double  room  is  used  as  a  single  room,  there  is 


an  additional  charge  of  $135  per  semester.  The  estimated  cost  for  books 
and  supplies  is  $75  to  $150  per  year,  depending  on  the  course  of  study. 
Special  session  (May  term  and  summer  term)  charges  for  tuition,  room 
and  board  are  established  during  the  fall  semester. 

ENTRY  FEES  AND  DEPOSITS 

Application  Fee — All  students  applying  for  admission  must  submit 
a  $15  application  fee.  This  charge  defrays  the  cost  of  processing  the 
application  and  is  non-refundable. 

Admissions  Deposit — After  students  have  been  notified  of  their 
admission  to  the  college,  they  are  required  to  make  a  $100  admissions 
deposit  to  confirm  their  intention  to  matriculate.  The  deposit  is  applied  to 
the  general  charges  for  the  first  semester  of  attendance.  After  May  1,  the 
deposit  is  non-refundable. 

Contingency  Deposit — A  contingency  deposit  of  $50  is  required  of 
all  full-time  students  as  a  guarantee  for  payment  of  damage  to  or  loss  of 
college  property,  for  library  and  parking  fines  or  similar  penalties 
imposed  by  the  college.  The  deposit  is  collected  along  with  other 
charges  for  the  initial  semester.  The  balance  of  this  deposit  is  refunded 
after  all  debts  to  the  college  have  been  paid,  either  upon  graduation  or 
upon  written  request  submitted  to  the  Registrar  two  weeks  prior  to 
voluntary  permanent  termination  of  enrollment  at  Lycoming  College. 

PARTIAL  PAYMENTS 

For  the  convenience  of  those  who  find  it  impossible  to  follow  the  regular 
schedule  of  payments,  arrangements  may  be  made  with  the  college 
Business  Manager  for  the  monthly  payment  of  college  fees  through 
various  educational  plans.  Additional  information  concerning  partial 
payments  may  be  obtained  from  the  Business  Manager  or  Director  of 
Admissions. 

REFUNDS  FOR  STUDENTS  WHO  WITHDRAW 

Refunds  of  tuition  and  board  are  made  to  students  who  voluntarily 
withdraw  from  the  college  while  in  good  standing  according  to  the 
following  schedule  for  the  fall  and  spring  semesters  and  the  comparable 
period  for  the  May  and  summer  terms. 

Period  of  Withdrawal  Refund   %  Charge  % 

First  four  weeks  of  the  semester 70  30 

Second  four  weeks  of  the  semester  .  40  60 

Third  four  weeks  of  the  semester  ...  10  90 

After  twelve  weeks  — 0 —  100 

The  date  on  which  the  Dean  of  the  College  approves  the  student's 
withdrawal  form  is  considered  the  official  date  of  withdrawal. 

Room  charges,  which  are  established  on  a  semester  basis,  and 
special  charges,  such  as  laboratory  fees,  are  not  refundable  if  a  student 

10 


leaves  the  college  prior  to  the  end  of  a  semester. 

Full-time  students  are  not  eligible  for  a  refund  of  tuition  for  an 
individual  course  if  the  course  is  dropped  after  the  first  10  days  of  either 
regular  semster. 

NON-PAYMENT  OF  FEES  PENALTY 

Students  will  not  be  registered  for  courses  in  a  new  semester  if  their 
accounts  for  previous  attendance  have  not  been  settled.  Diplomas, 
grade  reports,  transcripts  and  certifications  of  withdrawals  in  good 
standing  are  issued  only  when  a  satisfactory  settlement  of  all  financial 
obligations  has  been  made  in  the  Business  Office. 


11 


FINANIAL  AID  POLICY  AND  PROCEDURES 

The  dominant  factor  in  determining  the  amount  of  financial  aid  awarded 
to  individual  students  is  the  establishment  of  need.  Scholarships  may  be 
awarded  on  the  basis  of  financial  need  and  academic  ability,  while 
grants  are  provided  exclusively  on  the  basis  of  financial  need.  Long- 
term,  low-cost  educational  loans  are  available  from  federal  and  state 
sources  to  most  students  who  can  demonstrate  need.  Part-time  em- 
ployment is  available  to  students  who  are  in  good  academic  standing. 

To  apply  for  financial  assistance,  obtain  the  Financial  Aid  Form 
(F.A.F.)  from  the  secondary  school  guidance  office  or  the  Office  of 
Financial  Aid  at  Lycoming.  Submit  the  completed  form  to  the  College 
Scholarship  Service,  P.O.  Box  2700,  Princeton,  NJ  08541,  as  early  as 
possible  after  January  1.  Renewal  applications  are  required  annually. 

Scholarships — Freshman  Recognition  Scholarships  of  $700  each  are 
awarded  to  applicants  who  have  superior  academic  qualifications  but  do 
not  demonstrate  any  financial  need.  These  scholarships  are  renewable 
each  year  if  the  student  maintains  a  minimum  3.25  cumulative  grade 
point  average.  Other  scholarships,  ranging  from  $300  to  full  tuition,  are 
awarded  to  freshmen  who  rank  in  the  top  fifth  of  their  secondary  school 
class  and  have  a  combined  score  of  more  than  1100  on  the  College 
Entrance  Examination  Board  Scholastic  Aptitude  Test  (SAT).  These 
scholarships  are  renewable  each  year  if  the  student  maintains  a  min- 
imum 3.00  cumulative  grade  point  average. 

Grants-In-Aid — Lycoming  has  established  an  extensive  program  of 
grants-in-aid  for  worthy  students  who  do  not  qualify  for  scholarships. 
Awards  are  based  on  demonstrated  need  and  the  prospect  of  the 
student  contributing  positively  to  the  college  community.  Renewal 
requires  continued  financial  need,  maintenance  of  satisfactory  academic 
and  citizenship  standards  and  participation  in  college  activities. 

Ministerial  Grants-In-Aid — Children  of  ministers  of  the  Central 
Pennsylvania  Annual  Conference  of  The  United  Methodist  Church 
receive  grants  equal  to  one-third  of  the  charges  for  tuition,  while 
children  of  ministers  of  other  Annual  Conferences  of  The  United 
Methodist  Church  and  of  other  denominations  receive  grants  equal  to 
one-fourth  of  the  charges  for  tuition.  Students  who  will  be  entering  the 
ministry  may  apply  for  a  preministerial  student  grant  equal  to  one- 
fourth  tuition.  Applicants  must  complete  and  submit  the  Financial  Aid 
Form  (F.A.F.)  and  pre-ministerial  students  must  also  submit  the  Ap- 
plication for  Pre-Ministerial  Grant.  If  an  applicant  demonstrates  more 
need  for  financial  assistance  than  a  ministerial  grant-in-aid  provides, 
additional  types  of  aid  will  be  considered.  These  grants-in-aid  are  part  of 
a  total  financial  assistance  award  to  meet  demonstrated  need  and  are  not 
given  in  addition  to  awards  designed  to  meet  established  needs. 

Federal  Basic  Educational  Opportunity  Grants  (BEOG) — These 
grants,  established  through  the  Educational  Amendments  of  1976, 
provide  up  to  $1,800  per  year  for  full-time  students  who  can  demon- 
strate financial  need.  Application  can  be  made  when  submitting  the 
Financial  Aid  Form  (F.A.F.)  or  by  separate  application  to  the  federal 

12 


government  on  forms  which  are  available  in  secondary  school  guidance 
offices  and  the  Office  of  Financial  Aid  at  Lycoming.  All  students  are 
urged  to  apply  for  this  program. 

Federal  Supplemental  Educational  Opportunity  Grants  (SEOG) — 
This  federal  government  program  provides  additional  assistance  to 
those  students  with  exceptional  financial  need.  Awards  are  made  in 
amounts  ranging  from  $200  to  $1,500  and  are  based  entirely  on  financial 
need.  Renewal  is  possible  if  the  applicant  has  no  reduction  in  financial 
need  in  succeeding  years. 

Federal  National  Direct  Student  Loans  (NDSD— Federal  govern- 
ment loan  funds  are  available  through  the  National  Defense  Education 
Act  of  1958.  Low  interest  loans  of  up  to  $1,500  per  year  are  granted  on 
the  basis  of  demonstrated  need.  Repayment  does  not  begin  until  after 
graduation  or  withdrawal  from  college.  Loans  are  normally  renewed 
annually  if  the  applicant  files  a  renewal  application  by  May  1. 

Federal  College  Work-Study  Grants  (CWSP)— An  opportunity  is 
provided  through  this  program  for  students  to  earn  part  of  their  college 
expenses  and  to  gain  some  practical  experience  by  working  on  campus 
or  in  selected  off-campus  programs.  Federal  government  income 
guidelines  must  be  met  to  be  eligible  for  this  program.  Students  who  do 
not  meet  these  guidelines  should  consult  with  the  Career  Development 
Center  or  Office  of  Financial  Aid  for  other  employment  opportunities. 

13 


Other  Sources  of  Financial  Assistance — 

State  Grants.  All  applicants  for  financial  aid  are  urged  to  investigate 
programs  sponsored  by  their  home  states  and  to  learn  about  and  heed 
application  deadlines.  Pennsylvania  applicants  should  apply  for  state 
aid  during  their  senior  year  in  high  school,  usually  before  April  30.  For 
additional  information,  applicants  should  contact  their  secondary  school 
guidance  counselor  or  write:  Pennsylvania  Higher  Education  Assistance 
Agency  (PHEAA),  Towne  House,  Harrisburg,  PA  17102. 

State  Guaranteed  Loans.  Most  states,  including  Pennsylvania,  New 
Jersey  and  New  York,  provide  state  guaranteed  loans  through  local 
banks.  This  program  provides  low  interest  loans  of  up  to  $2,500  per  year 
for  educational  expenses  with  repayment  extended  over  a  long-term 
payment  schedule.  Applicants  should  consult  their  local  banks  early  in 
their  senior  year. 

Community  Scholarships.  In  many  communities,  foundations  and 
organizations,  and  in  some  cases  high  schools,  provide  funds  for  worthy 
students.  Applicants  should  consult  with  their  secondary  school  gui- 
dance counselor  or  principal. 

Education  Financing  Plans.  The  Business  Office  at  Lycoming  provides 
information  about  plans  which  enable  parents  to  pay  college  expenses 
on  a  monthly  basis  through  selected  companies. 

Reserve  Officers  Training  Corps  (ROTC)  Scholarships.  Students  who 
participate  in  Army  ROTC  are  eligible  for  three,  two  and  one-year  ROTC 
scholarships  to  finance  tuition,  books,  laboratory  fees  and  other  charges 
with  the  exception  of  room  and  board.  ROTC  scholarship  students  also 
receive  $100  per  month  during  the  academic  year. 

Reserve  Officers  Training  Corps  (ROTC)  Stipends.  Students  who  partic- 
ipate in  the  Army  ROTC  program  receive  $100  per  academic  month  of 
their  junior  and  senior  years.  They  also  receive  half  of  a  second 
lieutenant's  pay  plus  travel  expenses  for  a  six-week  advanced  summer 
camp  between  the  junior  and  senior  years. 

INFORMATION  CONCERNING  FINANCIAL  AID  CAN  BE  OBTAINED  BY 
WRITING  THE  OFFICE  OF  FINANCIAL  AID,  LYCOMING  COLLEGE,  WIL- 
LIAMSPORT,  PA  17701  OR  BY  TELEPHONING  (717)  326-1951,  ext.  232  or  233. 


14 


CHAPTER  IV 
THE  ACADEMIC  PROGRAM 

THE  DEGREE 

Lycoming  is  committed  to  the  principle  that  a  liberal  arts  education  is  the 
best  hope  for  an  enlightened  citizenry.  Consequently,  the  bachelor  of 
arts  degree  is  conferred  upon  the  student  who  has  completed  an 
educational  program  incorporating  the  two  principles  of  the  liberal  arts 
known  as  distribution  and  concentration.  The  objective  of  the  distribu- 
tion principle  is  to  insure  that  the  student  achieves  breadth  in  learning 
through  the  study  of  the  major  dimensions  of  human  inquiry:  the 
humanities,  the  social  sciences  and  the  natural  sciences.  The  objective  of 
the  concentration  principle  is  to  provide  depth  of  learning  through 
completion  of  a  program  of  study  in  a  given  discipline  or  subject  area 
known  as  the  major. 

REQUIREMENTS  FOR  THE  DEGREE 

Every  degree  candidate  is  expected  to  complete  the  following  require- 
ments in  order  to  qualify  for  graduation: 

— complete  the  distribution  program. 

— complete  a  major  consisting  of  at  least  eight  courses  while 
achieving  a  minimum  grade  point  average  of  2.0  in  those  courses. 

— earn  one  year  of  credit  in  physical  education.  All  students  must 
demonstrate  competence  in  swimming.  (Medical  exemptions 
may  be  granted  by  the  college  physician  after  an  examination  and 
review  of  the  student's  medical  history  and  family  physician's 
report.) 

— pass  a  minimum  of  128  semester  hours  (32  unit  courses)  with  a 
minimum  cumulative  average  of  2.0.  Additional  credits  beyond 
128  semester  hours  may  be  completed  provided  the  minimum  2.0 
cumulative  average  is  maintained. 

— complete  in  residence  the  final  eight  courses  offered  for  the  degree 
at  Lycoming. 

— satisfy  all  financial  obligations  incurred  at  the  college. 

— complete  the  above  requirements  within  seven  years  of  con- 
tinuous enrollment  following  the  date  of  matriculation. 

All  exemptions  or  waivers  of  specific  requirements  are  made  by  the 
Committee  on  Academic  Standing. 

THE  DISTRIBUTION  PROGRAM 

A  course  can  be  used  to  satisfy  only  one  distribution  requirement. 
Courses  for  which  a  grade  of  "S"  is  recorded  may  not  be  used  toward 
the  fulfillment  of  the  distribution  requirements.  (Refer  to  page  21  for  an 
explanation  of  the  grading  system.)  A  course  in  any  of  the  following 
distribution  requirements  refers  to  a  full-unit  (four  semester  hours) 

15 


course  taken  at  Lycoming,  any  appropriate  combination  of  fractional 
unit  courses  taken  at  Lycoming  which  accumulate  to  four  semester 
hours,  or  any  single  course  of  three  or  more  semester  hours  transferred 
from  another  institution. 

English — All  students  are  required  to  pass  or  exempt  English  2, 
which  must  be  taken  no  later  than  the  second  semester  (usually  the 
spring  semester)  of  their  sophomore  year,  and  one  other  English  course, 
excluding  English  1.  In  addition,  all  students  who  have  not  been 
exempted  from  English  1  must  receive  a  mark  of  "Satisfactory"  in 
English  1  before  being  permitted  to  enroll  in  English  2.  Students  may  be 
exempted  from  English  1  on  the  basis  of  high  achievement  on  both 
objective  parts  of  the  CLEP  General  Examination  in  English  Composi- 
tion, which  may  be  taken  during  the  year  before  entrance  or  during 
freshman  orientation.  Furthermore,  some  students  may  be  eligible,  after 
consultation  with  the  Department  of  English,  to  exempt  English  2  on  the 
basis  of  their  CLEP  performance. 

Foreign  Language  or  Mathematics — Students  are  required  to  meet 
a  minimum  basic  requirement  in  either  a  foreign  language  or  the 
mathematical  sciences. 

Foreign  Language.  Students  may  choose  from  among  French,  Ger- 
man, Greek,  Hebrew  or  Spanish  and  are  required  to  pass  two  courses 
on  the  intermediate  or  higher  course  level.  Placement  at  the  appropriate 
course  level  will  be  determined  by  the  faculty  of  the  Department  of 
Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures.  Students  who  have  completed  two 
or  more  years  of  a  given  language  in  high  school  are  not  admitted  for 
credit  to  the  elementary  course  in  the  same  foreign  language  except  by 
written  permission  of  the  chairman  of  the  department.  French  28  and 
Spanish  28  will  meet  part  of  this  requirement  only  if  the  section  taught 
in  the  language  is  completed. 

Mathematics.  Students  are  required  to  demonstrate  competence  in 
basic  algebra  and  to  pass  three  units  of  mathematical  science  other  than 
Mathematics  5.  Competence  in  basic  algebra  may  be  demonstrated 
either  by  passing  the  basic  algebra  section  of  the  Mathematics  Placement 
Examination  or  by  passing  Mathematics  5.  By  demonstrating  higher 
competence  on  the  Mathematics  Placement  Examination,  students  may 
reduce  the  requirement  to  two  units  of  mathematical  science.  No  more 
than  IV2  units  may  be  taken  in  computer  science. 

Religion  or  Philosophy — Students  are  required  to  pass  two  courses 
in  either  religion  or  philosophy. 

Fine  Arts — Students  are  required  to  pass  two  courses  as  indicated 
in  art,  literature,  music  or  theatre. 

Art.  Any  two  courses. 

Literature.  Any  two  literature  courses  selected  from  the  offerings  of 
the  Departments  of  English  and  Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures. 

Music.  Any  of  the  following  combinations  of  music  offerings  total- 
ing the  equivalent  of  eight  semester  hours: 

— two  courses  from  those  numbered  Music  10  through  Music  46. 

— eight  semesters  of  applied  music  (private  lessons)  and/or  en- 

16 


semble  (choir,  band)  from  courses  numbered  60  through  69, 
earned  fractionally,  as  follows: 

— (1)  for  private  lessons  (Music  60  through  66),  a  one-half  hour 
lesson  per  week  earns  one-half  hour  credit,  and  a  one-hour 
lesson  earns  one  hour  of  credit.  Note:  no  more  than  one  hour  of 
private  lessons  may  be  taken  in  one  semester,  and  there  are  extra 
fees  for  these  lessons.  (For  details  see  Department  of  Music 
course  offerings  described  elsewhere  in  this  catalog.) 

— (2)  credit  may  be  earned  for  participation  in  the  college  choir 
(Music  68)  and/or  band  (Music  69);  however,  a  student  may  earn 
no  more  than  one  hour  each  semester  even  though  participating 
in  both  band  and  choir.  (For  further  details  please  see  the 
Department  of  Music  offerings  elsewhere  in  this  catalog.) 

Theatre.  Any  two  courses  numbered  10  and  above. 

Natural  Science — Students  are  required  to  pass  any  two  courses  in 
one  of  the  following  disciplines:  astronomy/physics,  biology,  chemistry. 

History  and  Social  Science — Students  are  required  to  pass  two 
courses  as  indicated  in  economics,  history,  political  science,  psychology 
or  sociology/ anthropology. 

Economics.  Any  two  courses. 

History.  Any  two  courses. 

Political  Science.  Any  two  courses. 

Psychology.  Psychology  10,  plus  one  course  usually  chosen  from 
among  Psychology  15,  16,  17,  18,  24,  33  or  39. 

Sociology /Anthropology.  Sociology/Anthropology  10  plus  another 
Course. 

THE  MAJOR 

Students  are  required  to  complete  a  series  of  courses  in  one  departmen- 
tal or  interdisciplinary  (established  or  individual)  major.  Specific  course 
requirements  for  each  major  offered  by  the  college  are  listed  in  the 
curriculum  section  of  this  catalog,  beginning  on  page  41.  Students  must 
earn  a  precise  2.0  or  better  average  in  those  courses  stipulated  as 
comprising  the  major.  (This  requirement  is  not  met  by  averaging  the 
grades  for  all  courses  completed  in  the  major  department.)  Students 
must  declare  a  major  by  the  beginning  of  their  junior  year.  Departmental 
and  established  interdisciplinary  majors  are  declared  in  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar,  whereas  individual  interdisciplinary  majors  must  be  ap- 
proved by  the  Committee  on  Curriculum  Development.  Students  may 
complete  more  than  one  major,  each  of  which  will  be  recorded  on  the 
transcript.  Students  may  be  removed  from  major  status  if  they  are  not 
making  satisfactory  progress  in  the  major.  This  action  is  taken  by  the 
Dean  of  the  College  upon  the  recommendation  of  the  department, 
coordinating  committee  (for  established  interdisciplinary  majors)  or 
Curriculum  Development  Committee  (for  individual  interdisciplinary 
majors).  The  decision  of  the  Dean  of  the  College  may  be  appealed  to  the 
Academic  Standing  Committee  by  the  student  involved  or  the  recom- 
mending department  or  committee. 

17 


Departmental  Majors — Departmental  majors  are  available  in  the 
following  areas: 

Accounting  History 

Art  Mathematics 

Astronomy  Music 

Biology  Philosophy 

Business  Administration  Physics 

Chemistry  Political  Science 

Computer  Science  Psychology 

Economics  Religion 

English  Sociology/Anthropology 

Foreign  Langauges  and  Theatre 

Literatures 

French,  German,  Spanish 

Established  Interdisciplinary  Majors — The  following  established 
interdisciplinary  majors  include  course  work  in  two  or  more  depart- 
ments: 

Accounting-Mathematics  Literature 

American  Studies  Mass  Communications 

Criminal  Justice  Near  East  Culture  and  Archeology 

International  Studies 

Individual  Interdisciplinary  Majors — Students  may  design  a  major 
which  is  unique  to  their  needs  and  objectives  and  which  combines 
course  work  in  more  than  one  department.  This  major  is  developed  in 
consultation  with  the  student's  faculty  adviser  and  with  a  panel  of 
faculty  members  from  each  of  the  sponsoring  departments.  The  applica- 
tion is  acted  upon  by  the  Curriculum  Development  Committee.  The 
major  normally  consists  of  10  courses  beyond  those  taken  to  satisfy  the 
distribution  requirements.  Students  are  expected  to  complete  at  least  six 
courses  at  the  junior  or  senior  level.  Examples  of  individual  in- 
terdisciplinary majors  are  Racial  and  Cultural  Minorities,  Illustration  In 
the  Print  Medium,  Environmental  Law,  Advertising,  Human  Behavior 
and  Images  of  Man. 


18 


ACADEMIC  ADVISEMENT 

One  advantage  of  a  small  college  is  the  rich  experience  gained  by  the 
close  association  of  students  and  faculty.  The  advisement  program  at 
Lycoming  enables  students  to  discuss  academic  and  other  problems  as 
well  as  opportunities  with  faculty  advisers,  instructors  and  the  staffs  of 
the  Dean  of  the  College  and  the  Dean  of  Student  Services. 

At  the  beginning  of  their  first  semester  of  enrollment,  freshmen  are 
assigned  a  faculty  adviser  who  is  prepared  to  assist  new  college  students 
with  the  challenges  of  an  unfamiliar  social  and  academic  environment. 
All  students  are  required  to  have  a  faculty  adviser,  and  students  who 
have  declared  a  major  must  have  an  adviser  from  within  the  major 
department  or  program. 

Although  the  advisement  program  is  an  important  part  of  the 
Lycoming  academic  experience,  students  are  expected  to  accept  full 
responsibility  for  their  academic  programs,  including  satisfactory  com- 
pletion of  program  and  college-wide  requirements. 

Special  advising  for  selected  professions  is  provided  by  the  health, 
legal  and  theological  professions  advisory  committees.  Students  in- 
terested in  these  professions  should  register  with  the  appropriate 
committee  during  their  first  semester  of  enrollment  at  Lycoming  or 
immediately  after  they  decide  to  enter  these  professions. 

Preparation  for  Health  Professions — The  program  of  pre-pro- 
fessional  education  for  the  health  professions  (allopathic,  dental,  os- 
teopathic, podiatric  and  veterinary  medicine,  optometry,  pharmacy)  is 
organized  around  a  solid  foundation  in  biology,  chemistry,  mathematics 
and  physics  and  a  wide  range  of  subject  matter  from  the  humanities, 
social  sciences  and  fine  arts.  At  least  three  years  of  undergraduate  study 
is  recommended  before  entry  into  a  professional  school;  the  normal 
procedure  is  to  complete  the  bachelor  of  arts  degree. 

Students  interested  in  one  of  the  health  professions  or  in  an  allied 
health  career  should  make  their  intentions  known  to  the  admissions 
office  when  applying  and  to  the  Health  Professions  Advisory  Commit- 
tee (HPAC)  during  their  first  semester.  The  committee  advises  students 
concerning  preparation  for  and  application  to  health  professions' 
schools.  All  pre-health  professions  students  are  invited  to  join  the 
student  pre-health  professions  association.  (See  also  cooperative  pro- 
grams in  podiatric  medicine  and  medical  technology.) 

Preparation  for  Legal  Professions — Lycoming  offers  a  strong 
academic  preparation  for  students  interested  in  law  as  a  profession. 
Admission  to  law  school  is  not  predicated  upon  a  particular  major  or 
area  of  study;  rather,  a  student  is  encouraged  to  design  a  course  of  study 
(traditional  or  interdisciplinary  major)  which  is  of  personal  interest  and 
significance.  While  no  specific  major  is  recommended,  there  are  certain 
skills  of  particular  relevance  to  the  pre-law  student:  clear  writing, 
analytical  thinking  and  language  comprehension.  These  skills  should  be 
developed  during  the  undergraduate  years. 

Pre-law  students  should  register  with  the  Legal  Professions  Ad- 
visory Committee  (LPAC)  upon  entering  Lycoming  and  should  join  the 

19 


Pre-Law  Society  on  campus.  LPAC  assists  the  pre-law  student  through 
advisement,  compilation  of  recommendations  and  dissemination  of 
information  and  materials  about  law  and  the  legal  profession.  It  spon- 
sors Pre-LSAT  workshops  to  help  prepare  students  for  the  law  boards, 
and  an  annual  Pre-Law  Night  which  brings  admission  deans,  law 
students  and  practicing  lawyers  on  campus.  The  Pre-Law  Society  has 
sponsored  films,  speakers  and  field  trips,  including  several  to  the 
United  States  Supreme  Court. 

Preparation  for  Theological  Professions — The  Theological  Pro- 
fessions Advisory  Committee  (TPAC)  acts  as  a  "center"  for  students, 
faculty  and  clergy  to  discuss  the  needs  of  students  who  want  to  prepare 
themselves  for  the  ministry,  religious  education,  advanced  training  in 
religion  or  related  vocations.  Also,  it  may  help  coordinate  internships 
for  students  who  desire  practical  experience  in  the  parish  ministry  or 
related  areas.  Upon  entering  Lycoming,  students  should  register  with 
TPAC  if  they  plan  to  investigate  the  religious  vocations. 

In  general,  students  preparing  to  attend  a  theological  seminary 
should  examine  the  suggestions  set  down  by  the  Association  of  Theolog- 
ical Schools  (available  from  TPAC).  Recommended  is  a  broad  program 
in  the  liberal  arts,  a  major  in  one  of  the  humanities  (English,  history, 
languages,  literature,  philosophy,  religion)  or  one  of  the  social  sciences 
(American  studies,  criminal  justice,  economics,  international  studies, 
political  science,  psychology,  sociology-anthropology)  and  a  variety  of 
electives.  Students  preparing  for  a  career  in  religious  education  should 
major  in  religion  and  elect  five  or  six  courses  in  psychology,  education 
and  sociology.  This  program  of  study  will  qualify  students  to  work  as  an 
educational  assistant  or  a  director  of  religious  education  after  graduate 
study  in  a  theological  seminary. 

REGISTRATION 

During  the  registration  period,  students  file  a  schedule  form  with  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar.  The  filing  of  this  form  by  students  and  its 
acceptance  by  the  college  is  evidence  of  a  commitment  by  students  to 
perform  in  the  courses  listed  to  the  best  of  their  abilities.  Any  change  in 
the  schedule  of  courses  listed  on  the  form,  including  changes  in 
sections,  without  the  formal  approval  of  the  Office  of  the  Registrar  will 
result  in  a  grade  of  F.  Students  may  not  receive  credit  in  courses  in 
which  they  are  not  registered.  Registration  procedures  may  not  be 
initiated  after  the  close  of  the  registration  period. 

During  the  first  10  days  of  classes,  students  may  drop  any  course 
without  any  record  of  such  enrollment  appearing  on  the  permanent 
record,  and  they  may  add  any  course  that  is  not  closed.  Approval  of  the 
instructor  is  required  during  the  last  five  days.  Students  wishing  to  drop 
a  course  between  the  10th  day  and  the  12th  week  of  classes  must  secure 
a  withdrawal  form  from  the  Office  of  the  Registrar,  which  is  presented 
to  the  instructor  of  the  course  in  question,  who  assigns  a  withdrawal 
grade  based  on  the  level  of  the  student's  performance  from  the  begin- 
ning of  the  course  to  the  date  of  withdrawal.  Withdrawal  grades  are  not 

20 


computed  in  the  grade  point  average.  Students  may  not  withdraw  from 
courses  after  the  12th  week  of  a  semester  and  the  comparable  period 
during  the  May  and  summer  terms. 

THE  UNIT  COURSE  SYSTEM 

Instruction  at  Lycoming  College  is  organized,  with  few  exceptions,  on  a 
departmental  basis.  Most  courses  are  unit  courses,  meaning  that  each 
course  taken  is  considered  to  be  equivalent  to  four  semester  hours  of 
credit.  Exceptions  occur  in  applied  music  courses,  which  are  offered  for 
either  one-half  or  one  semester  hour  of  credit,  and  in  departments  that 
have  elected  to  offer  certain  courses  for  the  equivalent  of  two  semester 
hours  of  credit.  Further,  independent  studies  and  internships  carrying 
two  semester  hours  of  credit  may  be  designed.  The  normal  student 
course  load  is  four  courses  during  the  fall  and  spring  semesters. 
Students  who  elect  to  attend  the  special  sessions  may  enroll  in  one 
course  during  the  May  term  and  one  or  two  courses  in  the  summer  term. 
A  student  is  considered  full  time  when  enrolled  for  a  minimum  of  three 
courses  during  the  fall  or  spring  semesters,  one  course  for  the  May  term 
and  two  courses  for  the  summer  term.  Students  may  enroll  in  five 
courses  during  the  fall  and  spring  semesters  if  they  are  Lycoming 
Scholars  or  were  admitted  to  the  Dean's  List  at  the  end  of  the  previous 
semester.  Exceptions  may  be  granted  by  the  Dean  of  the  College. 
Overloads  are  not  permitted  during  the  May  and  summer  terms. 

THE  SYSTEM  OF  GRADING  AND  REPORTING  OF  GRADES 

The  evaluation  of  student  performance  in  credit  courses  is  indicated  by 
the  use  of  traditional  letter  symbols.  These  symbols  and  their  definitions 
are  as  follows: 

A    Excellent  — Signifies  superior  achievement  through  mas- 

tery of  content  or  skills  and  demonstration  of 
creative  and  independent  thinking. 

B     High  Pass  — Signifies  better-than-average  achievement 

wherein  the  student  reveals  insight  and  un- 
derstanding. 

C     Pass  — Signifies   satisfactory   achievement   wherein 

the  student's  work  has  been  of  average  quali- 
ty and  quantity.  The  student  has  demon- 
strated basic  competence  in  the  subject  area 
and  may  enroll  in  additional  course  work. 

D    Low  Pass  — Signifies  unsatisfactory  achievement  wherein 

the  student  met  only  the  minimum  require- 
ments for  passing  the  course  and  should  not 
continue  in  the  subject  area  without  de- 
partmental advice. 

F     Failing  — Signifies  that  the  student  has  not  met  the 

minimum  requirements  for  passing  the 
course. 

21 


I      Incomplete  Work  — Assigned  in  accordance  with  the  restrictions 

of  established  academic  policy. 

S     Passing  Work,  — Converted  from  traditional  grade  of  D  or 

no  grade  assigned  better. 

U    Failing  work,  — Converted  from  traditional  grade  of  F. 

no  grade  assigned. 

X     Audit  — Work  as  an  auditor  for  which  no  credit  is 

earned. 

W    Withdrawal  — Signifies  withdrawal  from  the  course  early  in 

the  term  when  it  cannot  be  determined  that 
the  student  is  passing  or  failing. 

WP  Withdrawal,  passing  — The    student    was    passing    at    the    time    of 

withdrawal;  no  credit  is  earned. 

WF  Withdrawal,  failing     — The    student    was    failing    at    the    time    of 

withdrawal;  no  credit  is  earned. 

Use  of  the  satisfactory/unsatisfactory  grading  option  is  limited  as 
follows  (this  does  not  apply  to  English  1): 

— students  may  enroll  on  an  S/U  basis  in  no  more  than  one  course 
per  semester  and  no  more  than  four  courses  during  their  under- 
graduate career; 

— S/U  courses  completed  after  declaration  of  the  major  may  not  be 
used  to  satisfy  a  requirement  of  that  major,  including  courses 
required  by  the  major  department  which  are  offered  by  other 
departments.  (Instructor-designed  courses  are  excepted  from  this 
limitation.) 

— courses  for  which  a  grade  of  S  is  recorded  may  not  be  used 
toward  fulfillment  of  any  distribution  requirement. 

— students  may  not  enroll  in  English  2  on  an  S/U  basis. 

— a  course  selected  on  an  S/U  basis  which  is  subsequently 
withdrawn  will  not  count  toward  the  four-course  limit. 

— instructor- designated  courses  may  be  offered  during  the  May 
term  with  the  approval  of  the  Dean  of  the  College.  Such  courses 
are  not  counted  toward  the  four -course  limit. 

— S/U  grades  are  not  computed  in  the  grade  point  average. 

— students  electing  the  S/U  option  may  designate  a  minimum 
acceptable  letter  grade  of  A  or  B.  If  the  letter  grade  actually  earned 
by  the  student  equals  or  exceeds  this  minimum,  that  letter  grade 
is  entered  on  the  student's  permanent  record  and  is  computed  in 
the  grade  point  average.  In  such  a  case,  the  course  does  not  count 
toward  the  four-course  limit.  If  the  student  does  not  indicate  a 
minimum  acceptable  letter  grade  or  if  the  letter  grade  actually 
earned  is  lower  than  the  minimum  designated  by  the  student,  the 
Registrar  substitutes  an  S  for  any  passing  grade  (A,  B,  C  or  D)  and 
a  U  for  an  F  grade. 

— students  must  declare  the  S/U  option  before  the  end  of  the  period 
during  which  courses  may  be  added  during  any  given  semester 
or  term. 

22 


— instructors  are  not  notified  which  of  their  students  are  enrolled  on 

an  S/U  basis. 
— students  electing  the  S/U  option  are  expected  to  perform  the  same 

work  as  those  enrolled  on  a  regular  basis. 
Incomplete  grades  may  be  given  if,  for  absolutely  unavoidable 
reasons  (usually  medical  in  nature),  the  student  has  not  been  able  to 
complete  the  work  requisite  to  the  course.  An  incomplete  grade  must  be 
removed  within  six  weeks  of  the  next  regular  semester. 

ATTENDANCE 

The  academic  program  at  Lycoming  is  based  upon  the  assumption  that 
there  is  value  in  class  attendance  for  all  students.  Individual  instructors 
have  the  prerogative  of  establishing  reasonable  absence  regulations  in 
any  course.  The  student  is  responsible  for  learning  and  observing  these 
regulations. 

STUDENT  RECORDS 

The  policy  regarding  student  educational  records  is  designed  to  protect 
the  privacy  of  students  against  unwarranted  intrusions  and  is  consistent 
with  Section  438  of  the  General  Education  Provision  Act  (commonly 
known  as  the  Family  Educational  Rights  and  Privacy  Act  of  1974,  as 
amended).  The  details  of  the  college  policy  on  student  records  and  the 
procedures  for  gaining  access  to  student  records  are  contained  in  the 
current  issue  of  The  Pathfinder,  which  is  available  in  the  library  and  the 
Office  of  the  Dean  of  the  College. 

ACADEMIC  STANDING  AND  ACADEMIC  HONESTY 

Students  will  be  placed  on  academic  probation  if  either  the  number  of 
hours  completed  or  cumulative  grade  point  average  falls  below  the 
following  standards: 

Seniester  Enrolled  Hours  Completed  Cumulative  CPA 

(Full-time) 

1  12  1.66 

2  28  1.85 

3  44  1.90 

4  60  2.00 

5  76  2.00 

6  92  2.00 

7  108  2.00 

8  124  2.00 
Students  will  be  subject  to  suspension  from  the  college  if  they: 

— can  not  achieve  good  standing  by  the  end  of  summer  term; 
— are  on  probation  for  two  consecutive  semesters; 
— achieve  a  grade  point  average  of  1.00  or  below  during  any  one 
semester. 
Students  will  be  subject  to  dismissal  from  the  college  if  they: 
— can  not  reasonably  complete  all  requirements  for  a  degree; 

23 


— exceed  24  semester  hours  of  unsuccessful  course  attempts  (grades 
of  F,  U,  W,  WP,  WF),  except  in  the  case  of  withdrawal  for  medical 
or  psychological  reasons. 

The  integrity  of  the  academic  process  of  the  college  requires  honesty 
in  all  phases  of  the  instructional  program.  The  college  assumes  that 
students  are  committed  to  the  principle  of  academic  honesty.  Students 
who  fail  to  honor  this  commitment  are  subject  to  dismissal.  Procedural 
guidelines  and  rules  for  the  adjudication  of  cases  of  academic  dishonesty 
are  printed  in  The  Faculty  Handbook  and  The  Pathfinder  (the  student 
academic  handbook),  copies  of  which  are  available  in  the  library. 

CREDIT  BY  EXAMINATION 

Advanced  Placement — Entering  freshmen  who  have  completed  an 
advanced  course  while  in  secondary  school  and  who  have  taken  the 
appropriate  advanced  placement  examination  of  the  College  Entrance 
Examination  Board  (CEEB)  are  encouraged  to  apply  for  credit  and 
advanced  placement  at  the  time  of  admission.  A  grade  of  three  or  above 
is  considered  satisfactory. 

College  Level  Examination  Program  (CLEP) — Students  may  earn 
college  credit  for  superior  achievement  through  CLEP.  By  achieving  at 
the  75th  percentile  or  above  on  the  General  Examinations  and  the  65th 
percentile  or  above  on  approved  Subject  Examinations,  students  may 
earn  up  to  50  percent  of  the  course  requirements  for  a  bachelor  of  arts 
degree.  Although  these  examinations  may  be  taken  after  enrollment, 
new  students  who  are  competent  in  a  given  area  are  encouraged  to  take 
the  examinations  of  their  choice  during  the  second  semester  of  their 
senior  year  so  that  Lycoming  will  have  the  test  scores  available  for 
registration  advisement  for  the  first  semester  of  enrollment.  Further 
information  about  CLEP  may  be  obtained  through  the  secondary  school 
guidance  office  or  the  Office  of  Admissions  at  Lycoming  College. 

ACADEMIC  HONORS 

Dean's  List — Students  are  admitted  to  the  Dean's  List  at  the  end  of 
the  fall  and  spring  semesters  if  they  have  completed  at  least  four  courses 
with  other  than  S/U  grades,  and  have  a  minimum  grade  point  average  of 
precisely  3.50  for  the  semester. 

Graduation  Honors — Students  are  awarded  the  bachelor  of  arts 
degree  with  honors  when  they  have  earned  the  following  precise  grade 
point  averages  based  on  all  courses  attempted,  including  courses 
transferred  from  other  institutions  to  Lycoming: 

summa  cum  laude 3.90-4.00 

magna  cum  laude 3.50-3.89 

cum  laude  3.25-3.49 


24 


Academic  Honor  Awards  and  Societies — Superior  academic 
achievement  is  recognized  through  the  conferring  of  awards  at  the 
annual  Honors  Day  convocation  and  Commencement  and  through 
election  to  membership  in  the  following  honor  societies: 

Blue  Key Freshman  Men 

Gold  Key Freshman  Women 

Beta  Beta  Beta Biology 

Omicron  Delta  Epsilon Economics 

Phi  Alpha  Theta History 

Phi  Sigma  Tau Philosophy 

Sigma  Pi  Sigma Physics 

Pi  Sigma  Alpha Political  Science 

Psi  Chi Psychology 

Pi  Gamma  Mu Social  Science 

Phi  Kappa  Phi General  Academic 

Departmental  Honors — Honors  projects  are  normally  undertaken 
only  in  a  student's  major,  and  are  available  only  to  exceptionally  well- 
qualified  students  who  have  a  solid  background  in  the  area  of  the  project 
and  are  capable  of  considerable  self-direction.  The  prerequisites  for 
registration  in  an  honors  program  are  as  follows: 

— a  faculty  member  from  the  department(s)  in  which  the  honors 
project  is  to  be  undertaken  must  agree  to  be  the  director  and  must 
secure  departmental  approval  of  the  project. 
— the  director,  in  consultation  with  the  student,  must  convene  a 
committee  consisting  of  two  faculty  members  from  the  depart- 
ment in  which  the  project  is  to  be  undertaken,  one  of  whom  is  the 
director  of  the  project,  and  one  faculty  member  from  each  of  two 
other  departments  related  to  the  subject  matter  of  the  study. 
— the  honors  committee  must  then  certify  by  their  signatures  on  the 
application  that  the  project  in  question  is  academically  legitimate 
and  worthy  of  pursuit  as  an  honors  project,  and  that  the  student 
in  question  is  qualified  to  pursue  the  project. 
— the  project  must  be  approved  by  the  Committee  on  Individual 

Studies. 
Students  successfully  complete  honors  projects  by  satisfying  the 
following  conditions  in  accordance  with  guidelines  established  by  the 
Committee  on  Individual  Studies: 

— the  student  must  produce  a  substantial  research  paper,  critical 
study  or  creative  project.  If  the  end  product  is  a  creative  project, 
a  critical  paper  analyzing  the  techniques  and  principles  employed 
and  the  nature  of  the  achievement  represented  in  the  project  shall 
be  submitted. 
— the  student  must  successfully  explain  and  defend  the  work  in  a 

final  oral  examination  given  by  the  honors  committee. 
— the  honors  committee  must  certify  that  the  student  has  suc- 
cessfully defended  the  project  and  that  the  student's  achievement 
is  clearly  superior  to  that  which  would  ordinarily  be  required  to 
earn  a  grade  of  "A"  in  a  regular  independent  studies  course. 

25 


— the  Committee  on  Individual  Studies  must  certify  that  the  stu- 
dent has  satisfied  all  of  the  conditions  mentioned  above. 

Except  in  unusual  circumstances,  honors  projects  are  expected  to 
involve  independent  study  in  two  consecutive  unit  courses.  Successful 
completion  of  the  honors  project  will  cause  the  designation  of  honors  in 
that  department  to  be  placed  upon  the  permanent  record.  Acceptable 
theses  are  deposited  in  the  college  library.  In  the  event  that  the  study  is 
not  completed  successfully  or  is  not  deemed  worthy  of  honors,  the 
student  shall  be  re-registered  in  independent  studies  and  given  a  final 
grade  for  the  course. 


26 


SPECIAL  FEATURES 

Independent  Studies — Independent  studies  are  available  to  any 
qualified  student  who  wishes  to  engage  in  and  receive  academic  credit 
for  any  academically  legitimate  course  of  study  for  which  he  or  she  could 
not  otherwise  receive  credit.  It  may  be  pursued  at  any  level  (introduc- 
tory, intermediate  or  advanced)  and  in  any  department,  whether  or  not 
the  student  is  a  major  in  that  department.  Studies  projects  which 
duplicate  catalog  courses  are  sometimes  possible,  and  are  subject  to  the 
same  provisions  which  apply  to  all  studies  projects.  In  order  for  a 
student  to  be  registered  in  an  independent  study  course,  the  following 
conditions  must  be  satisfied: 

— an  appropriate  member  of  the  faculty  must  agree  to  supervise  the 
project  and  must  certify  by  signing  the  application  form  that  the 
project  is  academically  legitimate  and  involves  an  amount  of  work 
appropriate  for  the  amount  of  academic  credit  requested,  and  that 
the  student  in  question  is  qualified  to  pursue  the  project. 
— the  studies  project  must  be  approved  by  the  chairman  of  the 

department  in  which  the  studies  project  is  to  be  undertaken. 
— after   the   project  is   approved   by    the   instructor   and   by   the 
chairman  of  the  appropriate  department,  the  studies  project  must 
be  approved  by  the  Committee  on  Individual  Studies. 

In  addition,  participation  in  independent  studies  projects,  with  the 
exception  of  those  which  duplicate  catalog  courses,  is  subject  to  the 
following: 

— students  may  not  engage  in  more  than  one  independent  studies 
project  during  any  given  semester. 

— students  may  not  engage  in  more  than  two  independent  studies 
projects  during  their  academic  career  at  Lycoming  College. 

As  with  other  academic  policies,  any  exceptions  to  these  two  rules 
must  be  approved  by  the  Academic  Standing  Committee. 

Internship  Program — An  internship  is  a  course  jointly  sponsored 
by  the  college  and  a  public  or  private  agency  or  subdivision  of  the 
college  in  which  a  student  is  enabled  to  earn  college  credit  by  partici- 
pating in  some  active  capacity  as  an  assistant,  aide  or  apprentice.  The 
objectives  of  the  internship  program  are  (1)  to  further  the  development 
of  a  central  core  of  values,  awarenesses,  strategies,  skills,  and  informa- 
tion through  experiences  outside  the  classroom  or  other  campus  situ- 
ations, and  (2)  to  facilitate  the  integration  of  theory  and  practice  by 
encouraging  students  to  relate  their  on-campus  academic  experiences 
more  directly  to  society  in  general  and  to  possible  career  and  other  post- 
baccalaureate  objectives  in  particular. 

Any  junior  or  senior  student  in  good  academic  standing  may 
petition  the  Committee  on  Individual  Studies  for  approval  to  serve  as  an 
intern  for  one  or  two  semesters.  A  maximum  of  16  credits  can  be  earned. 
Guidelines  for  program  development,  assignment  of  tasks  and  academic 
requirements,  such  as  exams,  papers,  reports,  grades,  etc.,  are  estab- 
lished in  consultation  with  a  faculty  director  at  Lycoming  and  an  agency 
supervisor  at  the  place  of  internship. 

27 


Students  with  diverse  majors  have  participated  in  a  wide  variety  of 
internships,  including  those  with  the  Allenwood  Federal  Prison  Camp, 
Lycoming  County  Commissioners  Office,  Department  of  Environmental 
Resources,  Head  Start,  Lycoming  County  Historical  Society,  business 
and  accounting  firms,  law  offices,  hospitals,  social  service  agencies, 
banks  and  congressional  offices. 

May  Term — The  May  term  is  a  four-week  voluntary  session  de- 
signed to  provide  students  with  experimental  and  special  courses  that 
are  not  normally  available  during  the  fall  and  spring  semesters  and 
summer  term.  Some  courses  are  offered  on  campus;  others  involve 
travel.  A  number  offer  interdisciplinary  credit.  Illustrations  of  the  types 
of  courses  offered  during  the  May  term  are: 

(a)  Study-Travel:  Cultural  Tours  of  Germany,  Spain,  France,  Ire- 
land and  the  United  Kingdom;  Archeological  Expeditions  to  the  Middle 
East;  Oceanographic  Expeditions  in  Bermuda;  Literature  of  the  Sea  on 
location  in  the  Caribbean;  Anthropological  Expeditions  to  New  Mexico 
to  study  tri-cultural  communities;  Utopian  Communities;  Photography 
Workshops  in  Vermont;  Revolutionary  and  Civil  War  Sites. 

(b)  On-Campus:  Financial  Statement  Analysis,  Silk-screen  Printing, 
Field  Geology,  History  of  Astronomy,  Field  Ornithology,  Chemical 
Analysis,  Managing  the  Small  Business,  Women  in  Management, 
Energy  Economics,  Public  School  Curriculum,  Writer's  Seminar, 
Modern  American  Humor,  The  Norman  Kingdom,  Practical  Logic, 
Psychology  of  Group  Processes,  Ancient  Near  East  Religion,  Juvenile 
Delinquency.  Some  courses  offered  during  the  fall  and  spring  semesters 
are  offered  during  the  May  term  as  well. 

Although  participation  in  the  May  term  is  voluntary,  student 
response  has  been  outstanding  with  approximately  25  to  30  percent  of 
the  student  body  enrolling.  In  addition  to  the  courses  themselves, 
attractions  include  small  and  informal  classes  and  reduced  tuition  rates. 

Study  Abroad — Students  have  the  opportunity  to  study  abroad 
under  auspices  of  approved  universities  and  agencies.  While  study 
abroad  is  particularly  attractive  to  students  majoring  in  foreign  lan- 
guages and  literatures,  this  opportunity  is  open  to  all  students  in  good 
academic  standing.  Mastery  of  a  foreign  language  is  desirable  but  not 
required  in  all  programs.  A  file  of  opportunities  is  available  in  the 
library. 

NOTE:  Lycoming  College  cannot  assume  responsibility  for  the  health,  safety  or  welfare 
of  any  student  engaged  in  or  en  route  to  or  from  any  off-campus  study  or  activity  not 
under  the  exclusive  jurisdiction  of  this  institution. 

Auditors — Any  person  may  audit  courses  at  Lycoming  at  one- 
fourth  tuition  per  course.  Laboratory  and  other  special  fees  must  be  paid 
in  full.  Examinations,  papers  and  other  evaluation  devices  are  not 
required  of  auditors,  but  individual  arrangements  may  be  made  to 
complete  such  exercises  with  the  consent  of  the  instructor. 

28 


Part-Time  Students — Any  person  may  take  up  to  two  courses 
during  any  semester  or  summer  term  (one  in  May  term).  Part-time 
special  students  pay  the  $15  application  fee  for  the  first  registration  and 
the  part-time  tuition  rate  in  effect  at  the  time  of  each  enrollment. 


COOPERATIVE  PROGRAMS 

Lycoming  has  developed  several  cooperative  programs  in  order  to 
provide  students  with  opportunities  to  extend  their  knowledge,  abili- 
ties and  talents  in  selected  areas  through  access  to  the  specialized 
academic  programs  and  facilities  of  other  colleges,  universities, 
academies  and  hospitals.  Although  thorough  advisement  and  curricular 
planning  are  provided  for  each  of  the  cooperative  programs,  admission 
to  Lycoming  and  registration  in  the  program  of  choice  does  not 
guarantee  admission  to  the  cooperating  institution.  The  prerogative  of 
admitting  students  to  the  cooperative  aspect  of  the  program  rests  with 
the  cooperating  institution.  Students  who  are  interested  in  a  cooperative 
program  should  contact  the  coordinator  during  the  first  week  of  the  first 
semester  of  their  enrollment  at  Lycoming.  This  is  necessary  to  plan  their 
course  programs  in  a  manner  that  will  insure  completion  of  required 
courses  according  to  the  schedule  stipulated  for  the  program.  All 
cooperative  programs  require  special  coordination  of  course  scheduling 
at  Lycoming. 

Engineering — Combining  the  advantages  of  a  liberal  arts  education 
and  the  technical  training  of  an  engineering  curriculum,  this  program  is 
offered  in  conjunction  with  Bucknell  University  and  The  Pennsylvania 
State  University.  Students  complete  three  years  of  study  at  Lycoming 
and  two  years  at  the  cooperating  university.  Upon  satisfactory  comple- 
tion of  the  first  year  of  engineering  studies,  Lycoming  awards  the 
bachelor  of  arts  degree.  When  students  successfully  complete  the 
second  year  of  engineering  studies,  the  cooperating  university  awards 
the  bachelor  of  science  degree  in  engineering. 

At  Lycoming,  students  complete  the  distribution  program  and 
courses  in  physics,  mathematics  and  chemistry.  Engineering  specialities 
offered  at  Bucknell  University  include  chemical,  civil,  electrical  and 
mechanical.  The  Pennsylvania  State  University  offers  aerospace, 
chemical,  civil,  electrical,  environmental,  industrial,  mechanical,  min- 
ing, nuclear  and  petroleum  engineering. 

Forestry  or  Environmental  Studies — Lycoming  College  offers  a 
cooperative  program  with  Duke  University  in  environmental  man- 
agement and  forestry.  Qualified  students  can  earn  the  bachelor's  and 
master's  degrees  in  five  years,  spending  three  years  at  Lycoming  and 
two  years  at  Duke.  All  Lycoming  distribution  and  major  requirements 
must  be  completed  by  the  end  of  the  junior  year.  At  the  end  of  the  first 
year  at  Duke,  the  B.A.  degree  will  be  awarded  by  Lycoming.  Duke  will 
award  the  professional  degree  of  Master  of  Forestry  or  Master  of 
Environmental  Management  to  qualified  candidates  at  the  end  of  the 
second  year. 

29 


The  major  program  emphases  at  Duke  are  Natural  Resources 
Science/Ecology,  Natural  Resources  Systems  Science  and  Natural  Re- 
sources Economics/Policy.  The  program  is  flexible  enough,  however,  to 
accommodate  a  variety  of  individual  designs.  An  undergraduate  major 
in  one  of  the  natural  sciences,  social  sciences  or  business  may  provide 
good  preparation  for  the  programs  at  Duke,  but  a  student  with  any 
undergraduate  concentration  will  be  considered  for  admission.  All 
students  need  at  least  two  courses  each  in  biology,  mathematics  and 
economics. 

Students  begin  the  program  at  Duke  in  July  after  their  junior  year  at 
Lycoming  with  a  one-month  session  of  field  work  in  natural  resource 
measurements.  They  must  complete  a  total  of  60  units  which  generally 
takes  four  semesters. 

Some  students  prefer  to  complete  the  bachelor's  degree  before 
undertaking  graduate  study  at  Duke.  The  master's  degree  requirements 
for  these  students  are  the  same  as  for  those  students  entering  after  the 
junior  year,  but  the  60-unit  requirement  may  be  reduced  for  completed 
relevant  undergraduate  work  of  satisfactory  quality.  All  credit  reduc- 
tions are  determined  individually  and  consider  the  student's  educa- 
tional background  and  objectives. 

Medical  Technology — Students  desiring  a  career  in  medical 
technology  may  either  complete  a  bachelor  of  arts  program  followed  by 
a  clinical  internship  at  any  American  Medical  Association  accredited 
hospital  or  they  may  complete  the  cooperative  program.  Students 
electing  the  cooperative  program  normally  study  for  three  years  at 
Lycoming,  during  which  time  they  complete  24  unit  courses,  including 
the  college  distribution  requirements,  a  major  and  requirements  of  the 
National  Accrediting  Agency  for  Clinical  Laboratory  Sciences 
(NAACLS).  The  current  requirements  of  the  NAACLS  are:  four  courses 
in  chemistry  (one  of  which  must  be  either  organic  or  biochemistry);  four 
courses  in  biology  (including  courses  in  microbiology  and  immunology), 
and  one  course  in  mathematics. 

Students  in  the  cooperative  program  usually  major  in  biology, 
following  a  modified  major  of  six  unit  courses  that  exempts  them  from 
Ecology  (Biology  24)  and  Plant  Sciences  (Biology  25).  Students  must  take 
either  Animal  Physiology  (Biology  23)  or  Cell  Physiology  (Biology  35). 
The  cooperative  program  requires  successful  completion  of  a  one-year 
internship  at  an  American  Medical  Association  accredited  hospital. 
Lycoming  is  affiliated  with  the  following  accredited  hospitals:  Williams- 
port,  Divine  Providence,  Robert  Packer,  Lancaster  and  Abington.  Stu- 
dents in  the  cooperative  program  receive  credit  at  Lycoming  for  each  of 
eight  unit  courses  in  biology  and  chemistry  successfully  completed 
during  the  clinical  internship.  Successful  completion  of  the  Registry 
Examination  is  not  considered  a  graduation  requirement  at  Lycoming 
College. 

Students  entering  a  clinical  internship  for  one  year  after  graduation 
from  Lycoming  must  complete  all  of  the  requirements  of  the  cooperative 
program,  but  are  not  eligible  for  the  biology  major  exemptions  indicated 

30 


above.  Upon  graduation,  such  students  may  apply  for  admission  to  a 
clinical  program  at  any  hospital. 

Podiatry — Students  interested  in  podiatry  may  either  seek  ad- 
mission to  a  college  of  podiatric  medicine  upon  completion  of  the 
bachelor  of  arts  degree  or  through  the  Accelerated  Podiatric  Medical 
Education  Curriculum  Program  (APMEC).  The  latter  program  provides 
an  opportunity  for  students  to  qualify  for  admission  to  the  Pennsylvania 
College  of  Podiatric  Medicine  (PCPM)  after  three  years  of  study  at 
Lycoming.  At  Lycoming,  students  in  the  APMEC  program  must  suc- 
cessfully complete  24  unit  courses,  including  the  distribution  program 
and  a  basic  foundation  in  biology,  chemistry,  physics  and  mathematics. 
During  the  first  year  of  study  at  PCPM,  students  must  successfully 
complete  the  equivalent  of  48  semester  hours  of  basic  science  courses  in 
addition  to  a  program  in  introduction  to  podiatry.  Successful  completion 
of  the  first  year  of  professional  training  will  contribute  toward  the 
fulfillment  of  the  course  requirements  for  the  bachelor  of  arts  degree  at 
Lycoming. 

Reserve  Officers  Training  Corps  Program  (R.O.T.C.) — The  pro- 
gram provides  a  voluntary  opportunity  for  Lycoming  students  to  enroll 
on  a  non-credit  basis  in  the  Bucknell  University  R.O.T.C.  unit.  Lycom- 
ing notes  enrollment  in  and  successful  completion  of  the  program  on 
student  transcripts.  Military  Science  is  a  four-year  program  divided  into 
a  basic  course  given  during  the  freshman  and  sophomore  years  and  an 
advanced  course  given  during  the  junior  and  senior  years.  Students 
who  have  not  completed  the  basic  course  may  qualify  for  the  advanced 
course  by  completing  summer  camp  between  the  sophomore  and  junior 
years.  Students  enrolled  in  the  advanced  course  receive  a  monthly 
stipend  of  $100  for  up  to  10  months  a  year.  Students  successfully 
completing  the  advanced  course  and  advanced  summer  camp  between 
the  junior  and  senior  years  will  qualify  for  a  commission  as  a  Second 
Lieutenant  in  the  United  States  Army  upon  graduation,  and  will  incur  a 
service  obligation  in  the  active  Army  or  Army  Reserves.  The  only 
expense  to  the  student  for  this  program  is  the  deposit  referred  to  in 
Chapter  III  under  "Entry  Fee  and  Deposits." 

Student  Enrichment  Semester — This  voluntary  program  is  de- 
signed to  expand  academic  and  life  opportunities  for  students  and  to 
provide  for  participation  in  specialized  programs  and  courses  not 
available  at  Lycoming.  Other  members  of  the  program  are  Bucknell  and 
Susquehanna  Universities,  the  Williamsport  Area  Community  College, 
and  Bloomsburg,  Lock  Haven  and  Mansfield  State  Colleges.  Students 
other  than  freshmen  enroll  full  time  for  credit,  normally  for  one 
semester  or  term,  at  any  participating  institution  in  selected  courses. 
Students  in  the  program  remain  fully  enrolled  as  degree  candidates  at 
their  home  institutions.  A  special  opportunity  within  the  program  is  the 
cross-registration  arrangement  with  the  Williamsport  Area  Community 
College  whereby  students  may  enroll  for  less  than  a  full-time  course 
load  while  remaining  enrolled  in  courses  at  Lycoming. 

31 


Washington,  United  Nations  and  London  Semesters — With  the 
consent  of  the  Department  of  Political  Science,  selected  students  are 
permitted  to  study  in  Washington,  D.C.  at  The  American  University  for 
one  full  semester.  They  may  choose  from  seven  different  programs: 
Washington  Semester,  Urban  Semester,  Foreign  Policy  Semester,  In- 
ternational Development  Semester,  Economic  Policy  Semester,  Science 
and  Technology  Semester,  American  Studies  Semester. 

With  the  consent  of  either  the  Department  of  History  or  Political 
Science,  selected  students  may  enroll  at  Drew  University  in  Madison, 
N.J.,  in  the  United  Nations  Semester,  which  is  designed  to  provide  a 
first-hand  acquaintance  with  the  world  organization.  Students  with 
special  interests  in  world  history,  international  relations,  law  and 
politics  are  eligible  to  participate. 

The  London  Semester  programs  of  Drew  and  The  American  Uni- 
versity emphasize  European  history,  politics  and  culture.  Interested 
students  participate  with  the  consent  of  either  the  Department  of 
History  or  Political  Science. 

Normally  the  above  special  semester  programs  are  open  only  to 
juniors. 

Lycoming  College  cannot  assume  responsibility  for  the  health,  safety  or  welfare  of 
students  engaged  in  or  en  route  to  or  from  any  off-campus  studies  or  activities  which  are 
not  under  the  exclusive  jurisdiction  of  this  institution. 

THE  LYCOMING  SCHOLAR  PROGRAM 

The  Lycoming  College  Scholar  Program  is  a  special  program  for  special 
people.  It  is  designed  to  meet  the  needs  and  aspirations  of  highly 
motivated  students  of  superior  intellectual  ability.  It  offers  these  people 
the  opportunity  to  develop  their  full  potential  through  an  innovative 
and  demanding  academic  course  of  study.  It  is  a  constantly  evolving, 
carefully  supervised  program  which  keeps  pace  with  new  trends  in 
education.  Since  it  consists  of  carefully  selected  and  supervised  stu- 
dents, it  can  incorporate  ideas  and  policies  far  in  advance  of  the 
institution  as  a  whole. 

The  present  Scholar  Program  features  a  strong  core  curriculum  so 
that  its  students  will  have  the  kind  of  background  in  the  liberal  arts 
which  educational  leaders  throughout  the  nation  now  recognize  as  a 
fundamental  necessity  in  coping  with  a  rapidly  changing,  increasingly 
complex  world.  The  program  also  attempts  to  help  students  understand 
the  relationships  between  the  academic  disciplines  by  incorporating 
special  seminars  which  draw  together  the  specific  content  of  various 
fields  into  a  coherent  whole  so  that  the  information  can  be  applied  to 
important  issues  of  the  present  and  the  future. 

In  addition,  the  program  recognizes  the  positive  aspects  of  a  major, 
which  prepares  students  to  assume  specific  roles  in  life  by  providing 
participants  the  opportunity  to  engage  in  serious  independent  study 
and  thought  culminating  in  a  major  senior  project  presented  to  fellow 
scholars. 

32 


In  short,  the  Scholar  Program  represents  a  strong  commitment  on 
the  part  of  Lycoming  College  to  meet  the  needs  of  talented  students  who 
themselves  have  a  sincere  commitment  to  high  quality  scholarship  and 
intellectual  development. 

Students  are  admitted  to  the  program  through  invitation  by  the 
Scholar  Council,  a  group  which  oversees  all  aspects  of  the  program.  The 
council  consists  of  four  students  elected  by  current  scholars  and  four 
faculty  selected  by  the  Dean  of  the  College.  The  guidelines  governing 
selection  of  new  scholars  are  flexible  because  exceptional  individuals 
express  their  talents  in  different  ways.  Some  do  so  through  traditional 
indicators  of  academic  excellence,  such  as  superior  rank  in  class,  high 
GPA  or  superior  SAT  scores;  others  through  extracurricular  activities 
which  demand  a  high  degree  of  intellectual  curiosity,  motivation, 
imagination,  creativity  or  desire  for  excellence,  and  still  others  through 
an  obvious  commitment  to  the  value  of  intellectual  dialogue,  independ- 
ent thought  and  the  concept  of  an  outstanding  liberal  arts  education. 

To  remain  in  the  program,  students  must  maintain  an  average  of 
3.00  or  better.  Students  dropping  below  this  average  will  be  placed  on 
probation  until  their  average  is  again  satisfactory,  or  they  are  asked  to 
leave  the  program. 

To  graduate  as  a  Scholar,  students  must  have  at  least  a  3.25 
cumulative  average.  They  must  take  the  First  Year  Scholar  Seminar 
during  their  first  semester  in  the  program.  In  addition,  the  following 
core  requirements  must  be  completed. 

A.  Writing.  Scholars  must  display  above  average  writing  skills  by 
the  end  of  the  sophomore  year,  as  certified  by  the  Department  of 
English  and  the  Scholar  Council.  This  requirement  may  be  met  by 
obtaining  a  sufficiently  high  score  on  an  appropriate  CLEP  examination 
or  by  a  grade  of  "B"  in  English  2.  Students  not  meeting  the  requirement 
in  either  of  these  ways  by  the  end  of  the  freshman  year  will  be  asked  to 
do  extra  work  until  the  competency  is  reached. 

B.  Foreign  Language.  Scholars  must  complete  the  second  semester 
of  an  intermediate  level  language  course,  or  one  numbered  higher,  or 
demonstrate  an  equivalent  proficiency  in  an  exam  designated  by  the 
Department  of  Foreign  Languages. 

C.  History.  Scholars  must  complete  History  10,  11  (Europe  1500  to 
present). 

D.  Mathematical  Science.  Scholars  must  successfully  complete  one 
course  in  mathematical  sciences  from  among  the  following:  9,  13,  15,  18 
or  higher. 

E.  Physical  Education.  Scholars  must  satisfy  the  same  physical 
education  requirement  stipulated  by  the  college  for  all  students. 

F.  Scholars  must  complete  one  course  and  one  Scholar  Seminar  in 
each  of  the  four  divisions  of  study  described  below.  After  work  in  a 
given  division  is  completed,  students  will  take  a  Scholar  Seminar 
specifically  designed  for  that  division. 

The  four  divisions  of  learning  in  the  Scholar  Program  are  designed 
to  parallel  the  college  distribution  requirements  not  included  in  the 
Scholar  Program  core  curriculum.   The  Scholar  Council  gives  these 

33 


slightly  different  titles:  Studies  in  Society,  Philosophy  and  Religion, 
Literature  and  the  Fine  Arts,  Modeling  Quantitative  Phenomena. 
These  titles  differ  because  the  council  reserves  the  right  to  allow  its 
students  to  take  courses  outside  the  departments  included  in  the 
traditional  distribution  structure  if  those  courses  parallel  those  in  the 
college-wide  requirements.1 

Scholars  must  take  one  "upper  level"  course  in  each  division  and 
one  seminar  designated  by  the  Scholar  Council,  which  develops  a 
transdisciplinary  approach  to  a  problem  relating  to  that  area.  Generally, 
courses  from  the  appropriate  departments  numbered  20  or  above  will 
satisfy  this  upper-level  requirement.  In  some  areas,  especially  Modeling 
Quantitative  Phenomena,  Scholars  will  have  to  take  lower-level  courses 
as  prerequisites  to  upper-level  ones.  This  is  designed  to  encourage 
Scholars  to  pursue  a  more  rigorous  curriculum.  Scholars  will  find  it 
possible  in  most  cases  to  take  a  single  course  in  that  track  if  they  select 
wisely. 

G.  A  senior  project  must  be  completed  based  on  some  aspects  of  the 
major.  Normally,  this  project  will  be  done  as  either  an  independent  or 
honors  study  sponsored  by  an  instructor  from  the  major  field  and  a 
faculty  member  of  the  Council. 

H.  Scholars  must  complete  a  major  and  32  units,  exclusive  of  the 
First  Year  Scholar  Seminar. 


'Certain  departments  offer  courses  that  clearly  fit  in  more  than  one  division.  For  example, 
psychology  offers  courses  that  belong  in  the  quantitative  division  and  others  that  belong 
in  the  studies  in  society  area. 


34 


CHAPTER  V 
STUDENT  SERVICES 

ADMINISTRATION 

The  program  of  student  services  at  Lycoming  is  administered  by  the 
Office  of  Student  Services.  It  is  designed  to  respond  to  a  diversity  of 
student  needs.  The  four  staff  members,  three  of  whom  live  on  campus, 
are  assigned  the  specific  responsibilities  of: 

— career  counseling  and  placement; 

— residence  life; 

— student  activities,  student  union,  student  government,  In- 
trafraternity  Council  and  Panhellenic  Adviser,  retention  program; 

— religious  life,  health  services,  study  skills  program,  reading 
improvement  courses. 

All  members  of  the  staff  are  available  to  counsel  and  advise 
individual  students. 

PERSONAL  COUNSELING 

All  members  of  the  staff  of  the  Office  of  Student  Services  are  qualified 
and  available  to  provide  non-therapeutic  assistance  to  students  with 
adjustment  problems.  A  psychiatrist  serves  as  a  consultant  to  the  staff 
and  is  available  for  evaluation  of  individual  students  who  may  be  in 
need  of  professional  services.  Continuing  therapy  is  available  through 
referral  to  public  agencies  and  private  clinicians  in  the  Williamsport 
community.  Financial  arrangements  for  these  referral  services  are  made 
directly  by  the  student  with  the  agency  and/or  individual  clinician 
involved. 

HEALTH  SERVICES 

Normal  medical  treatment  by  the  health  service  staff  at  the  college  is 
provided  without  cost  to  the  student.  During  the  fall  and  spring 
semesters,  the  college  maintains  an  out-patient  service  in  Rich  Hall.  It  is 
staffed  with  a  registered  nurse  five  days  a  week  from  9:00  a.m.  to  5:00 
p.m.  The  college  physician  is  available  from  11:00  a.m.  to  12:00  noon, 
Monday  through  Friday.  At  other  times,  emergency  care  is  available  at 
the  emergency  rooms  of  Williamsport  and  Divine  Providence  Hospitals, 
located  a  short  distance  from  the  campus.  The  college  pays  the  emer- 
gency room  charge  and  the  emergency  room  physician's  fee  for  illness 
when  the  health  service  is  closed. 

Medical  service  charges  paid  by  the  student  are:  emergency  room 
and  emergency  room  physician's  charges  (except  as  indicated  above), 
special  medications,  X-rays,  surgery,  care  for  major  accidents,  im- 
munizations, examinations  for  glasses,  physician's  visits  other  than  in 
the  health  service,  referrals  for  treatment  by  specialists,  special  nursing 
services  and  special  services. 

35 


Entering  students  must  provide  basic  health  information  to  the 
college  between  the  time  of  admission  and  the  beginning  of  classes  of 
the  term  to  which  they  are  admitted.  This  information  is  secured 
through  college  participation  in  the  computerized  health  information 
service  provided  by  Medical  Datamation,  Inc.  New  students  complete 
the  DASH  Medical  Information  Questionnaire  that  is  mailed  to  students 
shortly  after  they  have  confirmed  their  admission  to  Lycoming.  The 
completed  form  is  sent  by  the  student  to  Medical  Datamation  together 
with  a  check  for  $10.  Both  the  student  and  the  college  receive  reports 
based  on  the  questionnaire  responses.  The  student  report  consists  of  a 
Medical  Database  Report,  a  Health  Risk  Index  and  as  many  health 
information  brochures  as  requested.  Information  provided  by  the  stu- 
dent is  confidential  and  is  available  only  to  qualified  health  service  and 
student  services  personnel. 

STUDY  IMPROVEMENT  SERVICES 

Skills  Seminars — The  seminars,  consisting  of  three  one-hour  ses- 
sions on  scheduling  of  time,  test-taking  and  study  methods,  are 
scheduled  on  demand  for  six  to  10  students. 

Reading  Course — Designed  to  improve  reading  speed  and  com- 
prehension, this  three-week  course  is  offered  at  various  times  during 
the  academic  year  for  a  fee  of  $15. 

CAREER  DEVELOPMENT  SERVICES 

The  Career  Development  Center  provides  services  which  are  designed 
to  help  students  identify  their  abilities  and  interests,  set  realistic  career 
goals  and  plan  academic  programs  to  meet  these  goals.  Counseling  for 
Lycoming  students  begins  in  the  freshman  year. 

In  addition  to  individual  guidance,  the  center  maintains  a  library  on 
specific   careers,    employment   outlooks   and  career   trends.    Services 
offered  by  the  center  include: 
— individual  counseling; 
— career  planning  seminars  in  values  clarification,  skill  assessment 

and  decision  making; 
— 2500  volume  career  library; 

— relaxation  workshops  and  assertiveness  training; 
— SHARE  (Students  Having  A  Real  Experience),   a  program  in 
which  students  observe  and  work  with  a  professional  in  the  field; 
— placement  services  to  aid  seniors  in  implementing  their  career 

plans; 
— assistance  to  students   in   securing  internships,    summer  em- 
ployment and  part-time  employment; 
— speaker's  program  which  brings  professionals  from  a  variety  of 

careers  to  campus  seminars; 
— video-cassette  programs  relating  to  job  skills  and  career  informa- 
tion; 
— microfiche  copies  of  graduate  and  professional  school  catalogs  for 
the  United  States  and  abroad. 

36 


""^"•V 

*- 


RESIDENCE  AND  RESIDENCE  HALLS 

Students  who  are  single  and  who  do  not  reside  at  home  are  required  to 
live  in  residence  halls  and  eat  in  the  dining  room.  All  new  resident 
students  are  forwarded  a  room  agreement  form  to  sign  after  confirma- 
tion of  their  admission  to  Lycoming.  This  agreement  is  renewed  each 
spring.  Exceptions  to  the  residence  policy  may  be  granted  to  those 
students  who  wish  to  live  with  relatives,  and  students  who  are  23  years 
of  age  and  older  and  have  established  non-resident  status.  Requests  for 
such  exemptions  must  be  submitted  to  the  Assistant  Dean  of  Student 
Services  for  Residence  Life  before  the  first  day  of  the  term  to  which  the 
student  has  been  admitted. 

Resident  students  assume  responsibility  for  their  rooms  and 
furnishings.  The  college  reserves  the  right  to  enter  and  inspect  any  room 
for  reasons  of  damage,  health  or  safety  and  to  search  any  room  when 
there  is  reason  to  believe  a  violation  of  college  rules  or  the  law  is 
occurring  or  has  occurred.  Charges  are  assessed  for  damage  to  rooms, 
doors,  furniture  and  common  areas.  Wherever  possible,  damage  to 
dormitory  property  will  be  charged  to  the  person  or  persons  directly 
responsible.  Damage  and  breakage  occurring  in  a  room  will  be  the 
responsibility  of  students  occupying  the  room.  Hall  and  bathroom 
damage  will  be  the  responsibility  of  all  students  of  the  section  where 
damage  occurs.  Actual  costs  of  repairs  will  be  charged. 

Residence  halls  are  not  available  for  occupancy  during  the  vacation 
periods.  Quiet  hours  for  study  purposes,  which  are  established  by 
residence  hall  councils  or  the  Office  of  Student  Services,  are  published 
in  the  Residence  Halls  Handbook  and  posted  on  bulletin  boards. 

Room  visitation  by  members  of  the  opposite  sex  is  permitted  in  the 
halls  under  conditions  established  by  the  college  in  cooperation  with  the 
various  residence  hall  councils,  which  share  responsibility  for  develop- 
ing and  monitoring  regulations  and  which  are  organized  each  fall 
semester  before  visitation  schedules  are  established. 

37 


STANDARDS  OF  CONDUCT 

Lycoming  students  are  expected  to  accept  responsibilities  required  of 
adults.  The  rights  of  every  member  of  the  college  community  are 
protected  by  established  regulations.  Although  the  acceptance  of  the 
college's  standards  of  behavior  is  an  individual  responsibility,  it  also 
calls  for  group  responsibility.  Students  should  influence  their  peers  to 
conduct  themselves  responsibly  for  the  collective  good. 

Students  who  are  unable  to  demonstrate  that  they  have  accepted 
these  responsibilities  or  who  fail  to  abide  by  established  policies  may  be 
dismissed  at  any  time  or  denied  readmission  for  a  subsequent  term  or 
semester.  Further,  after  the  conclusion  of  any  term  or  semester,  the 
college  may  deny  a  student  the  privilege  of  attending  any  subsequent 
term  or  semester  when  the  administration  deems  this  to  be  in  the  best 
interest  of  the  college. 

Lycoming  College  does  not  approve  of  the  use  or  misuse  of 
alcoholic  beverages  and  encourages  students  to  abstain  from  their  use 
and  to  abide  by  the  legal  restrictions  on  alcohol  use  established  by  the 
Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania.  Observance  of  the  law  is  the  individ- 
ual responsibility  of  each  student,  and  failure  to  obey  the  law  may 
subject  the  student  to  prosecution  by  civil  authorities,  either  on  or  off 
campus. 

Students  also  are  expected  to  be  aware  of  the  college's  attitude 
toward  the  use  and  misuse  of  alcohol  and  to  acknowledge  the  college's 
right  to  its  position.  The  college  will  not  tolerate  any  public  use  of 
alcohol.  Officials  of  the  college  will  prescribe  penalties  for  the  public  or 
private  misuse  of  alcohol.  These  penalties  will  be  applied  in  a  consistent 
manner. 

The  college  recognizes  its  responsibility,  however,  for  providing 
students  with  reliable  information  about  the  social  and  medical  implica- 
tions of  the  use  of  alcohol.  Lycoming  makes  every  effort  to  create  and 
maintain  a  community  in  which  individual  choice  is  coupled  with 
responsible  behavior  and  respect  for  the  rights  of  others. 

Upon  enrolling,  all  students  are  given  a  copy  of  the  Guidepost. 
Resident  students  are  given  a  Residence  Halls  Handbook.  These  documents 
contain  the  college's  official  policies,  rules  and  regulations,  all  of  which 
are  part  of  the  contractual  agreement  students  enter  into  when  they 
register  at  Lycoming. 

RELIGIOUS  LIFE 

Opportunities  for  spiritual  growth  are  provided  through  voluntary 
participation  in  the  religious  life  of  the  college  and  the  community.  The 
religious  life  program  is  intended  to  encourage  students  to  sustain  their 
own  religious  commitments. 

Two  chaplains,  one  Protestant  and  one  Roman  Catholic,  live  on 
campus.  They  conduct  regular  worship  services  in  the  college  chapels 
and  several  ecumenical  services  during  the  special  seasons  of  the  church 
year,  including  Christmas,  Easter  and  Passover.  The  chaplains  provide 
counseling  and  minister  to  the  college  community's  spiritual  needs. 

38 


In  addition,  a  United  Campus  Ministry  involving  local  clergy, 
students  and  cooperating  churches  in  the  community  provides  other 
worship  and  service  opportunities,  study  and  religious  activities. 

The  United  Campus  Ministry  Center  is  located  on  the  basement 
level  of  Clarke  Chapel.  It  contains  the  St.  John  Neumann  Chapel,  a 
social  and  meeting  area,  chapel  offices,  sacristry  and  a  lounge. 

ORIENTATION  OF  NEW  STUDENTS 

The  purpose  of  the  orientation  program  is  to  insure  that  new  students 
begin  their  Lycoming  experience  under  the  most  favorable  circum- 
stances and  to  provide  opportunities  for  new  students  and  their  parents 
to  become  more  fully  informed  about  the  college.  Sessions  of  two  and 
one-half  days  each  are  organized  each  summer.  Attendance  by  all  new 
students  and  at  least  one  parent  is  required.  During  the  orientation 
program,  parents  and  students  participate  in  the  following  activities: 

— briefing  sessions  on  the  academic  and  co-curricular  programs; 

— academic  advisement  and  registration  for  fall  semester  classes; 

— placement  testing  in  swimming,  mathematics  and  English; 

— purchase  of  textbooks. 

Orientation  information  is  mailed  to  students  after  they  have 
confirmed  their  admission  to  Lycoming. 


39 


STUDENT  ACTIVITIES 

A  full  and  varied  program  of  cultural,  professional,  athletic  and  social 
activities  is  available  at  Lycoming  for  students  who  wish  to  grow 
personally  as  well  as  intellectually. 

Student  government  provides  students  with  an  opportunity  to 
influence  their  activities  and  social  life.  A  student  judiciary  has  juris- 
diction over  many  areas  of  student  behavior. 

Students  interested  in  communications  can  serve  on  the  staffs  of  the 
campus  newspaper,  yearbook,  radio  station  or  literary  magazine.  For 
students  with  other  interests,  there  are  numerous  clubs,  honor  societies, 
social  fraternities  and  sororities  and  a  national  service  fraternity. 

Musicians  can  play  in  the  band  or  sing  in  the  choir.  Thespians  can 
participate  in  four  major  plays  each  year. 

An  extensive  program  of  intercollegiate  and  intramural  athletics 
operates  year-round.  It  includes  men's  intercollegiate  teams  in  football, 
soccer,  basketball,  wrestling,  tennis  and  track  and  field;  women's 
intercollegiate  teams  in  basketball,  field  hockey  and  tennis  and  a  club 
team  in  track  and  field,  and  a  coed  swimming  team. 

The  community  offers  a  plethora  of  shops,  stores,  restaurants  and 
recreational  sites.  The  hills  surrounding  the  campus  are  crisscrossed 
with  hiking  and  cross-country  ski  trails,  clotted  with  camping  and  picnic 
sites  and  lined  with  trout-filled  streams  and  creeks. 

Information  about  activities  is  printed  in  the  Guidepost  and  other 
college  publications  and  is  available  through  the  Office  of  Student 
Services. 


40 


CHAPTER  VI 

THE  CURRICULUM 

Numbers  1-9  Elementary  courses  in  departments  where  such  courses 

are  not  counted  as  part  of  the  student's  major. 
Numbers  10-19  Freshman  level  courses 
Numbers  20-29  Sophomore  level  courses 
Numbers  30-39  Junior  level  courses 
Numbers  40-49  Senior  level  courses 

Numbers  50-59  Non-catalog  courses  (offered  on  a  limited  basis) 
Numbers  60-69  Applied  Music 
Numbers  70-79  Internships 
Numbers  80-89  Independent  Study 
Numbers  90-99  Independent  Study  for  Departmental  Honors 

Courses  not  in  sequence  are  listed  separately,  as: 

Introduction  to  Art  Art  10 

Drawing  1  Art  11 

Courses  which  imply  a  sequence  are  indicated  with  a  dash  between, 
meaning  that  the  first  semester  must  be  taken  prior  to  the  second,  as: 

Intermediate  French  French  10-11 

All  students  without  regard  to  sex  have  the  right  of  access  to  all  courses. 

ACCOUNTING 

Professor:  Richmond  (Chairman) 
Assistant  Professor:  Kuhns 

The  purpose  of  the  accounting  major  is  to  help  prepare  the  student  for  a  career 
within  the  accounting  profession,  whether  public,  private  or  governmental, 
through  a  curriculum  stressing  pre- professional  education. 

A  major  consists  of  Accounting  10,  20-21,  30,  40,  41,  45,  Mathematics  13, 
Computer  Science  15  and  one  and  one-half  units  to  be  selected  from  Accounting 
25,  26,  (31,  42,  44,  46,  47  and  48  or  Internship.  Business  10  may  be  substituted  for 
Accounting  10  if  a  student  changes  majors. 

Students  seeking  entry  into  the  public  accounting  field  are  advised  to 
investigate  the  professional  requirements  for  certification  in  the  state  in  which 
they  intend  to  practice  so  that  they  may  meet  all  educational  requirements  prior 
to  graduation.  All  majors  are  advised  to  enroll  in  Economics  10  and  11,  Business 
35,  36  and  38,  and  one  of  the  following:  Business  33,  Economics  20  or  37. 

10    ELEMENTARY  ACCOUNTING  THEORY 

An  introductory  course  in  recording,  classifying,  summarizing  and  in- 
terpreting the  basic  business  transaction.  Problems  of  classification  and 
interpretation  of  accounts  and  preparation  of  financial  statements  are 
studied.  Prerequisite:  Second-semester  freshman  or  consent  of  instructor. 

20-21     INTERMEDIATE  ACCOUNTING  THEORY 

An  intensive  study  of  accounting  statements  and  analytical  procedures  with 
an  emphasis  upon  corporate  accounts,  various  decision  models,  price-level 

41 


models,  earnings  per  share,  pension  accounting,  accounting  for  leases  and 
financial  statement  analysis.  Prerequisite:  Accounting  10. 

25  FINANCIAL  STATEMENT  ANALYSIS 

Deals  with  the  analysis  of  financial  statements  as  an  aid  to  decision  making. 
The  theme  of  the  course  is  understanding  the  financial  data  which  are 
analyzed  as  well  as  the  methods  by  which  they  are  analyzed  and  in- 
terpreted. This  course  should  prove  of  value  to  all  who  need  a  thorough 
understanding  of  the  uses  to  which  financial  statements  are  put  as  well  as 
to  those  who  must  know  how  to  use  them  intelligently  and  effectively.  This 
includes  accountants,  security  analysts,  lending  officers,  credit  analysts, 
managers  and  all  others  who  make  decisions  on  the  basis  of  financial  data. 
Prerequisite:  Accounting  10  or  Business  10.  May  term. 

26  GOVERNMENTAL  AND  FUND  ACCOUNTING 

This  course  is  designed  to  introduce  accounting  for  not-for-profit  organiza- 
tions. Municipal  accounting,  reporting  and  auditing,  and  federal  and 
institutional  accounting  and  reporting  are  studied.  Prerequisite:  Accounting 
10  or  Business  10.  One-half  unit  of  credit. 

30-31     COST  AND  BUDGETARY  ACCOUNTING  THEORY 

Methods  of  accounting  for  material,  labor  and  factory  overhead  expenses 
consumed  in  manufacturing  using  job  order,  process  and  standard  costing. 
Application  of  cost  accounting  and  budgeting  theory  to  decision  making  in 
the  areas  of  make  or  buy,  expansion  of  production  and  sales,  and  account- 
ing for  control  are  dealt  with.  Prerequisite:  Accounting  20  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

40  AUDITING  THEORY 

A  study  of  the  science  or  art  of  verifying,  analyzing  and  interpreting 
accounts  and  reports.  The  goal  of  the  course  is  to  emphasize  concepts  which 
will  enable  students  to  understand  the  philosophy  and  environment  of 
auditing.  Special  attention  is  given  to  the  public  accounting  profession, 
studying  auditing  standards,  professional  ethics,  the  legal  liability  inherent 
in  the  attest  function,  the  study  and  evaluation  of  internal  control,  the 
nature  of  evidence,  the  growing  use  of  statistical  sampling,  the  impact  of 
electronic  data  processing  and  the  basic  approach  to  planning  an  audit. 
Finally,  various  audit  reports  expressing  independent  expert  opinions  on 
the  fairness  of  financial  statements  are  studied.  Prerequisite:  Accounting  21, 
Mathematics  13  and  Computer  Science  15. 

41  FEDERAL  INCOME  TAX  ACCOUNTING  AND  PLANNING 

Analysis  of  the  provisions  of  the  Internal  Revenue  Code  relating  to  income, 
deductions,  inventories  and  accounting  methods.  Practical  problems  involv- 
ing determination  of  income  and  deductions,  capital  gains  and  losses, 
computation  and  payment  of  taxes  through  withholding  at  the  source  and 
through  declaration  are  considered.  Planning  transactions  so  that  a  min- 
imum amount  of  tax  will  result  is  emphasized.  Prerequisite:  Accounting  10  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

42 


42  FEDERAL  INCOME  TAX  ADMINISTRATION  AND  PLANNING 

An  analysis  of  the  provisions  of  the  Internal  Revenue  Code  relating  to 
partnerships,  estates,  trusts  and  corporations.  An  extensive  series  of 
problems  is  considered  and  effective  tax  planning  is  emphasized.  Prere- 
quisite: Accounting  41. 

43  ADVANCED  ACCOUNTING 

An  intensive  study  of  partnerships,  installment  and  consignment  sales, 
branch  accounting,  bankruptcy  and  reorganization,  estates  and  trusts, 
government  entities,  nonprofit  organizations  and  accounting  and  reporting 
for  the  SEC.  Prerequisite:  Accounting  21. 

44  CONTROLLERSHIP 

Control  process  in  the  organization.  General  systems  theory,  financial 
control  systems,  centralization-decentralization,  performance  measurement 
and  evaluation,  forecasts  and  budgets  and  marketing,  production  and 
finance  models  for  control  purposes.  Prerequisite:  Accounting  31  or  consent  of 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

45  AUDITING  PRACTICE 

An  audit  project  is  presented,  solved  and  the  auditor's  report  is  written. 
THIS  COURSE  IS  LIMITED  TO  STUDENTS  WHO  HAVE  EITHER  COM- 
PLETED OR  ARE  ENROLLED  IN  ACCOUNTING  40.  One-half  unit  of  credit. 

46  SEMINAR  ON  APB  OPINIONS  AND  FASB  STANDARDS 

A  seminar  course  for  accounting  majors  with  library  assignments  to  gain  a 
workable  understanding  of  the  highly  technical  opinions  of  the  Accounting 
Principles  Board  and  standards  of  the  Financial  Accounting  Standards 
Board.  One  term  paper.  Possible  trip  to  New  York  City  to  attend  a  public 
hearing  of  the  Financial  Accounting  Standards  Board.  Prerequisite:  Account- 
ing 10.  May  term. 


47  ADVANCED  ACCOUNTING 

Certain  areas  of  advanced  accounting  theory,  including  business  combina- 
tions, consolidated  financial  statements  and  accounting  and  reporting  for 
the  Securities  and  Exchange  Commission  are  covered.  Prerequisite:  Account- 
ing 21.  One-half  unit  of  credit. 

48  CONTEMPORARY  PROBLEMS  FOR  CPA  CANDIDATES 

Problems  from  the  Accounting  Practice  sections  of  past  C.P.A.  examina- 
tions which  require  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the  core  courses  in  their 
solution  are  assigned.  The  course  is  intended  to  meet  the  needs  of  those 
interested  in  public  accounting  and  preparation  for  the  Certified  Public 
Accountants  Examination.  Prerequisite:  Accounting  30  or  consent  of  instructor. 
One-half  unit  of  credit. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Interns  in  accounting  typically  work  off-campus  under  the  supervision  of  a 
public  or  private  accountant. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Typical  examples  of  recent  studies  in  accounting  are:  computer  program  to 
generate  financial  statements,  educational  core  for  public  accountants, 
inventory  control  and  church  taxation. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 


44 


ACCOUNTING— MATHEMATICS 

Assistant  Professor:  Kuhns  (Coordinator) 

The  accounting-mathematics  interdisciplinary  major  is  designed  to  offer,  within 
a  liberal  arts  framework,  courses  which  will  aid  in  constructing  mathematical 
models  for  business  decision  making.  Students  obtain  a  substantial  background 
in  mathematics  and  a  working  knowledge  in  accounting. 

Majors  will  be  only  four  courses  short  of  a  math  major  and  three  courses 
short  of  an  accounting  major.  Required  accounting  courses  are:  Accounting  10, 
20,  21,  30,  31.  In  mathematics  they  are:  Mathematics  18,  19,  20  and  37  plus  two 
courses  from  Mathematics  21,  31,  32  and  33.  Business  courses  required  are: 
Business  35  and  36.  Recommended  courses  include:  Mathematics  13  and 
Computer  Science  15;  Business  23,  34,  38  and  39;  Economics  10  and  11; 
Psychology  15  and  24,  and  Sociology  10. 

AMERICAN  STUDIES 

Associate  Professor:  Piper  (Coordinator) 

The  American  Studies  major  offers  a  comprehensive  program  in  American 
civilization  which  introduces  students  to  the  complexities  underlying  the 
development  of  America  and  its  contemporary  life.  The  13  major  courses 
include: 

FOUR  CORE  COURSES — The  primary  integrating  units  of  the  major,  these 
team-taught  courses  will  teach  you  how  to  think  of  ideas  from  different  points 
of  view  and  how  to  correlate  information  and  methods  from  various  disciplines: 

America  As  a  Civilization  (First  semester  of  major  study) 
American  Studies — Research  and  Methodology  (Second  semester) 
American  Tradition  in  the  Arts  and  Literature  (Third  semester) 
Internship  or  Independent  Study  (Junior  and/or  senior  year) 

CONCENTRATION  AREAS — Six  courses  in  one  option  and  three  in  the 
other  are  needed.  Six  primary  concentration  option  courses  in  American  Arts  or 
American  Society  build  around  the  insights  gained  in  the  core  courses.  They 
focus  particular  attention  on  areas  most  germane  to  academic  and  vocational 
interests.  The  three  additional  courses  from  the  other  option  give  further 
breadth  to  understanding  of  America.  Students  also  will  be  encouraged  to  take 
elective  courses  relating  to  other  cultures. 

American  Arts  Concentration  Option 

American  Art  — Art  24 

American  Art  of  the  20th  Century  — Art  32 

19th  Century  American  Literature  — English  16 

20th  Century  American  Literature  — English  17 

American  Music  —Music  51 

American  Theatre  — Theatre  51 

American  Society  Concentration  Option 

U.S.  Social  and  Intellectual  History  to  1877  —History  42 

U.S.  Social  and  Intellectual  History  since  1877  — History  43 

The  American  Constitutional  System  —Political  Science  30 

The  American  Political  Tradition  — Political  Science  47 

American  Economic  Development  — Economics  51 

Racial  and  Cultural  Minorities  — Sociology  34 

45 


Students  should  design  their  American  Studies  major  in  consultation  with 
the  program  co-ordinator  or  a  member  of  the  American  Studies  Committee. 

10  AMERICA  AS  A  CIVILIZATION 

An  analysis  of  the  historical,  socio-cultural,  economic  and  political  per- 
spectives on  American  civilization  with  special  attention  to  the  interrela- 
tionships between  these  various  orientations. 

11  AMERICAN  STUDIES— RESEARCH  AND  METHODOLOGY 

The  study  and  application  of  various  research  methods,  including  new 
trends  in  historical  study,  quantitative  analysis,  cross-cultural  studies  and 
on-site  inspection. 

12  AMERICAN  TRADITION  IN  THE  ARTS  AND  LITERATURE 

The  relationships  of  the  arts  and  literature  to  the  various  historical  periods 
of  American  life. 

70-79  or  80-89     INTERNSHIP  OR  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

An  opportunity  to  relate  the  learning  in  the  core  courses  and  the  concentra- 
tion areas  to  an  actual  supervised  off-campus  learning  situation  or  inde- 
pendent study  project. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  HONORS  (See  Index) 


46 


ART 

Associate  Professor:  Shipley  (Chairman) 

Assistant  Professor:  Bogle 

Instructor:  Lesko 

Part-Time  Instructor:  T.  Wild 

The  Art  major  chooses  between  a  two-dimensional  and  a  three-dimensional 
studio  track,  and  completes  a  core  art  history  program. 

The  two-dimensional  track  consists  of  Drawing  I  and  II  (Art  11  and  21), 
Figure  Modeling  I  (Art  16),  Two-Dimensional  Design  (Art  15)  and  Painting  I  and 
II  (Art  20  and  30).  Printmaking  I  and  II  (Art  28  and  38)  may  be  substituted  for 
Painting  I  and  II  (Art  20  and  30). 

The  three-dimensional  track  consists  of  Drawing  I  and  II  (Art  11  and  21), 
Figure  Modeling  I  (Art  16),  Sculpture  I  and  II  (Art  25  and  35)  and  either  Figure 
Modeling  II  (Art  26)  or  Sculpture  III  (Art  45). 

Each  major  must  take  Art  22  and  23  (Survey  of  Art)  and  two  additional 
courses  in  art  history  (Art  24-31-32-33-34).  Studio  Research  (Art  46)  in  the 
chosen  track  is  required  along  with  participation  in  a  senior  exhibition. 

10  INTRODUCTION  TO  ART 

Course  includes  basic  studio  work  in  two  and  three  dimensions  as  well  as 
lecture  and  slide  presentations.  The  goal  of  the  course  is  to  equip  the 
student  with  the  skills  and  background  necessary  to  approach  art  in  an  open 
and  receptive  manner. 

11  DRAWING  I 

Study  of  the  human  figure  with  gesture  and  proportion  stressed.  Student  is 
made  familiar  with  different  drawing  techniques  and  media.  Some  drawing 
from  nature.  Offered  in  alternate  semesters  with  Drawing  II  and  III. 

12  COLOR  THEORY 

A  study  of  the  physical  and  emotional  aspects  of  color.  Emphasis  will  be 
placed  on  the  study  of  color  as  an  aesthetic  agent  for  the  artist.  The  color 
theories  of  Johannes  Itten  will  form  the  base  for  this  course  with  some  study 
of  the  theories  of  Albert  Munsell,  Faber  Berren  and  Wilhelm  Ostwald.  May 

term  only. 

15  TWO-DIMENSIONAL  DESIGN 

The  basic  fundamentals  found  in  the  two-dimensional  arts:  line,  shape, 
form,  space,  color  and  composition  are  taught  in  relationship  to  the  other 
two-dimensional  arts.  Perceptual  theories  and  their  relationships  to  what 
and  why  we  see  what  we  see  in  art  are  discussed  with  each  problem. 

16  FIGURE  MODELING  I 

Understanding  the  figure  will  be  approached  through  learning  the  basic 
structures  and  proportions  of  the  figure.  The  course  is  conceived  as  a  three- 
dimensional  drawing  class.  At  least  one  figure  per  student  will  be  cast. 

19     CERAMICS  I 

Emphasis  placed  on  pottery  design  as  it  relates  to  function  of  vessels  and 
the  design  parameters  imposed  by  the  characteristics  of  clay.  The  techni- 

47 


ques  of  ceramics  are  taught  to  encourage  expression  rather  than  to  dispense 
merely  a  technical  body  of  information. 

20  PAINTING  I 

An  introduction  of  painting  techniques  and  materials.  Coordination  of 
color,  value  and  design  within  the  painting  is  taught.  Some  painting  from 
the  figure.  No  limitations  as  to  painting  media,  subject  matter  or  style. 
Prerequisite:  Art  15  or  consent  of  instructor. 

21  DRAWING  II 

Continued  study  of  the  human  figure.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  realism  and 
figure-ground  coordination  with  the  use  of  value  and  design.  Prerequisite: 
Art  11. 

22  SURVEY  OF  ART:  PRE-HISTORY  TO  THE  MIDDLE  AGES 

A  survey  of  Western  architecture,  sculpture  and  painting.  Emphasis  is  on 
the  interrelation  of  form  and  content  and  on  the  relatedness  of  the  visual 
arts  to  their  cultural  environment:  Near  East,  Egypt,  Greece,  Rome  and 
Medieval  Europe. 

23  SURVEY  OF  ART:  FROM  THE  RENAISSANCE  TO  THE  MODERN  AGE 

A  survey  of  Western  architecture,  sculpture  and  painting.  Emphasis  is  on 
the  interrelation  of  form  and  content  and  on  the  relatedness  of  the  visual 
arts  to  their  cultural  environment:  Renaissance  to  modern. 

24  AMERICAN  ART  OF  THE  18TH  AND  19TH  CENTURIES 

The  development  of  the  arts  in  America  from  Colonial  times  through  the 
19th  century;  from  the  unknown  folk  artist  to  popular  artists  such  as 
Winslow  Homer  and  Thomas  Eakins. 

25  SCULPTURE  I 

An  introduction  to  the  techniques,  materials  and  ideas  of  sculpture.  Clay, 
plaster,  wax,  wood  and  other  materials  will  be  used.  The  course  will  be 
concerned  with  ideas  about  sculpture  as  expression,  and  with  giving 
material  form  to  ideas. 

26  FIGURE  MODELING  II 

Will  exploit  the  structures  and  understandings  learned  in  Figure  Modeling 
I  to  produce  larger,  more  complete  figurative  works.  There  will  be  a 
requirement  to  cast  one  of  the  works  in  plaster.  Prerequisite:  Art  16  and 
consent  of  instructor. 

27  INTRODUCTION  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY 

Objectives  of  the  course  are  to  develop  technical  skills  in  the  use  of 
photographic  equipment  (cameras,  films,  darkroom,  print  maker)  and  to 
develop  sensitivity  in  the  areas  of  composition,  form,  light,  picture  quality, 
etc.  Each  student  must  own  or  have  access  to  a  35mm  camera. 

48 


28  PRINTMAKING  I 

Practice  of  the  techniques  of  silk-screen,  wood-block  and  linoleum-block 
printing.  Prerequisite:  Art  11  or  15. 

29  CERAMICS  II 

Continuation  of  Ceramics  I.  Emphasis  on  use  of  the  wheel  and  technical 
aspects  such  as  glaze  making  and  kiln  firing.  Prerequisite:  Art  19. 

30  PAINTING  II 

Emphasis  is  placed  on  individual  style  and  technique.  Artists  and  move- 
ments in  art  are  studied.  No  limitations  as  to  painting  media,  subject  matter 
or  style.  Prerequisite:  Art  20. 

31  20TH  CENTURY  EUROPEAN  ART 

Stylistic  developments  in  Europe  from  1880  to  the  present,  including 
Cubism,  Fauvism,  Expressionism,  Dada  and  Surrealism.  Picasso,  Matisse, 
Kandinsky  and  Mondrian  are  among  the  major  artists  studied. 

32  AMERICAN  ART  OF  THE  20TH  CENTURY 

Painting,  sculpture  and  architecture  in  the  United  States  from  1900  to  the 
present  with  emphasis  on  developments  of  the  1950's  and  1960's:  an  inquiry 
into  the  meaning  and  historical  roots  of  contemporary  art. 

33  19TH  CENTURY  EUROPEAN  ART 

Emphasis  on  painting,  sculpture  and  architecture  of  Western  Europe  from 

1760  to  1900,  including  the  work  of  late  18th  century  artists  David  and  Goya 

t  and  19th  century  developments  from  Romanticism  to  Post-Impressionism. 

34  ART  OF  THE  RENAISSANCE 

Painting,  sculpture  and  architecture  in  Italy  and  the  Northern  countries 
from  the  late  13th  century  through  the  early  16th  century.  Artists  include 
Giotto,  Donatello,  Alberti,  Leonardo  da  Vinci,  Michelangelo,  Van  Eyck, 
Diirer  and  Briiegel. 

35  SCULPTURE  II 

A  continuation  of  Sculpture  I  (Art  25).  Emphasis  is  on  advanced  technical 
processes.  Casting  of  bronze  and  aluminum  sculpture  will  be  done  in  the 
school  foundry.  Prerequisite:  Art  25. 

37  PHOTOGRAPHY  II 

To  extend  the  skills  developed  in  Photography  I  by  continued  growth  in 
technical  expertise,  presentation,  conceptual  ability  and  aesthetic  sensi- 
bility. Emphasis  is  placed  upon  term  essay  in  area  of  student's  interest  and 
presented  in  booklet  format.  Prerequisite:  Art  27. 

38  PRINTMAKING  II 

Further  exploration  of  silk-screen  printing  techniques,  practice  of  the 
techniques  of  engraving,  drypoint,  etching  and  aquatint. 

49 


40  PAINTING  III 

Professional  quality  is  stressed.  There  is  some  experimentation  with  new 
painting  techniques  and  styles. 

41  DRAWING  III 

Continued  study  of  human  figure,  individual  style  and  professional  control 
of  drawing  techniques  and  media  are  now  emphasized. 

45  SCULPTURE  III 

In  Sculpture  III  the  student  is  expected  to  produce  a  series  of  sculptures  that 
follow  a  conceptual  and  technical  line  of  development.  Prerequisites:  Art  16, 
25  and  35. 

46  STUDIO  RESEARCH 

Independent  research  in  an  elective  studio  area,  conducted  under  the 
supervision  of  the  appropriate  faculty  member,  includes  creation  of  work 
which  may  be  incorporated  in  a  one-person  senior  exhibition.  Student 
works  in  private  studio  assigned  by  the  department. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Commercial  design,  interior  design  and  photography  programs  in  local 
businesses,  and  museum  work  at  the  Lycoming  County  Historical  Museum. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Recent  studies  in  anatomy.  Aspects  of  the  art  noveau,  lithography,  photo- 
graphy, pottery,  problems  in  illustration  and  watercolor. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 

50 


ASTRONOMY  AND  PHYSICS 

Professor:  Fineman 

Assistant  Professor:  Erickson  (Chairman) 

Instructor:  Keig 

The  department  offers  two  majors.  The  major  in  astronomy  is  specifically 
designed  to  train  students  in  the  field  of  planetarium  education.  The  major  in 
physics  prepares  students  for  graduate  work  in  physics  or  astronomy,  for  the 
cooperative  program  in  engineering,  or  for  state  certification  as  secondary  school 
teachers  of  physics.  Juniors  and  seniors  in  both  majors  are  required  to  attend 
and  participate  in  the  weekly  departmental  colloquia. 

A  number  of  courses  in  this  department  are  offered  on  two  levels  which 
differ  in  the  degree  of  mathematical  rigor  and  sophistication  needed.  All  such 
courses  have  dual  catalog  numbers,  with  the  letters  B  (basic)  and  A  (advanced) 
appearing  after  the  course  names  to  indicate  the  level.  Both  the  B  and  A  level  of 
a  course  meet  together  for  the  same  three  hours  of  lecture  each  week,  while  the 
A  level  meets  for  one  additional  hour  each  week  of  more  advanced  mathematical 
development  of  the  material.  This  system  is  designated  as  the  "3+  1"  method. 
No  student  may  earn  credit  for  both  levels  of  a  course. 

The  major  in  astronomy  requires  AsPh  11, 12,  either  15  or  25,  either  16  or  26, 
30,  either  34  or  44,  either  35  or  45  and  either  36  or  46;  Mathematics  18  and  19 
(Calculus  I  and  II)  and  one  year  of  chemistry.  One  or  more  of  the  following  are 
recommended:  AsPh  3,  4,  5,  27,  33  or  42  and  Art  27  (Photography  I). 

The  major  in  physics  requires  AsPh  11,  either  12  or  13,  25,  26,  28,  29  and  at 
least  two  courses  chosen  from  27,  33,  42,  44,  45,  46  and  48;  Mathematics  18  and 
19  (Calculus  I  and  II)  and  one  year  of  chemistry.  With  departmental  consent, 
advanced  courses  may  be  substituted  for  AsPh  11,  12  or  13.  In  addition, 
Mathematics  20  and  21  (Multivariate  Calculus  and  Differential  Equations)  are 
required  for  graduate  school  preparation  and  the  cooperative  program  in 
engineering.  It  is  also  recommended  that  students  planning  on  graduate  study 
in  physics  or  astronomy  take  one  year  of  a  foreign  language  and  Mathematics  13 
and  Computer  Science  15  (Introduction  to  Statistics  and  Computer  Science). 

3  OBSERVATIONAL  ASTRONOMY 

A  methods  course  providing  the  opportunity  to  make  a  variety  of 
astronomical  observations,  both  visually  and  photographically,  with  and 
without  telescopes.  The  planetarium  is  used  to  familiarize  the  student  with 
the  sky  at  various  times  during  the  year  and  from  different  locations  on 
earth. 

4  FIELD  GEOLOGY 

A  methods  course  introducing  the  field  techniques  needed  to  study  the 
geology  of  an  area.  May  term. 

5  HISTORY  OF  ASTRONOMY 

A  comprehensive  view  of  the  evolution  of  astronomical  thought  from 
ancient  Greece  to  the  present,  emphasizing  the  impact  that  astronomical 
discoveries  and  the  conquest  of  space  have  had  on  Western  culture.  Four 
hours  of  lecture  per  week. 

11     PRINCIPLES  OF  ASTRONOMY 

A  summary  of  current  concepts  of  the  universe  from  the  solar  system  to 

51 


distant  galaxies.  Describes  the  techniques  and  instruments  used  in 
astronomical  research.  Presents  not  only  what  is  reasonably  well  known 
about  the  universe,  but  also  considers  some  of  the  major  unsolved  prob- 
lems. Three  hours  of  lecture,  one  hour  of  discussion  and  planetarium  demonstra- 
tion, and  two  hours  of  laboratory  per  week.  Fall  semester. 

12  ENVIRONMENTAL  AND  EARTH  SCIENCE 

A  study  of  the  physical  processes  that  continually  affect  the  planet  Earth, 
shaping  our  environment.  Describes  how  past  events  and  lifeforms  can  be 
reconstructed  from  preserved  evidence  to  reveal  the  history  of  our  planet 
from  its  origin  to  the  present.  Emphasizes  the  ways  in  which  geology, 
meteorology  and  oceanography  interrelate  with  man  and  the  environment. 
Three  hours  of  lecture,  one  hour  of  discussion  and  demonstration,  and  two  hours  of 
laboratory  per  week.  Spring  semester. 

13  METEOROLOGY 

The  general  properties  of  the  atmosphere  and  their  measurements  will  be 
discussed  in  terms  of  basic  physical  and  chemical  laws.  Two  basic  themes 
will  guide  the  approach,  i.e.,  the  atmosphere  behaves  like  a  giant  heat 
engine  and  weather  patterns  exist  from  a  micro-to-macro  scale.  Three 
lectures  and  one  two-hour  laboratory  per  week.  May  term  only.  Alternate  years. 

15  CONCEPTS  OF  PHYSICS  B 

25  CONCEPTS  OF  PHYSICS  A 

Rather  than  presenting  an  encyclopedia  view  of  classical  physics,  this 
course  emphasizes  the  development  of  concepts  and  principles  to  be 
applied  in  all  further  courses.  The  fundamental  quantities  and  laws  of 
mechanics,  electricity  and  magnetism,  and  thermodynamics  will  be  pre- 
sented and  illustrated  with  numerous  problems.  Lectures  presented  by  the  "3 
+  1"  method;  also  one  hour  of  recitation  and  three  hours  of  laboratory  per  week. 
Credit  may  not  be  earned  for  both  Astronomy  and  Physics  15  and  25. 
Prerequisite  for  15:  Mathematics  17  (Precalculus).  Corequisite  for  25:  Mathematics 
18  (Calculus  I).  Fall  semester. 

16  WAVES  AND  PARTICLES  B 

26  WAVES  AND  PARTICLES  A 

Description  of  waves,  the  wave  equation,  electromagnetic  waves.  Reflec- 
tion, refraction,  interference  and  diffraction.  The  constituents  of  matter  and 
radiation,  the  interaction  of  matter  and  radiation,  wave-particle  duality.  The 
Bohr  atom,  atomic  structure  and  atomic  spectra.  Nuclear  structure,  radio- 
active decay  and  nuclear  reactions.  Lectures  presented  by  the  "3  +  1"  method; 
also  one  hour  of  recitation  and  three  hours  of  laboratory  per  iveek.  Credit  may  not 
be  earned  for  both  Astronomy  and  Physics  16  and  26.  Prerequisite  for 
Astronomy  and  Physics  16:  15  or  25  (Concepts  of  Physics  B  or  A).  Prerequisite  for 
Astronomy  and  Physics  26:  25  (Concepts  of  Physics  A).  Corequisite  for  Astronomy 
and  Physics  26:  Mathematics  19  (Calculus  II).  Spring  semester. 

27  ELECTRONICS 

D.C.  and  A.C.  circuit  and  network  theory,  active  devices  such  as  transis- 
tors, operational  amplifiers,  integrated  circuits  and  introduction  to  digital 

52 


electronics  will  be  covered.  Three  lectures  and  two  two-hour  laboratory  sessions 
per  week.  Prerequisites:  Astronomy  I  Physics  15  or  25  and  Mathematics  9  or  18  or 
consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

28  MECHANICS 

Kinematics  and  dynamics  of  single  particles  and  systems  of  particles.  Rigid 
bodies.  Introduction  to  the  mechanics  of  continuous  media.  Moving  refer- 
ence frames.  Lagrangian  mechanics.  Four  hours  of  lecture  and  three  hours  of 
laboratory  per  week.  Prerequisites:  Astronomy  and  Physics  25  (Concepts  of  Physics 
A)  and  Mathematics  19  (Calculus  II). 

29  ELECTRICITY  AND  MAGNETISM 

The  electromagnetic  field,  electrical  potential,  magnetic  field  and  electric 
and  magnetic  properties  of  matter.  Electric  circuits.  Maxwell's  equations. 
Laboratory  includes  electronics  as  well  as  classical  electricity  and  magne- 
tism. Four  hours  of  lecture  and  three  hours  of  laboratory  per  week.  Prerequisite: 
Astronomy  and  Physics  26  (Waves  and  Particles  A). 

30  PLANETARIUM  TECHNIQUES 

A  methods  course  covering  major  aspects  of  planetarium  programming, 
operation  and  maintenance.  Students  are  required  to  prepare  and  present  a 
planetarium  show.  Upon  successfully  completing  the  course,  students  are 
eligible  to  become  planetarium  assistants.  Two  hours  of  lecture  and  demonstra- 
tion and  four  hours  of  practical  training  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Astronomy  and 
Physics  1  (Principles  of  Astronomy)  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

33  OPTICS 

Geometrical  optics  and  optical  systems;  physical  optics,  interference, 
Fraunhofer  and  Fresnel  diffraction  and  coherence  and  lasers  will  be 
covered.  Three  lectures  and  three-hour  laboratory  per  week.  Prerequisites: 
Astronomy  IP  hysics  16  or  26  and  Mathematics  9  or  18  or  consent  of  instructor. 
Alternate  years. 

32     ATMOSPHERIC  PHYSICS  B 

42    ATMOSPHERIC  PHYSICS  A 

A  survey  course  on  the  physics  of  the  upper  atmosphere.  Lectures  presented 
by  the  "3  +  1"  method.  Credit  may  not  be  earned  for  both  32  and  42. 
Prerequisites  for  32:  12  (Environmental  and  Earth  Science)  and  Astronomy  and 
Physics  16  or  26  (Waves  and  Particles  B  or  A).  Prerequisites  for  Astronomy  and 
Physics  42:  12  (Environmental  and  Earth  Science)  and  Astronomy  and  Physics  26 
(Waves  and  Particles  A).  Alternate  years. 

34  RELATIVITY  AND  COSMOLOGY  B 
44     RELATIVITY  AND  COSMOLOGY  A 

A  detailed  presentation  of  the  special  theory  of  relativity,  and  a  short  view 
of  the  general  theory  and  its  classical  proofs.  Man's  concepts  of  the 
universe,  with  particular  attention  to  alternative  modern  cosmological 
models.   Discussion  of  the  Cosmological  Principle,   its  rationale  and  its 

53 


implications.  Lectures  will  be  presented  by  the  "3  +  1"  method.  Credit  may  not 
be  earned  for  both  Astronomy  and  Physics  34  and  44.  Prerequisites  for 
Astronomy  and  Physics  34:  11  (Principles  of  Astronomy)  and  either  Astronomy  and 
Physics  15  or  25  (Concepts  of  Physics  B  or  A),  Mathematics  18  (Calculus  I). 
Prerequisites  for  Astronomy  and  Physics  44:  11  (Principles  of  Astronomy)  and  25 
(Concepts  of  Physics  A). 

35  STELLAR  EVOLUTION  AND  NUCLEOSYNTHESIS  B 

45  STELLAR  EVOLUTION  AND  NUCLEOSYNTHESIS  A 

The  physical  principles  governing  the  internal  structure  and  external 
appearance  of  stars.  Mechanisms  of  energy  generation  and  transport  within 
stars.  The  evolution  of  stars  from  initial  formation  to  final  stages.  The 
creation  of  chemical  elements  by  nucleosynthesis.  Lectures  presented  by  the  "3 
+  1"  method.  Credit  may  not  be  earned  for  both  Astronomy  and  Physics  35 
and  45.  Prerequisites  for  Astronomy  and  Physics  35:  11  (Principles  of  Astronomy) 
and  either  Astronomy  and  Physics  16  or  26  (Waves  and  Particles  B  or  A). 
Corequisite  for  Astronomy  and  Physics  35:  Mathematics  19  (Calculus  II)  or  consent 
of  instructor.  Prerequisites  for  Astronomy  and  Physics  45:  11  (Principles  of 
Astronomy)  and  26  (Waves  and  Particles  A).  Alternate  years. 

36  STELLAR  DYNAMICS  AND  GALACTIC  STRUCTURE  B 

46  STELLAR  DYNAMICS  AND  GALACTIC  STRUCTURE  A 

The  motion  of  objects  in  gravitational  fields.  Introduction  to  the  n-body 
problem.  The  relation  between  stellar  motions  and  the  galactic  potential. 
The  large  scale  structure  of  galaxies  in  general  and  of  the  Milky  Way  Galaxy 
in  particular.  Lectures  presented  by  the  "3+  1"  method.  Credit  may  not  be 
earned  for  both  Astronomy  and  Physics  36  and  46.  Prerequisites  for  36:  11 
(Principles  of  Astronomy)  and  either  15  or  25  (Concepts  of  Physics  B  or  A). 
Corequisite  for  Astronomy  and  Physics  36:  Mathematics  19  (Calculus  II)  or  consent 
of  instructor.  Prerequisites  for  Astronomy  and  Physics  46:  11  (Principles  of 
Astronomy)  and  25  (Concepts  of  Physics  A).  Corequisite  for  Astronomy  and  Physics 
46:  28  (Mechanics)  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

48  INTRODUCTION  TO  QUANTUM  MECHANICS 

Basic  concepts  and  formulation  of  quantum  theory.  The  free  particle,  the 
simple  harmonic  oscillator,  the  hydrogen  atom  and  central  force  problems 
will  be  discussed.  Both  time-independent  and  time-dependent  perturbation 
theory  will  be  covered.  Four  hours  of  lecture  and  recitation.  Prerequisite:  either 
Astronomy  and  Physics  26  (Waves  and  Particles  A)  or  Chemistry  31  (Physical 
Chemistry  II)  and  Mathematics  21  (Differential  Equations). 

49  ASTRONOMY  AND  PHYSICS  COLLOQUIA 

Active  scientists  in  astronomy,  physics  and  related  areas  are  invited  to 
present  lectures  on  their  own  research  or  other  professional  activities.  In 
addition,  seniors  majoring  in  astronomy  or  physics  present  the  results  of  a 
literature  survey  or  individual  research  project.  One  hour  per  week.  Majors  in 
this  department  must  attend  three  semesters  without  credit  during  junior 
and  senior  years  (register  for  non-credit  00,  Colloquia).  Credit  may  be 
earned  during  the  senior  semester  in  which  the  student's  presentation  is 
given. 

54 


70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Interns  in  physics  work  off  campus  under  the  supervision  of  professional 
physicists  employed  by  local  industries  or  hospitals. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Independent  studies  may  be  undertaken  in  most  areas  of  astronomy  and/or 
physics. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 


55 


BIOLOGY 

Associate  Professor:  Angstadt  (Chairman) 

Assistant  Professor:  Die  hi,  Gabriel,  D.  King,  Zaccaria,  Zimmerman 

A  major  consists  of  eight  biology  courses  including  10-11,  21,  22,  23,  24  and  25. 
In  addition,  three  units  of  chemistry  and  two  units  of  mathematical  science  are 
required.  The  chemistry  requirement  must  include  at  least  one  unit  of  organic 
chemistry  chosen  from  Chemistry  5,  20  or  21.  The  mathematical  science  courses 
must  be  chosen  from  Computer  Science  15  and  Mathematics  9,  13,  17  or  above, 
or  their  equivalent.  Certain  specific  exceptions  to  the  core  program  will  be  made 
for  three-year  students  enrolled  in  cooperative  programs.  Such  exceptions  are 
noted  under  the  particular  cooperative  program  described  in  the  last  section  of 
the  curriculum  chapter  of  the  catalog.  Students  interested  in  these  programs 
should  contact  the  program  director  before  finalizing  their  individual  programs. 
Credit  may  not  be  earned  for  both  Biology  1  and  10  or  for  both  Biology  2  and  11. 
Consent  of  instructor  may  replace  Biology  10-11  as  a  prerequisite  for  all  biology 
courses. 

1-2     PRINCIPLES  OF  BIOLOGY 

An  investigation  of  biological  principles,  including  ecological  systems,  form 
and  function  in  selected  representative  organisms  (especially  man),  cell 
theory,  molecular  biology,  reproduction,  inheritance,  adaptation  and  evolu- 
tion. The  course  is  designed  primarily  for  students  not  planning  to  major  in 
the  biological  sciences.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one  two-hour  laboratory  per 
week. 

3    FIELD  BIOLOGY  FOR  TEACHERS 

A  methods  course  for  students  preparing  to  teach  biology.  Sources  and 
methods  of  collecting  and  preserving  various  plant  and  animal  materials. 

Summer  term  only. 

5-6    HUMAN  ANATOMY— PHYSIOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  physics  and  chemistry  relative  to  biological  systems. 
Human  anatomy,  physiology  and  developmental  biology  will  be  surveyed. 
An  introduction  to  microbiology  with  emphasis  given  to  host-pathogen 
relationships  and  the  immune  response.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one  three- 
hour  laboratory  per  week. 

10-11     INTRODUCTION  TO  BIOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  study  of  biology  designed  for  students  planning  to 
major  in  the  biological  sciences.  Major  topics  considered  include  the  origin 
of  life,  cellular  respiration  and  photosynthesis,  genetics,  development, 
anatomy  and  physiology,  ecology,  behavior  and  evolution.  Three  hours  of 
lecture  and  one  three-hour  laboratory  per  week. 

21     MICROBIOLOGY 

A  study  of  microorganisms.  Emphasis  is  given  to  the  identification  and 
physiology  of  microorganisms  as  well  as  to  their  role  in  disease,  their 
economic  importance  and  industrial  applications.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and 
two  two-hour  laboratory  periods  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11. 

56 


22  GENETICS 

A  general  consideration  of  the  principles  governing  inheritance,  including 
treatment  of  classical,  molecular,  cytological,  physiological,  microbial,  hu- 
man and  population  genetics.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  two  two-hour 
laboratory  periods  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11. 

23  ANIMAL  PHYSIOLOGY 

The  mechanisms  and  functions  of  animal  systems,  including  the  autonomic, 
endocrine,  digestive,  cardio-vascular,  respiratory,  renal,  nervous  and  re- 
productive systems.  Mammalian  physiology  is  stressed.  Three  hours  of 
lecture  and  one  three-hour  laboratory  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11. 

24  ECOLOGY 

The  study  of  the  principles  of  ecology  with  emphasis  on  the  role  of 
chemical,  physical  and  biological  factors  affecting  the  distribution  and 
succession  of  plant  and  animal  populations  and  communities.  Included  will 
be  field  studies  of  local  habitats  as  well  as  laboratory  experimentation.  Two 
hours  of  lecture  and  one  four-hour  laboratory  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11. 

25  PLANT  SCIENCES 

A  survey  of  the  structure,  development,  function,  classification  and  use  of 
plants  and  related  organisms.  The  study  will  comprise  four  general  topic 
areas:  form,  including  morphology  and  anatomy  of  plants  in  growth  and 
reproduction;  function,  concentrating  on  nutrition  and  metabolism  peculiar 
to  photosynthetic  organisms;  classification  systems  and  plant  identification, 
and  human  uses  of  plants.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one  three-hour  laboratory 
per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11 

30  COMPARATIVE  ANATOMY  OF  VERTEBRATES 

Detailed  examination  of  the  origins,  structure  and  functions  of  the  principal 
organs  of  vertebrates.  Special  attention  is  given  to  the  progressive  mod- 
ification of  organs  from  lower  to  higher  vertebrates.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and 
one  four-hour  laboratory  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11.  Alternate  years. 

31  HISTOLOGY 

A  study  of  the  basic  body  tissues  and  the  microscopic  anatomy  of  the  organs 
and  structures  of  the  body  which  are  formed  from  them.  Focus  is  on  normal 
human  histology.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one  four-hour  laboratory  per  week. 
Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11.  Alternate  years. 

33  ECONOMIC  AND  SYSTEMATIC  BOTANY 

Structure  and  classification  of  plants  with  emphasis  on  those  species, 

particularly  food  and  drug  plants,  having  significance  for  human  affairs. 

Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one  three-hour  laboratory  per  week.  Prerequisites: 
Biology  10-11.  Biology  25.  Alternate  years. 

34  INVERTEBRATE  ZOOLOGY 

Comparative  study  of  the  invertebrate  phyla  with  emphasis  on  phylogeny, 

57 


physiology,  morphology  and  ecology.  Two  three-hour  lecture  /laboratory  peri- 
ods per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11.  Alternate  years. 

35  CELLULAR  PHYSIOLOGY 

Physico-chemical  background  of  cellular  function:  functions  of  membrane 
systems  and  organelles;  metabolic  pathways;  biochemical  and  cellular  bases 
of  growth,  development  and  responses  of  organisms.  Three  hours  of  lecture 
and  one  three-hour  laboratory  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11  and  a  year  of 
chemistry.  Alternate  years. 

36  INTRODUCTION  TO  MARINE  BIOLOGY  AND  BIOLOGICAL 
OCEANOGRAPHY 

The  study  of  major  marine  habitats  and  the  adaptations  of  marine  or- 
ganisms as  well  as  the  physical  and  chemical  characteristics  of  oceans. 
This  field-oriented  course  is  held  at  a  major  marine  biological  station,  and 
includes  diving  and  collecting  from  boats.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11.  May 
term  only. 

37  FIELD  ORNITHOLOGY 

A  field-oriented  course,  with  in-the-field  discussions,  demonstrations  and 
exercises  dealing  with  the  systematics  and  identification  of  the  birds  of 
the  Northern  U.S.,  their  behavior,  migration,  habitat  selection  and  popu- 
lations dynamics.  Studies  will  stress  experimental  techniques  used  in  the 
field,  including  banding,  recording  and  playback  methods,  territorial 
mapping  and  population  analysis.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11.  May  term 
only. 

38  CLINICAL  MICROBIOLOGY 

A  rigorous  introduction  to  clinical  microbiology  with  emphasis  given  to 
rapid  identification  of  human  bacterial  pathogens.  Laboratory  to  include 
such  diagnostic  procedures  as  antibiotic  sensitivity  testing,  serological 
diagnosis,  anaerobic  culture  techniques  and  hemolytic  reactions.  Field 
trips  will  be  taken  to  several  clinical  labs.  Prerequisites:  Biology  10-11, 
Biology  2 1 .  May  term  only. 

41  VERTEBRATE  EMBRYOLOGY 

A  study  of  the  development  of  vertebrates  from  fertilization  to  the  fully 
formed  fetus.  Particular  attention  is  given  to  the  chick  and  human  as 
representative  organisms.  Tzco  three-hour  lecture/laboratory  periods  per  week. 
Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11.  Alternate  years. 

42  ANIMAL  BEHAVIOR 

A  study  of  the  causation,  function,  evolution  and  biological  significance 
of  animal  behaviors  in  their  normal  environment  and  social  contexts. 
Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one  four-hour  laboratory  each  week.  Prerequisite: 
Biology  10-11.  Alternate  years. 

44     BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis  is   given   to  the   metabolism   of  carbohydrates,   lipids,   amino 

58 


acids,  proteins  and  nucleic  acids;  integration  of  metabolism;  and 
biochemical  control  mechanisms  including  allosteric  control,  induction, 
repression,  as  well  as  the  various  types  of  inhibitive  control  mechanisms. 
Three  hours  of  lecture,  one  three-hour  laboratory/  and  one  hour  of  arranged  work 
per  week.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  20-21  or  Chemistry  5,  or  consent  of  instructor. 
Cross-listed  as  Chemistry  44.  Alternate  years. 

46  PLANT  ANATOMY  AND  PHYSIOLOGY 

A  study  of  plant  physiology  as  a  function  of  plant  anatomy.  Metabolic 
relationships  and  environmental  factors  will  be  examined  from  a  back- 
ground of  the  structure  and  development  of  cells,  tissues,  organs  and 
whole  plants.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one  three-hour  laboratory  per  week. 
Prerequisites:  Biology  10-11,  Biology  25.  Alternate  years. 

47  IMMUNOLOGY 

The  course  introduces  concepts  concerning  how  pathogens  cause  disease 
and  host  defense  mechanisms  against  infectious  diseases.  Character- 
ization of  and  relationships  between  antigens,  haptens  and  antibodies  are 
presented.  Serological  assays  will  include:  agglutination  precipitations, 
immunofluorescence,  immunoelectrophoresis  and  complement  fixation. 
Other  topics  are:  immediate  and  delayed  hypersensitivities  (i.e.  allergies 
such  as  hay  fever  and  poison  ivy),  immunological  renal  diseases,  im- 
munohematology  (blood  groups,  etc.),  the  chemistry  and  function  of 
complement  autoimmunity  and  organ  graft  rejection  phenomena.  Three 
hours  of  lecture,  one  three-hour  laboratory  and  one  hour  of  arranged  icork  per 
week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11.  Alternate  years. 

48  ENDOCRINOLOGY 

This  course  begins  with  a  survey  of  the  role  of  the  endocrine  hormones 
in  the  integration  of  body  functions.  This  is  followed  by  a  study  of  the 
control  of  hormone  synthesis  and  release,  and  a  consideration  of  the 
mechanisms  by  which  hormones  accomplish  their  effects  on  target  or- 
gans. Two  three-hour  lecturellaboratory  periods  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biology 
10-11.  Alternate  years. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Recent  samples  of  internships  in  the  department  include  ones  with  the 
Department  of  Environmental  Resources,  nuclear  medicine  or  re- 
habilitative therapies  at  the  local  hospital. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Departmental  studies  are  experimentally  oriented  and  may  entail  either  lab 
or  field  work. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 

Examples  of  recent  honors  projects  have  involved  stream  analysis,  gypsy 
moth  research,  drug  synthesis  and  testing. 


59 


BUSINESS  ADMINISTRATION 

Professor:  Hollenback 

Assistant  Professor:  E.  King,  Shareef,  Weaver  (Chairman) 

Lecturer:  Larrabee 

The  major  is  designed  to  train  students  in  analytical  thinking  and  verbal  and  oral 
communication,  in  addition  to  educating  them  in  the  principal  disciplines  of 
business.  To  accomplish  this,  10  courses  are  required:  Business  10-11,  23,  28-29, 
38-39,  40  and  41  and  Mathematics  13.  Business  32,  43  or  44  may  be  substituted 
for  Business  29,  and  Business  33  may  be  substituted  for  Business  39.  Accounting 
10  may  be  substituted  for  Business  10  if  a  student's  major  changes.  Majors  also 
are  urged  to  enroll  in  Economics  10,  11;  Business  35  and  36;  Mathematics  12  and 
Computer  Science  15,  and  are  encouraged  to  take  a  foreign  language.  The 
additional  elective  offerings  are  intended  to  add  depth  in  the  areas  of  finance, 
marketing  and  management. 

10-11     MANAGERIAL  ACCOUNTING 

The  business  firm  is  a  decision-making  institution  adapting  to  a  constantly 
changing  environment.  Future  administrators  and  managers  are  introduced 
to  their  stewardship  responsibilities  by  use  of  accounting  and  statistical 
techniques  as  tools  in  planning  and  controlling  the  organization. 

23    QUANTITATIVE  BUSINESS  ANALYSIS 

Techniques  of  quantitative  analysis  useful  in  business  management.  Topics 
include:  sampling,  hypothesis  testing,  index  numbers,  analysis  of  time 
series,  linear  programming  and  decision  theory.  Prerequisite:  Math  13  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

28-29     MARKETING  MANAGEMENT 

Planning,  organization  and  control  of  the  distribution  activities  of  the  firm, 
and  an  analysis  and  evaluation  of  the  marketing  system,  its  institutions  and 
processes.  Application  of  marketing  principles  and  the  development  of 
strategies  for  specific  marketing  problems.  Product,  channel  flow,  promo- 
tion and  pricing  strategies  explored.  Readings,  cases  and  games. 

32  ADVERTISING 

Nature,  scope,  methods  and  effects  of  promotion.  Techniques  of  analysis 
and  control  in  the  use  of  advertising  and  publicity  as  tools  in  developing 
business  strategy. 

33  INVESTMENTS 

Analysis  of  the  leading  types  of  investments  available  to  the  individul  and 
the  firm.  Use  of  forecasting  methods,  financial  reports  and  financial 
indicators.  Methods  of  buying  and  selling  securities  with  a  discussion  of  the 
agencies  involved,  including  brokerage  houses  and  stock  exchanges. 

34  INSURANCE 

Analysis  of  the  major  insurance  methods  of  overcoming  risk,  including  life, 
accident,  health,  marine  and  social  insurance.  Fidelity  and  surety  bonds. 
Commercial  and  government  plans. 

60 


35  LEGAL  PRINCIPLES  I 

Lectures  and  analysis  of  cases  on  the  nature,  sources  and  fundamentals  of 
the  law  in  general,  and  particularly  as  relating  to  contracts,  agency  and 
negotiable  instruments.  Open  only  to  juniors  and  seniors. 

36  LEGAL  PRINCIPLES  II 

Lectures  on  the  fundamentals  and  history  of  the  law  relating  to  legal 
association,  real  property,  wills  and  estates.  Open  only  to  juniors  and  seniors. 

38-39    FINANCIAL  MANAGEMENT 

Planning,  organization  and  control  of  the  financial  aspects  of  the  firm. 
Development  of  financial  principles  and  application  to  specific  situations. 
Sources  and  uses  of  funds,  costs  of  funds,  profit  determination,  expansion, 
reorganization  and  liquidation.  Prerequisite:  Business  11  or  Accounting  20  and 
Business  23. 

40  MANAGEMENT  CONCEPTS 

Structural  characteristics  and  functional  relationships  of  a  business  or- 
ganization as  well  as  the  problems  encountered  in  coordinating  the  internal 
resources  of  a  firm.  Emphasis  on  administrative  efficiency  and  procedures. 

41  BUSINESS  POLICIES 

Planning,  organization  and  control  of  business  operations;  setting  of  goals; 
coordination  of  resources,  development  of  policies.  Analysis  of  strategic 
decisions  encompassing  all  areas  of  a  business,  and  the  use  and  analysis  of 
control  measures.  Emphasis  on  both  the  internal  relationship  of  various 
'elements  of  production,  finance,  marketing  and  personnel,  and  the  rela- 
tionship of  the  business  entity  to  external  stimuli.  Readings,  cases  and 
games.  Prerequisites:  Business  23,  28-29,  38-39  and  40  or  consent  of  instructor. 
Seniors  only. 

42  PERSONNEL  MANAGEMENT 

An  introduction  to  the  managerial  problems  of  recruiting,  selecting,  training 
and  retraining  the  human  resources  of  the  firm.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the 
interrelationship  of  personnel  policies  with  management  objectives  and 
philosophies  in  such  areas  as  fringe  benefits,  wage  and  salary  policies, 
union  activities  and  health  and  safety. 

43  RETAIL  MANAGEMENT  I 

Planning,  organization  and  control  of  the  retailing  firm.  Competitive 
strategy  development  through  store  location,  layout,  administrative  or- 
ganization, buying  and  pricing.  Cases,  reading  and  papers.  Alternate  years. 

44  RETAIL  MANAGEMENT  II 

Inventory  control,  retail  sales,  promotion  and  financial  analysis  of  the 
enterprise.  Survey  of  current  issues  and  government,  social  and  economic 
forces  of  concern  to  the  retailer.  Retailing  principles  applied  to  specific 
management  situations  through  cases,  games  and  reading.  Prerequisite: 
Business  43  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

61 


46  PRODUCTION  MANAGEMENT 

An  introduction  to  the  production  function  in  industry.  Topics  include: 
product  design,  plant  location  and  layout,  operational  analysis,  per- 
formance standards,  line  balance  theory,  inventory  control  and  the  impact 
of  automation  through  technological  change.  Alternate  years. 

47  CREATIVE  ADVERTISING 

A  workshop  concerned  with  theme,  copy  and  effective  presentation  of 
advertisements  for  print  media,  radio  and  direct  mail.  Primarily  an  explora- 
tion of  creativity  through  analysis  of  works  of  artists  and  writers  with 
application  to  practical  advertising,  and  tailored  to  the  interests  of  individ- 
ual students.  May  term. 

48  SALES  SEMINAR 

The  role  of  selling  in  the  economy.  The  art  of  creative  selling;  application  of 
theories  from  the  behavioral  sciences  to  selling  through  the  analysis  of  sales 
situations  and  techniques.  Alternate  years. 

49  MANAGING  THE  SMALL  BUSINESS 

How  the  potential  businessman  proceeds  in  establishing,  operating  and 
profiting  from  a  small  business  operation.  Considered  and  analyzed  are 
such  aspects  as  marketing,  managing,  financing,  promoting,  insuring, 
establishing,  developing  and  staffing  the  small  retail,  wholesale  service  and 
manufacturing  firm.  May  term. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Typical  examples  are  marketing  analysis  for  a  paper  products  firm,  planning 
a  branch  store,  hotel  and  real  estate  management,  banking  and  insurance. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Examples  of  recent  studies  are:  the  economic  impact  of  a  college  on  a 
community;  a  marketing  strategy  for  a  local  firm  entering  the  consumer 
market. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 

A  recent  project  was  a  study  of  the  evolution  of  anti-trust  legislation  in  the 
United  States. 


62 


CHEMISTRY 

Professor:  Hummer  (Chairman),  Radspinner 
Associate  Professor:  Franz 
Part-Time  Instructor:  Baggett 

A  major  in  chemistry  consists  of  Chemistry  10-11,  20-21,  30-31,  32  and  33; 
Astronomy/Physics  25-56;  Mathematics  18,  19  and  one  of  the  following  courses: 
Mathematics  13,  20,  21,  32  or  Computer  Science  15.  Mathematics  20  and  21  and 
French  or  German  are  strongly  recommended  for  students  planning  on  graduate 
study  in  chemistry.  To  be  certified  in  secondary  education,  chemistry  majors 
must  also  pass  two  biology  courses  numbered  10  or  higher. 

10     GENERAL  CHEMISTRY  I 

An  introduction  to  the  concepts  and  models  of  chemistry  which  are 
necessary  for  an  understanding  of  the  fabric  and  dynamics  of  the  material 
world.  These  principles  include  stoichiometry,  atomic  and  molecular  struc- 
ture and  properties,  the  states  of  matter,  solutions,  kinetics,  equilibrium 
and  nomenclature.  A  study  of  the  chemistry  of  representative  elements  and 
their  compounds  is  made  through  the  application  of  fundamental  prin- 
ciples. The  laboratory  work  introduces  the  student  to  methods  of  separa- 
tion, purification  and  identification  of  compounds  according  to  their  physi- 
cal properties.  Three  hours  lecture,  one  hour  discussion  and  one  three-hour 
laboratory  period  each  week.  Prerequisite:  placement  in  Chemistry  10  is  determined 
in  part  by  a  student's  score  on  the  mathematics  examination  taken  by  all  incoming 
freshmen  during  orientation. 

63 


11     GENERAL  CHEMISTRY  II 

Continuation  of  Chemistry  10  with  emphasis  on  the  foundations  of 
analytical,  inorganic  and  physical  chemistry.  The  principal  unifying  con- 
cepts of  chemical  systems  are  examined  in  both  Chemistry  10  and  11.  The 
laboratory  treats  aspects  of  quantitative  and  qualitative  analysis.  Three  hours 
lecture,  one  hour  discussion  and  one  three-hour  laboratory  period  each  week. 
Prerequisite:  Chemistry  10. 

15    BRIEF  ORGANIC  CHEMISTRY 

This  course  is  designed  for  those  non-chemistry  majors  who  elect  a  single 
semester  course  only  in  organic  chemistry.  The  material  will  illustrate 
principles  and  concepts  of  organic  chemistry  supported  by  that  descriptive 
material  which  would  find  application  for  students  of  medical  technology, 
biology,  nursing,  forestry,  education  and  the  humanities.  Topics  included 
are  bonding  and  structure,  alcanes,  arenes  and  their  functional  derivatives, 
amino  acids  and  proteins,  carbohydrates  and  other  naturally  occurring 
compounds.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one  four-hour  laboratory  period  each  week. 
Prerequisite:  Chemistry  10.  Not  open  for  credit  to  students  who  have  received  credit 
for  Chemistry  20. 

20-21     ORGANIC  CHEMISTRY 

A  systematic  study  of  the  compounds  of  carbon,  including  both  aliphatic 
and  aromatic  series.  The  laboratory  work  introduces  the  student  to  simple 
fundamental  methods  of  organic  synthesis,  isolation  and  analysis.  Three 
hours  lecture  and  one  four-hour  laboratory  period  each  week.  Prerequisite: 
Chemistry  11. 

26     CLINICAL  ANALYSIS 

A  presentation  of  selected  wet-chemical  and  instrumental  methods  of 
quantitative  analysis  with  an  orientation  toward  clinical  applications  in 
medical  technology.  Topics  include:  general  methods  and  calculations; 
solutions;  titrations;  photometric  analyses  (colorimetric,  atomic  absorption, 
flame  emission);  electrochemical  methods  (ion-selective  electrodes, 
coulometry),  automation.  Lecture,  recitation  and  laboratory  daily.  Prerequisite: 
Chemistry  10-11  or  consent  of  instructor.  May  not  be  taken  for  credit  folloiving 
Chemistry  32.  May  term  only. 

30-31     PHYSICAL  CHEMISTRY 

A  study  of  the  fundamental  principles  of  theoretical  chemistry  and  their 
applications.  The  laboratory  work  includes  techniques  in  physiochemical 
measurements.  Three  hours  lecture  and  one  four-hour  laboratory  period  each 
week.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  11,  Mathematics  19  and  one  year  of  physics  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

32     ANALYTICAL  CHEMISTRY 

A  study  of  the  fundamental  methods  of  gravimetric,  volumetric  and 
elementary  instrumental  analysis  together  with  practice  in  laboratory  tech- 
niques and  calculations  of  these  methods.  Two  hours  lecture  and  two  three- 
hour  laboratory  periods  each  week.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  11  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

64 


33     ADVANCED  INORGANIC  CHEMISTRY 

A  study  of  modern  theories  of  atomic  and  molecular  structure  and  their 
relationship  to  the  chemistry  of  selected  elements  and  their  compounds. 
Three  hours  lecture  and  one  four-hour  laboratory  period  each  week.  Prerequisite: 
Chemistry  30,  Mathematics  19  and  one  year  of  physics  or  consent  of  instructor. 

39  INTRODUCTION  TO  QUANTUM  MECHANICS 

After  presenting  the  origin,  basic  concepts  and  formulation  of  quantum 
mechanics  with  emphasis  on  its  physical  meaning,  the  free  particle,  simple 
harmonic  oscillator  and  central  force  problems  will  be  investigated.  Both 
time-independent  and  time-dependent  perturbation  theory  will  be  covered. 
The  elegant  operator  formalism  of  quantum  mechanics  will  conclude  the 
course.  Four  hours  of  lecture  and  recitation.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  21,  either 
Chemistry  31  or  Astronomy  and  Physics  26,  and  consent  of  instructor.  Cross-listed 
as  Astronomy  and  Physics  48. 

40  ADVANCED  ORGANIC  CHEMISTRY 

Selected  topics,  which  may  include  mechanisms  of  organic  reactions, 
synthesis,  detailed  structure  and  chemistry  of  natural  products, 
polynuclear  hydrocarbons  and  aromatic  heterocyclics.  Three  hours  lecture. 
Prerequisite:  Ch&nistry  21. 

41  QUALITATIVE  ORGANIC  ANALYSIS 

Theory  and  application  of  the  systematic  identification  of  pure  organic 
compounds  and  mixtures.  Two  hours  lecture  and  two  three-hour  laboratory 
periods  each  week.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  21. 

43  ADVANCED  ANALYTICAL  CHEMISTRY 

A  study  of  advanced  analytical  methods  with  emphasis  on  chromato- 
graphic, electrochemical  and  spectroscopic  methods  of  instrumental 
analysis.  Three  hours  lecture  and  one  four-hour  laboratory  period  each  week. 
Prerequisite:  Chemistry  31  and  32  or  consent  of  instructor. 

44  BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis  is  given  to  the  metabolism  of  carbohydrates,  lipids,  amino  acids, 
proteins  and  nucleic  acids;  integration  of  metabolism;  and  biochemical 
control  mechanisms,  including  allosteric  control,  induction,  repression,  as 
well  as  the  various  types  of  inhibitive  control  mechanisms.  Prerequisite: 
Chemistry  21  or  15  or  consent  of  instructor.  Cross-listed  as  Biology  44. 

45  SPECTROSCOPY  AND  MOLECULAR  STRUCTURE 

Theory  and  practice  of  molecular  structure  determination  by  spectroscopic 
methods.  Three  hours  lecture.  Pre-  or  co-requisites:  Chemistry  31,  33  or  consent 
of  instructor. 

48     CHEMISTRY  COLLOQUIUM 

A  seminar  in  which  faculty,  students  and  invited  professional  chemists 
discuss  their  own  research  activities  or  those  of  others  which  have  appeared 

65 


in  the  recent  chemical  literature.  Prerequisite:  Three  semesters  of  non-credit 
Chemistry  Colloquium  taken  during  the  junior  and  senior  years. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

The  student  will  ordinarily  work  under  supervision  in  an  industrial  labora- 
tory and  submit  a  written  report  on  his  project. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

The  student  will  ordinarily  work  on  a  laboratory  research  project  and  will 
write  a  thesis  on  his  work. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 

The  student  will  ordinarily  work  on  a  laboratory  research  project  with 
emphasis  being  on  the  student's  showing  initiative  and  making  a  scholarly 
contribution.  A  thesis  will  be  written. 


66 


CRIMINAL  JUSTICE 

Assistant  Professor:  Strauser  (Coordinator) 

This  major  is  designed  to  acquaint  students  with  the  American  criminal  justice 
system  and  to  provide  an  understanding  of  the  social,  psychological, 
philosophical  and  political  contexts  within  which  the  system  of  criminal  justice 
functions.  Its  aim  is  to  develop  students'  intellectual  and  scientific  skills  in 
raising  and  attempting  to  answer  important  questions  about  the  system  of 
justice  and  its  place  in  society.  The  program  offers  opportunity  for  intern 
experience  in  the  field,  and  prepares  for  careers  in  the  areas  of  law  enforcement, 
probation  and  parole,  prisons  and  treatment  services. 

The  major  has  two  tracks.  Track  I  prepares  for  careers  in  law  enforcement. 
Track  II  prepares  for  careers  in  corrections. 

Track  I — Law  Enforcement.  The  major  consists  of  10  courses,  distributed  as 
follows: 

A.  Professional  courses  in  criminal  justice  (three  courses) 

Introduction  to  the  Criminal  Justice  System  (Sociology  and  Anthropology  15) 
Introduction  to  Law  Enforcement  (Sociology  and  Anthropology  23) 
The  American  Prison  System  (Sociology  and  Anthropology  39) 

B.  Courses  in  the  social,  psychological,  philosophical  and  political  context  of 
the  justice  system  (seven  courses) 

Criminology  (Sociology  and  Anthropology  30)  and  either  Juvenile  Delin- 
quency (Sociology  and  Anthropology  21)  or  Racial  and  Cultural  Minorities 
(Sociology  and  Anthropology  34)  (two  courses) 
Abnormal  Psychology  (Psychology  16)  (one  course) 

America  as  a  Civilization  (American  Studies  10).  Afro-American  History 
(History  28)  or  United  States  Social  and  Intellectual  History  Since  1877 
(History  43)  (one  course) 

Law  and  Society  (Political  Science  35)  and  Civil  Rights  and  Liberties 
(Political  Science  31)  (two  courses) 
Philosophical  Issues  in  Criminal  Justice  (Philosophy  18)  (one  course) 

C.  Internship  or  practicum   in  law   enforcement.    (Recommended  but   not 
required  for  the  major) 

Track  II — Corrections.  The  major  consists  of  10  courses,  distributed  as 
follows: 

A.  Professional  courses  in  criminal  justice  (three  courses) 

Introduction  to  the  Criminal  Justice  System  (Sociology  and  Anthropology  15) 
The  American  Prison  System  (Sociology  and  Anthropology  39) 
Introduction  to  Social  Work  (Sociology  and  Anthropology  42) 

B.  Courses  in  the  social,  psychological,  philosophical  and  political  context  of 
the  justice  system  (seven  courses) 

Criminology  (Sociology  and  Anthropology  30)  and  either  Juvenile  Delin- 
quency (Sociology  and  Anthropology  21)  or  Racial  and  Cultural  Minorities 
(Sociology  and  Anthropology  34)  (two  courses) 
Abnormal  Psychology  (Psychology  16)  (one  course) 

America  as  a  Civilization  (American  Studies  10).  Afro-American  History 
(History  28)  or  United  States  Social  and  Intellectual  History  Since  1877 

67 


(History  43)  (one  course) 

Law  and  Society  (Political  Science  35)  and  Civil  Rights  and  Liberties  (Political 
Science  31)  (two  courses) 

Philosophical  Issues  in  Criminal  Justice  (Philosophy  18)  (one  course) 

C.  Internship  or  practicum  in  corrections.  (Recommended  but  not  required  for 
the  major)  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  13,  Psychology  21  and  Psychology  39.  These 
prerequisites  may  be  waived  in  certain  cases  by  the  coordinating  committee. 

Majors  should  seek  advice  concerning  course  selection  from  members  of  the 
coordinating  committee  and  should  note  course  prerequisites  in  planning  their 
programs. 


68 


ECONOMICS 

Professor:  Opdahl,  Rabold  (Chairman) 

The  major  has  two  tracks.  Track  I  is  designed  for  the  student  whose  primary 
interest  lies  in  business  management;  Track  II  is  designed  for  students  with  an 
interest  in  graduate  work,  teaching,  government  or  non-business  careers,  and 
for  those  with  less  well  defined  interests. 

Track  I — Managerial  Economics  requires:  Economics  10,  11,  32  and  41; 

Business  10-11  or  Accounting  10  and  20;  Business  38  and  39,  plus  two  electives 
from  Economics  20,  31,  35,  37,  43  and  Business  40. 

Track  II — Political  Economy  requires:  Economics  10,  11,  30,  31,  40  and  five 
electives  of  which  three  must  be  in  economics  and  two  in  political  science,  all 
selected  with  the  advice  and  consent  of  the  student's  advisor  or  department 
chairman. 

In  addition,  the  following  courses  are  recommended:  all  majors — Math  13 
and  Business  23;  majors  planning  graduate  work — Math  12-18;  Track  II  majors 
— Business  10-11. 

2    CONSUMER  ECONOMICS 

A  course  in  "family"  or  "practical"  economics,  designed  to  teach  students 
how  they  and  their  families  can  be  intelligent  consumers:  that  is,  how  they 
can  spend,  save  and  borrow  so  as  to  maximize  the  value  they  receive  for  the 
income  they  have.  Treats  subjects  such  as  intelligent  shopping;  the  uses  and 
abuses  of  credit;  investing  savings;  buying  insurance,  automobiles  and 
houses;  medical  care  costs;  estates  and  wills,  etc.  Alternate  years. 

10  •  PRINCIPLES  OF  POLITICAL  ECONOMY  I 

Macroeconomics.  Deals  with  problems  of  the  economic  system  as  a  whole. 
What  influences  the  level  of  national  income  and  employment?  What  is 
inflation  and  why  do  we  have  it?  What  is  the  role  of  government  in  a 
modern  capitalistic  system?  How  does  business  organize  to  produce  the 
goods  and  services  we  demand?  How  are  the  American  financial  and 
banking  systems  organized?  What  is  the  nature  of  American  unionism? 
What  are  the  elements  of  government  finance  and  fiscal  policy? 

11  PRINCIPLES  OF  POLITICAL  ECONOMY  II 

This  course  focuses  upon  microeconomics  and  selected  current  economic 
problems.  It  deals  with  the  relatively  small  units  of  the  economy  such  as  the 
firm  and  the  family.  Analyzes  demand  and  supply.  Discusses  how  business 
firms  decide  what  and  how  much  to  produce  and  how  goods  and  services 
are  priced  in  different  types  of  markets.  Also  considers  such  problems  as 
economic  growth,  international  trade,  poverty,  discrimination,  ecology  and 
alternative  economic  systems. 

20     MONEY  AND  BANKING 

Covers  business  fluctuations  and  monetary  and  fiscal  policy;  the  financial 
organization  of  society;  the  banking  system;  credit  institutions;  capital 
markets  and  international  financial  relations.  Prerequisite:  Economics  10  and 
11.  Alternate  years. 

69 


22  ECONOMIC  SYSTEMS  OF  THE  WEST:  Capitalism  and  Socialism 

A  comparative  analysis  of  the  underlying  ideologies,  the  basic  institutions 
and  the  performance  of  selected  economic  systems  extant  in  the  West. 

Alternate  years. 

23  SOVIET-TYPE  ECONOMIES 

An  analysis  of  the  ideologies,  institutions  and  performance  of  Soviet-type 
economies,  with  emphasis  upon  Marxian  theory  and  the  economy  of  the 
U.S.S.R.;  comparison  of  selected  Eastern  European  and  Chinese  ap- 
proaches to  communism.  Alternate  years. 

24  URBAN  PROBLEMS 

The  application  of  economic  theory  to  the  study  of  significant  social, 
political  and  economic  problems  associated  with  urbanization,  including 
poverty,  employment,  education,  crime,  health,  housing,  land  use  and  the 
environment,  transportation  and  public  finance.  Analysis  of  solutions 
offered.  Alternate  years. 

25  ENVIRONMENTAL  ECONOMICS 

A  study  of  the  relationship  between  environmental  decay  and  economic 
growth,  with  particular  reference  to  failures  of  the  price  and  property  rights 
systems;  application  of  cost/benefit  analysis,  measures  aimed  at  the  creation 
of  an  ecologically  viable  economy.  Alternate  years. 

30  INTERMEDIATE  MICROECONOMICS 

An  advanced  analysis  of  contemporary  theory  regarding  consumer  de- 
mand, production  costs  and  theory,  profit  maximization,  market  structures 
and  the  determinants  of  returns  to  the  factors  of  production.  Prerequisite: 
Economics  10  and  11. 

31  INTERMEDIATE  MACROECONOMICS 

An  advanced  analysis  of  contemporary  theory  and  practice  with  regard  to 
business  fluctuations,  national  income  accounting,  the  determination  of 
income  and  employment  levels  and  the  use  of  monetary  and  fiscal  policy. 
Prerequisite:  Economics  10  and  11. 

32  GOVERNMENT  AND  THE  ECONOMY 

An  analytical  survey  of  government's  efforts  to  maintain  competition 
through  antitrust  legislation;  to  supervise  acceptable  cases  of  private 
monopoly  through  public  utility  regulation  and  via  means  of  regulatory 
commissions,  and  to  encourage  or  restrain  various  types  of  private  econom- 
ic activities.  Alternate  years.  Prerequisite:  Economics  10  and  11  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

35     LABOR  PROBLEMS 

The  history  of  organized  labor  in  the  United  States,  including  the  structure 
of  unions;  employers'  opposition  to  unions;  the  role  of  government  in  labor- 
management  relations,  the  economic  impact  of  unions.  Alternate  years. 

70 


37    PUBLIC  FINANCE 

An  analysis  of  the  fiscal  economics  of  the  public  sector,  including  the 
development,  concepts  and  theories  of  public  expenditures,  taxation  and 
debt  at  all  levels  of  American  government.  Includes  also  the  use  of  fiscal 
policy  as  an  economic  control  device.  Prerequisite:  Economics  10  and  11  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

40  HISTORY  OF  ECONOMIC  THOUGHT 

A  discussion  of  the  origins,  development  and  significance  of  the  economic 
ideas  embodied  in  the  works  of  Smith,  Marx,  Schumpeter,  Keynes  and 
others.  Prerequisite:  Economics  10  and  11  or  consent  of  instructor. 

41  MANAGERIAL  ECONOMICS 

The  application  of  economic  theory  and  methodology  to  the  solution  of 
business  problems.  Subjects  include:  optimizing  techniques,  risk  analysis, 
demand  theory,  production  theory,  cost  theory,  linear  programming, 
capital  budgeting,  market  structures  and  the  theory  of  pricing.  Prerequisite: 
Economics  10  and  11. 

43     INTERNATIONAL  TRADE 

A  study  of  the  principles,  theories,  development  and  policies  concerning 
international  economic  relations,  with  particular  reference  to  the  United 
States.  Subjects  covered  include:  U.S.  commercial  policy  and  its  develop- 
ment; international  trade  theory;  tariffs  and  other  protectionist  devices; 
international  monetary  system  and  its  problems,  balance  of  payments 
issues.  Alternate  years.  Prerequisite:  Economics  10  and  11. 

45     DEVELOPMENT  OF  UNDERDEVELOPED  NATIONS 

A  study  of  the  theories  and  problems  of  capital  accumulation,  allocation  of 
resources,  technological  development,  growth,  planning  techniques  and 
institutions  and  international  relations  encountered  by  the  developing 
nations.  Alternate  years. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Typically  off  campus  in  business,  banking  or  government,  supervised  by 
assigned  employee  of  sponsoring  organization. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Superior  students  may  select  independent  study  in  various  courses,  particu- 
larly in  preparation  for  graduate  school. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 


71 


EDUCATION 

Associate  Professor:  Keesbury  (Chairman) 
Assistant  Professor:  Conrad,  Studier 

Lycoming  believes  that  the  liberal  arts  provide  the  best  preparation  for  future 
teachers,  thus  all  education  students  complete  a  liberal  arts  major  in  addition  to 
the  certification  requirements.  Students  can  be  certified  in  elementary  education 
or  one  or  more  of  the  following  secondary  areas:  biology,  chemistry,  English, 
French,  general  science  (with  biology  and  astronomy/physics  tracks),  German, 
mathematics,  physics,  social  studies  and  Spanish.  All  teacher  education  pro- 
grams are  approved  by  the  Pennsylvania  Department  of  Education  and  Pennsyl- 
vania certificates  are  recognized  in  most  other  states  either  through  reciprocal 
agreements  or  by  transcript  evaluation. 

Education  20  and  Psychology  38  are  prerequisites  to  all  other  offerings  in  the 
Department  of  Education.  Education  20  should  be  taken  at  least  two 
semesters  before  the  professional  semester. 

Students  seeking  elementary  certification  must  complete  Mathematics  7, 
Physical  Education  A  (Elementary  Games),  Education  40,  41,  42  and  43  as 
prerequisites  to  the  professional  semester  (Education  45,  47  and  48). 

Students  interested  in  the  teacher  education  program  should  consult  with  a 
member  of  the  department  no  later  than  the  first  semester  of  the  sophomore 
year.  Application  for  the  professional  semester  must  be  made  before  October  1 
of  the  junior  year.  The  Department  of  Education  will  admit  to  the  professional 
semester  those  applicants  who  have  a  minimum  cumulative  grade  point  average 
of  2.00;  are  in  good  academic  standing;  have  satisfactorily  completed  the  junior 
year  participation  requirements  (secondary  students  only);  have  paid  the 
student  teaching  fee,  and  have  received  a  positive  recommendation.  The 
recommendation  will  be  based  upon:  (a)  recommendations  from  each  student's 
major  department;  (b)  recommendations  from  two  additional  faculty  outside  the 
Department  of  Education;  (c)  a  screening  interview  conducted  by  the  depart- 
ment, and  (d)  a  writing  sample  from  each  student  applicant.  Major  departments 
have  different  criteria  for  their  recommendations.  Therefore,  students  should 
consult  with  the  chairman  of  their  major  department  about  those  requirements 
as  soon  as  they  begin  to  study  for  certification. 

20     INTRODUCTION  TO  THE  STUDY  OF  EDUCATION 

A  study  of  teaching  as  a  profession  with  emphasis  on  the  economic,  social, 
political  and  religious  conditions  which  influence  American  schools  and 
teachers.  Consideration  is  given  to  the  school  environment,  the  curriculum 
and  the  children  with  the  intention  that  the  students  will  examine  more 
rationally  their  own  motives  for  entering  the  profession.  Not  open  to 
freshmen. 

32     INSTRUCTIONAL  MEDIA  AND  COMMUNICATIONS 

A  study  of  the  value,  design,  construction  and  application  of  the  visual  and 
auditory  aids  to  learning.  Practical  experience  in  the  handling  of  audio- 
visual equipment  and  materials  is  provided.  Application  of  audio-visual 
techniques.  Application  of  the  visual  and  auditory  aids  to  learning.  Stu- 
dents will  plan  and  carry  out  actual  teaching  assignments  utilizing  various 
A-;V  devices. 

72 


39  PUBLIC  SCHOOL  CURRICULUM 

An  examination  of  the  various  curricula  of  the  public  schools  and  their 
relationships  to  current  practices.  Special  attention  will  be  given  to  the 
meaning  and  nature  of  the  curriculum;  the  desirable  outcomes  of  the 
curriculum;  conflicting  and  variant  conceptions  of  curricular  content; 
modern  techniques  of  curricular  construction;  criteria  for  the  evaluation  of 
curricula,  the  curriculum  as  a  teaching  instrument.  Emphasis  will  be  placed 
upon  the  curriculum  work  within  the  teaching  field  of  each  individual. 

40  TEACHING  LANGUAGE  ARTS  AND  CHILDREN'S  LITERATURE  IN 
THE  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL 

A  course  designed  to  consider  the  principal  means  of  communication, 
oral  and  written,  including  both  practical  and  creative  uses.  Attention 
will  be  given  to  listening,  speaking,  written  expression,  linguistics  and 
grammar,  spelling  and  handwriting.  Stress  will  be  placed  upon  the  inter- 
relatedness  of  the  language  arts.  Children's  literature  will  be  explored  as 
a  vehicle  for  developing  creative  characteristics  in  children  and  for  ensur- 
ing an  appreciation  of  the  creative  writing  of  others.  Observation  and 
participation  in  Greater  Williamsport  elementary  schools.  Prerequisites: 
Education  20  and  Psychology  38  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

41  TEACHING  THE  SOCIAL  STUDIES  IN  THE  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL 

Studies  and  experiences  to  develop  a  basic  understanding  of  the  struc- 
ture, concepts  and  processes  of  anthropology,  economics,  geography, 
history,  political  science  and  sociology  as  they  relate  to  the  elementary 
school  social  science  curriculum.  Practical  applications,  demonstrations  of 
methods  and  the  development  of  integrated  teaching  units  using  tests, 
reference  books,  films  and  other  teaching  materials.  Observation  and 
participation  in  Greater  Williamsport  elementary  schools.  Prerequisites: 
Education  20  and  Psychology  38  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

42  TEACHING  SCIENCE  IN  THE  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL 

Science  methods  and  materials  interpreting  children's  science  experiences 
and  guiding  the  development  of  their  scientific  concepts.  A  study  of  the 
science  content  of  the  curriculum,  its  material  and  use.  Observation  and 
participation  in  Greater  Williamsport  elementary  schools.  Prerequisites: 
Education  20  and  Psychology  38  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

43  TEACHING  READING  IN  THE  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL 

A  basic  course  in  the  philosophy  and  rationale  for  and  the  implementa- 
tion of  an  elementary  developmental  reading  program  from  kindergarten 
through  sixth  grade.  Emphasis  is  upon  designing  a  reading  instructional 
program  which  reflects  the  nature  of  the  learning  process  and  recognizes 
principles  of  child  development  through  examination  of  the  principles, 
problems,  methods  and  materials  used  in  elementary  reading  programs. 
Observation  and  participation  in  Greater  Williamsport  elementary 
schools.  Prerequisites:  Psychology  38,  Education  20,  40,  41  and  42  or  consent  of 
the  instructor. 

73 


45  METHODS  OF  TEACHING  IN  THE  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL 
(PART  OF  THE  PROFESSIONAL  SEMESTER) 

The  course  emphasizes  the  relationship  between  the  theoretical  studies  of 
physical,  social  and  cognitive  development  and  the  elementary  classroom 
environment.  Particular  consideration  will  be  given  to  the  appropriate  age 
and  developmental  level  of  the  students  with  an  emphasis  upon  the 
selection  and  utilization  of  methods  in  all  the  elementary  subject  areas, 
including  art  and  music.  Specific  attention  will  be  given  to  the  develop- 
ment of  strategies  for  structuring  lesson  plans;  for  maintaining  classroom 
control,  and  for  overall  classroom  management.  Direct  application  will  be 
made  to  the  individual  student  teaching  experience.  Prerequisites:  Math  7, 
Education  40,  41,  42  and  43  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

46  METHODS  OF  TEACHING  IN  THE  SECONDARY  SCHOOL 
(PART  OF  THE  PROFESSIONAL  SEMESTER) 

A  study  of  materials,  methods  and  techniques  of  teaching  with  emphasis 
on  the  student's  major.  Stress  is  placed  on  the  selection  and  utilization  of 
visual  and  auditory  aids  to  learning.  Students  will  teach  demonstration 
lessons  in  the  presence  of  the  instructor  and  the  members  of  the  class 
and  will  observe  superior  teachers  in  Greater  Williamsport  secondary 
schools.  Prerequisites:  Education  20,  Psychology  38  and  the  participation  ex- 
perience. 

47  PROBLEMS  IN  CONTEMPORARY  AMERICAN  EDUCATION 
(PART  OF  THE  PROFESSIONAL  SEMESTER) 

Seminar  in  the  issues,  problems  and  challenges  encountered  by  teachers 
in  the  American  public  schools,  especially  those  related  to  the  student 
teaching  experience. 

48  PRACTICE  TEACHING  IN  THE  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL 
(PART  OF  THE  PROFESSIONAL  SEMESTER) 

Two  units.  Exceeds  state  mandated  minimum  requirements.  Professional 
laboratory  experience  under  the  supervision  of  a  selected  cooperating 
teacher  in  a  public  elementary  school  in  Greater  Williamsport.  Organized 
learning  experiences.  Actual  classroom  experience.  * 

48     PRACTICE  TEACHING  IN  THE  SECONDARY  SCHOOL 
(PART  OF  THE  PROFESSIONAL  SEMESTER) 

Two  units.  Exceeds  state  mandated  minimum  requirements.  Professional 
laboratory  experience  under  the  supervision  of  a  selected  cooperating 
teacher  in  a  public  secondary  school  in  Greater  Williamsport.  Organized 
learning  experience.  Emphasis  on  actual  classroom  experience,  responsi- 
bility in  the  guidance  program  and  out-of-class  activities.  * 


'Practice  teachers  are  required  to  follow  the  calendar  of  the  school  district  to  which  they  are 
assigned. 


74 


ENGLISH 

Professor:  Van  Marter 

Associate  Professor:  Ford,  Jensen  (Chairman),  Madden,  Rife 

Assistant  Professor:  F.  Wild 

Visiting  Lecturer:  Blair 

A  major  consists  of  nine  courses  not  including  English  1  or  English  2.  These  nine 
courses  must  include  English  14,  15,  16,  17  and  one  writing  course  from  the 
following:  English  18,  22,  23,  24,  35  and  36. 

The  four  electives  may  include  any  course  from  English  12  and  above  not 
already  taken  to  satisfy  the  preceding  requirements.  With  the  consent  of  the 
Department  of  English,  an  appropriate  course  from  the  offerings  of  other 
departments  may  be  substituted  for  an  English  elective. 

Majors  seeking  secondary  certification  in  English  are  required  to  take 
English  38  and  to  complete  successfully  in  the  junior  or  senior  year  an 
experience  in  the  teaching  of  English  composition. 

The  Department  of  English  is  one  of  six  cooperating  in  the  interdisciplinary 
program  in  Mass  Communications,  and  would  be  an  appropriate  department  for 
the  four-course  specialization  required  for  the  Mass  Communications  major. 
The  department  also  participates  with  seven  others  in  the  American  Studies 
interdisciplinary  major,  in  which  American  literature  courses  constitute  an 
important  part  of  the  American  arts  concentration  area. 


1     WORKSHOP  IN  DEVELOPMENTAL  WRITING 

Classroom  and  laboratory  instruction  in  organizing  and  writing  the  detailed 
paragraph  and  illustrative  expository  theme,  with  major  emphasis  on 
spelling,  grammar  and  sentence  structure.  Writing  assignments  and 
classroom  exercises  designed  to  ensure  mastery  of  the  student's  special 
problems  in  basic  writing. 

75 


One-half  unit  and  grade  of  "S"  will  be  assigned  when  the  student  has 
successfully  completed  all  of  the  work  in  the  course.  Required  of,  and  only 
open  to,  those  who  have  not  been  exempted  from  English  1. 

2    COMPOSITION 

Extensive  practice  [neither  report  and  evaluative  writing  or  in  analytical  and 
argumentative  writing.  This  may  be  accomplished  by  taking  one  of  the 
following  sequences: 

Reading  and  Writing  about  Technology  and  Human  Life — Extensive  practice 
in  report  and  evaluative  writing.  Readings  dealing  with  problems  and 
issues  in  business,  in  the  natural  and  physical  sciences  and  in  related 
professions. 

Reading  and  Writing  about  Humanities  and  Human  Life — Extensive  practice 
in  analytic  and  argumentative  writing.  Readings  dealing  with  problems  and 
issues  in  the  liberal  arts,  in  law  and  the  social  sciences  and  in  the  non- 
scientific  helping  professions. 

12     INTRODUCTION  TO  LITERATURE 

An  introduction  to  the  study  of  literature,  designed  primarily  for  freshmen. 
Lectures  and  discussions  focusing  on  the  major  literary  genres. 

14  BRITISH  LITERATURE  I 

Literary  forms,  themes  and  authors  from  the  Anglo-Saxon  through  the 
Neo-Classical  periods.  Such  writers  as  Chaucer,  Spenser,  Shakespeare, 
Milton,  Swift,  Pope  and  Johnson;  representative  works  from  Beowulf  to 
Sheridan's  The  Rivals. 

15  BRITISH  LITERATURE  II 

Literary  movements  and  authors  from  the  Romantic  Period  to  the  present. 
Particular  emphasis  on  such  writers  as  Blake,  Wordsworth,  Shelley,  Mill, 
Tennyson,  Browning,  Rossetti,  Arnold,  Hardy,  Yeats,  Eliot. 

16  19TH  CENTURY  AMERICAN  LITERATURE 

Brief  survey  of  American  literature  and  thought  before  1800,  followed  by 
more  intensive  study  of  the  literature  and  thought  of  the  period  1800-1900. 
Bryant,  Cooper,  Emerson,  Thoreau,  Poe,  Hawthorne,  Melville,  Whitman, 
Dickinson,  Twain,  Howells  and  others. 

17  20TH  CENTURY  AMERICAN  LITERATURE 

Major  writers,  movements  and  tendencies  in  American  literature  during  the 
present  century.  Such  forces  as  naturalism,  realism  and  modernism;  and 
such  writers  as  James,  Dreiser,  Hemingway,  Faulkner,  Frost,  Eliot  and 
Stevens. 

18  ADVANCED  COMPOSITION 

Practical  training  in  the  writing  of  more  extended  essays  of  the  kinds  written 
in  English  2,  and  other  kinds  of  expository  and  argumentative  prose, 
including  forms  such  as:  essays  of  opinion  and  personal  essays;  critical 
commentaries  and  reviews;  synopses,  reports  and  research  papers. 

76 


20  THE  NATURE  OF  FICTION 

Study  of  either  the  novel  or  the  short  story.  Novel:  representative  novels 
from  the  18th  Century  to  the  present  with  emphasis  on  the  development  of 
the  genre.  Short  story:  emphasis  on  points  of  view  of  the  authors  studies. 

21  THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  DRAMA 

Discussion  of  typical  plays  of  the  Western  World  emphasizing  conventions 
of  form  and  performance.  Varying  focus  and  content  ranging  from  classical 
to  modern  playwrights  and  periods. 

22  CRITICAL  WRITING 

Introduction  to  the  various  ways  of  thinking  and  writing  about  literature 
and  film,  designed  for  people  who  wish  to  improve  their  understanding 
and  enjoyment  of  the  books  and  poems  they  read  and  the  plays  and  films 
they  see. 

23  NEWS  WRITING  FOR  THE  PRINT  MEDIA 

Analysis  and  practice  of  the  basic  forms  of  news  reporting  and  feature 
writing.  The  elements  of  news,  the  lead,  style  and  structure  and  types  of 
stories.  Students  who  have  taken  English  24  may  take  only  writing 
workshop  sessions  of  this  course  for  V2  unit. 

24  NEWS  WRITING  FOR  RADIO  AND  TV 

Offered  in  conjunction  with  English  23.  Separate  workshop  sessions  to 
analyze  and  practice  the  basic  forms  of  news  reporting  as  they  apply  to 
radio  and  TV.  Students  who  have  taken  English  23  may  take  only  workshop 
sessions  of  this  course  for  V2  unit.  Alternate  years. 

30  SHAKESPEARE 

Study  of  representative  plays  drawn  from  the  four  sub-genres  of 
Shakespeare's  dramas:  comedy,  history,  tragedy  and  romance.  Some 
attention  to  Shakespeare's  life  and  times,  but  primary  focus  on  the  work 
itself. 

31  MODERN  FICTION 

Study  of  the  techniques,  development  and  major  tendencies  of  modern 
fiction  from  the  last  quarter  of  the  19th  Century  to  the  1950's.  Primary 
attention  to  representative  works  of  such  major  writers  as  James,  Conrad, 
Joyce,  Lawrence,  Hemingway  and  Faulkner. 

32  MODERN  POETRY 

Introduction  to  the  themes  and  structures  of  20th  Century  poetry.  Begin- 
ning with  Pound,  Eliot  and  Yeats,  and  moving  through  the  century  to  the 
most  recent  accomplishments  of  contemporary  poets.  Alternate  years. 

33  WOMEN  AND  LITERATURE 

Study  of  women  writers  alternating  with  study  of  the  image  of  women  in 
literature  written  by  men  and  women.  Possible  focuses:  major  women 

77 


writers  of  19th  and  20th  Century  British  and  American  literature;  contem- 
porary women  writers,  traditional  images  of  women  in  literature.  Alternate 
years. 

34  FILM  AND  LITERATURE 

Analysis  of  the  techniques  of  two  different  forms  of  communication — 
cinema  and  novel  or  play — by  comparing  the  same  story  in  both  mediums. 
Attention  to  both  "classic"  and  modern  films  and  literature.  Alternate  years. 

35  FICTION  WRITING 

Beginning  course  in  the  writing  of  short  fiction. Some  study  of  the  sources 
and  techniques  of  modern  and  contemporary  writers,  but  chief  focus  on 
student  writing.  Alternate  years. 

36  POETRY  WRITING 

A  first  course  in  poetry  writing.  Attention  to  the  "closed"  and  "open" 
formal  traditions  of  current  poetry.  In-class  emphasis  on  student  writing. 

Alternate  years. 

37  PUBLIC  RELATIONS  AND  PUBLICITY  WRITING 

Communication  and  publicity  techniques  in  the  field  of  public  relations 
focused  on  writing  for  the  media;  some  attention  to  speeches,  letters  and 
house  organs.  Prerequisite:  English  23  or  English  24  or  consent  of  instructor. 
Alternate  years. 

38  STRUCTURE  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE  ENGLISH  LANGUAGE 

Study  of  the  historical  origins  of  the  language  and  a  modern  language 
theory.  Alternate  years. 

40  THE  HERO  IN  MEDIEVAL  LITERATURE 

Study  of  the  literature  of  the  period  as  it  reveals  a  transition  from  the 
concept  of  the  epic  hero  to  that  of  the  chivalric  hero,  with  the  attendant 
shifts  in  literary  forms,  in  codes  for  heroic  behavior  and  in  philosophic 
world  view.  Prerequisite:  English  14  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

41  ROMANCE  AND  EPIC  IN  THE  RENAISSANCE 

Study  of  major  writers  from  Malory  to  Milton.  Emphasis  on  such  works  as 
Le  Morte  D' Arthur,  Don  Quixote,  The  Faerie  Queene  and  Paradise  Lost,  with 
other  selected  prose  and  dramatic  works.  Prerequisite:  English  14  or  consent  of 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

42  POETRY  OF  THE  ROMANTIC  PERIOD 

Study  of  the  literary,  philosophical  and  historical  significance  of  the 
Romantic  Movement.  Emphasis  on  the  poetry  of  Blake,  Wordsworth, 
Coleridge,  Byron,  Shelley  and  Keats.  Prerequisite:  English  14  or  consent  of 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

78 


43  DICKENS  AND  THE  VICTORIAN  NOVEL 

Comparison  and  contrast  of  four  or  five  of  Dickens'  novels  with  other 
novels  from  the  1830's  through  the  1870's  by  such  authors  as  Thackeray,  the 
Brontes,  Meredith,  Trollope  and  Hardy.  Alternate  years. 

44  THE  IRISH  RENAISSANCE 

Analysis  of  the  sudden  flowering  of  Irish  literature  in  the  early  years  of  the 
20th  Century  as  witnessed  in  the  works  of  Yeats,  Joyce,  Synge,  O'Casey 
and  others.  Prerequisite:  English  15  or  17  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

45  AMERICAN  DRAMA  FROM  O'NEILL  TO  MILLER 

Study  of  the  development  of  the  first  significant  American  drama  in  the 
decades  following  World  War  I,  especially  the  experimental  drama  of  the 
1920's  and  the  social  drama  of  the  1930's.  O'Neill,  Anderson,  Rice, 
Behrman,  Saroyan,  Wilder,  Odets,  Hellman  and  others.  Prerequisite:  English 
17  or  21  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

46  THE  AMERICAN  RENAISSANCE 

Concentrated  study  of  the  American  poets  and  novelists  who  revolu- 
tionized literary  form  and  idea  at  the  middle  of  the  19th  Century.  One  or 
two  writers  from  each  of  the  following  two  groups:  Emerson,  Thoreau  and 
Whitman;  Poe,  Hawthorne  and  Melville.  Prerequisite:  English  16  or  consent  of 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

47  AMERICAN  NOVELISTS  AND  POETS  OF  THE  JAZZ  AGE  AND 
DEPRESSION 

Concentrated  study  of  two  or  three  major  writers  in  the  social  context  of 
this  period  in  modern  American  literature.  Such  combinations  as 
Hemingway/Fitzgerald/Eliot  and  Faulkner/Frost  are  likely.  Prerequisite:  Eng- 
lish 17  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

48  CONTEMPORARY  LITERATURE 

Consideration  of  representative  British,  American  and  some  continental 
works,  primarily  fiction,  written  after  World  War  II  by  such  writers  as 
Barth,  Bellow,  Updike,  Burgess,  Murdoch,  Fowles  and  Nabokov.  Alter- 
nate years. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Interns  typically  work  off  campus  in  a  profession  related  to  their  career 
interest  such  as  law,  public  relations,  journalism  and  others. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Recent  studies  include  Chaucer,  D.  H.  Lawrence,  The  Creative  Process  in 
Literature  and  Art,  the  Arthurian  Legend  and  Existentialism  in  Literature. 

90-99    INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 

Recent  projects  were  Communication  Models  and  the  Feedback  Principle, 
and  Images  of  Women  in  the  1890's. 

79 


FOREIGN  LANGUAGES  AND  LITERATURES 

Associate  Professor:  Flam,  Maples,  MacKenzie  (Chairman) 
Part-time  Instructor:  Wentzler 

Study  of  foreign  languages  and  literatures  offers  opportunity  to  explore  broadly 
the  varieties  of  human  experience  and  thought.  It  contributes  both  to  personal 
and  to  international  understanding  by  providing  competence  in  a  foreign 
language  and  a  critical  acquaintance  with  the  literature  and  culture  of  foreign 
peoples.  A  major  can  serve  as  entree  to  careers  in  business,  industry,  govern- 
ment, publishing,  education,  journalism,  social  agencies,  translating  and  writ- 
ing. It  prepares  for  graduate  work  in  literature  or  linguistics  and  the  interna- 
tional fields  of  politics,  commerce,  law,  health  and  area  studies. 

French,  German  and  Spanish  are  offered  as  major  fields  of  study.  The  major 
consists  of  at  least  eight  courses  numbered  10  or  above.  Majors  seeking  teacher 
certification  and  students  planning  to  enter  graduate  school  are  advised  to  begin 
study  of  a  second  foreign  language.  The  department  encourages  the  develop- 
ment in  breadth  of  programs,  including  allied  courses  from  related  fields  or  a 
second  major,  and  also  individual  or  established  interdisciplinary  majors 
combining  interest  in  several  literatures  or  area  or  cross-cultural  studies.  For 
example:  International  Studies,  20th  Century  Studies,  the  Major  in  Literature. 
Majors,  teacher  certification  candidates  and  all  college  students  are  encouraged 
to  spend  at  least  a  semester  of  study  abroad  by  applying  to  one  of  the  many 
programs  available.  The  department  maintains  a  file  of  such  programs. 

Courses  taught  in  English:  Foreign  Languages  and  Literature  25,  French  28 
and  Spanish  28. 

FOREIGN  LANGUAGES  AND  LITERATURES 

25     CONTINENTAL  LITERATURE 

A  study  of  such  major  continental  authors  as  Cervantes,  Dostoevsky, 
Chekhov,  Dante,  Ibsen,  Proust,  Gide,  Kafka,  Hesse,  Goethe,  Sartre, 
Camus,  Brecht  and  Ionesco.  Works  read  in  English  translation  will  vary  and 
be  organized  around  a  different  theme  or  topic;  recent  topics  have  been 
existentialism,  modernism  and  drama.  Prerequisite:  None.  May  be  repeated  for 
credit  with  consent  of  instructor.  May  be  accepted  toward  the  English  major  with 
consent  of  the  Department  of  English. 

38    FOREIGN  LANGUAGE:  SYSTEMS  AND  PROCESS 

Study  of  basic  linguistic  concepts  as  a  tool  for  language  learning  and 
teaching.  Discussion  and  application  of  language  teaching  techniques, 
including  work  in  the  language  laboratory.  Designed  for  future  teachers  of 
one  or  more  languages  and  normally  taken  in  the  junior  year.  Students 
should  arrange  through  the  Department  of  Education  to  fulfill  in  the  same 
semester  the  requirements  of  a  participation  experience  in  area  schools. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor. 

FRENCH 

A  major  consists  of  at  least  eight  courses  numbered  10  or  above,  including  at 
least  one  numbered  40  or  above.  Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures  25  and  38 
may  be  included  in  the  major. 

All  majors  who  wish  to  be  certified  for  teaching  must  pass  cousrses  23,  31, 
Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures  38  and  at  least  two  courses  numbered  40  or 

80 


above.  A  language  proficiency  test  is  required  of  these  students  during  their 
senior  year. 

1-2     ELEMENTARY 

The  aim  of  the  course  is  to  acquire  the  fundamentals  of  the  language  with 
a  view  to  using  them.  Regular  practice  in  speaking,  understanding  and 
reading. 

10-11     INTERMEDIATE 

Review  and  development  of  the  fundamentals  of  the  language  for  im- 
mediate use  in  speaking,  understanding  and  reading  with  a  view  to 
building  confidence  in  self-expression.  Prerequisite:  French  2  or  equivalent. 

20     CONVERSATION 

Designed  to  develop  conversational  fluency  and  comprehension  through 
small  group  discussions  focusing  on  topics  from  readings  in  modern  French 
culture,  such  as  French  social  attitudes  and  French-American  cultural 
differences.  Some  attention  to  grammar  and  writing.  Prerequisite:  French  11 
or  equivalent. 

23     INTRODUCTION  TO  LITERARY  STUDIES 

Studies  in  French  literature,  with  emphasis  on  critical  reading  and  in- 
terpretation. Discussions,  lectures,  oral  exposes,  papers.  Prerequisite:  French 
20  or  equivalent. 

i 

28   'MODERN  FRANCE 

A  course  designed  to  familiarize  students  with  political  and  social  structures 
and  cultural  attitudes  in  contemporary  French  society.  Materials  studied 
may  include  such  documents  as  newspaper  articles,  interviews  and  soci- 
ological surveys,  and  readings  in  history,  religion,  anthropology  and  the 
arts.  Some  attention  to  the  changing  education  system  and  the  family  and 
to  events  and  ideas  which  have  shaped  French  society.  May  include  some 
comparative  study  of  France  and  the  United  States. 

English  Section:  Not  applicable  toward  satisfying  the  foreign  language 
distribution  requirement.  Prerequisite:  none. 

French  Section:  Offers  readings,  papers  and  interviews  in  French  for 
students  with  sufficient  language  skill.  Can  be  applied  toward  the  foreign 
language  distribution  requirement.  Prerequisite:  French  10  or  equivalent  com- 
petency as  determined  by  the  department. 

31     FRENCH  GRAMMATICAL  STRUCTURE 

Study  of  phonetics  and  grammatical  rules  and  their  practical  application  in 
speaking  and  writing.  Recommended  for  all  majors. 

41     FRENCH  LITERATURE  OF  THE  MIDDLE  AGES  AND  THE  RENAIS- 
SANCE 

A  study  of  selected  works  from  La  Chanson  de  Roland  to  Montaigne. 
Prerequisite:  French  23  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

81 


43     FRENCH  LITERATURE  OF  THE  17TH  CENTURY 

A  study  of  major  texts  of  the  period:  preciosite,  the  origins  and  theories  of 
French  classicism,  Corneille,  Pascal,  Descartes.  Classical  tragedy  and  com- 
edy: Racine,  Moliere,  LaFontaine,  Mme.  de  La  Fayette,  La  Bruyere.  Prere- 
quisite: French  23  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

45     FRENCH  LITERATURE  OF  THE  18TH  CENTURY 

The  literary  expression  of  ideas:  Montesquieu,  Voltaire,  Rousseau  and  the 
Encyclopedists.  Prerequisite:  French  23  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

47  FRENCH  LITERATURE  OF  THE  19TH  CENTURY 

The  dimensions  of  the  Romantic  sensibility:  Musset,  Hugo,  Vigny,  Balzac, 
Stendhal.  Realism  and  Naturalism  in  the  novels  of  Flaubert  and  Zola. 
Reaction  in  the  poetry  of  Baudelaire,  Rimbaud,  Verlaine  and  Mallarme. 

Prerequisite:  French  23  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

48  MODERN  FRENCH  THEATRE 

Major  trends  in  French  drama  from  the  turn  of  the  century  to  Existentialism 
and  the  Theatre  of  the  Absurd,  Giraudoux,  Anouilh,  Sartre,  Camus, 
Beckett,  Ionesco,  Genet,  Adamov  and  others.  Prerequisite:  French  23  or 
consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

49  FRENCH  LITERATURE  OF  THE  20TH  CENTURY 

Representative  poets  and  novelists  of  modern  France.  Readings  selected 
from  the  works  of  authors  such  as  Proust,  Gide,  Aragon,  Giono,  Mauriac, 
Celine,  Malraux,  Saint-Exupery,  Camus,  the  "new  novelists"  (Robbe- 
Grillet,  Butor,  Sarraute,  Le  Clezio),  and  the  poetry  of  Apollinaire,  Valery, 
the  Surrealists  (Breton,  Reverdy,  Eluard,  Char),  Saint-John  Perse,  Super- 
vielle,  Prevert  and  others.  Some  attention  to  works  of  French-speaking 
African  writers.  Prerequisite:  French  23  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Examples  of  recent  studies  in  French  include  translation,  existentialism,  the 
classical  period,  enlightenment  literature  and  Saint-Exupery. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 


82 


GERMAN 

A  major  consists  of  eight  courses  numbered  10  or  above.  Foreign  Languages  and 
Literatures  38  and  one  unit  of  Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures  25  may  be 
included  in  the  major. 

All  majors  who  wish  to  be  certified  for  teaching  must  pass  courses  31,  33,  34 
and  Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures  38.  A  language  proficiency  test  is 
required  of  these  students  during  their  senior  year. 

1-2     ELEMENTARY 

Aim  of  course  is  to  acquire  the  fundamentals  of  the  language  with  a  view  to 
using  them.  Regular  practice  in  speaking,  understanding  and  reading. 

10-11     INTERMEDIATE 

Review  and  development  of  fundamentals  of  the  language  for  immediate 
use  in  speaking,  understanding  and  reading  with  a  view  to  building 
confidence  in  self-expression.  Prerequisite:  German  2  or  equivalent. 

20     CONVERSATION 

Designed  to  develop  aural  comprehension  and  conversational  fluency. 
Readings  and  discussions  on  topics  of  contemporary  society  in  Germany, 
Switzerland  and  Austria.  Some  attention  to  grammar  and  writing.  Prere- 
quisite: German  11  or  equivalent. 

31     GERMAN  GRAMMATICAL  STRUCTURE 

Study  of  intonation,  complex  grammatical  rules  and  their  practical  appli- 
tion,  stylistics  and  a  brief  survey  of  the  development  of  the  language. 

Recommended  for  all  majors. 

33  SURVEY  OF  GERMAN  LITERATURE  AND  CIVILIZATION  I 

Designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  important  periods  of  German 
literature,  representative  authors  and  major  cultural  developments  in 
Germany,  Austria  and  Switzerland.  The  course  deals  with  literature  from 
the  Early  Middle  Ages  through  the  18th  Century.  Prerequisite:  German  20  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

34  SURVEY  OF  GERMAN  LITERATURE  AND  CIVILIZATION  II 

Designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  important  periods  of  German 
literature,  representative  authors  and  major  cultural  developments  in 
Germany,  Austria  and  Switzerland.  The  course  deals  with  the  literature 
from  the  19th  Century  to  the  present.  Prerequisite:  German  20  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

40    GOETHE 

A  study  of  the  life  and  works  of  Goethe.  Goethe's  significance  in  the 
Classical  period  and  later.  Readings  in  the  major  works.  Prerequisite:  German 
33  or  34  or  consent  of  instructor. 

83 


41  CLASSICAL  GERMAN  DRAMA 

The  development  of  das  klassische  Drama  with  emphasis  on  works  of 
Lessing,  Goethe  and  Schiller.  Prerequisite:  German  20. 

42  MODERN  GERMAN  DRAMA 

The  emergency  of  modern  drama  commencing  with  Buchner  and  leading  to 
Brecht.  Prerequisite:  German  20. 

43  THE  NOVELLE 

The  German  Novelle  as  a  genre  relating  to  various  literary  periods. 
Prerequisite:  German  20. 

45     GERMAN  POETRY 

A  study  of  selected  poets  or  the  poetry  of  various  literary  periods. 
Prerequisite:  German  33  or  34  or  consertt  of  instructor. 

47     MODERN  GERMAN  LITERATURE 

A  study  of  the  major  movements  and  writers  from  Naturalism,  Ex- 
pressionism and  the  postwar  period.  Hauptmann,  Rilke,  Mann,  Hesse, 
Kaiser  and  others.  Prerequisite:  German  33  or  34  or  consent  of  iristructor. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Examples  of  recent  studies  in  German  include  Classicism,  Germanic 
Mythology,  Hermann  Hesse,  the  dramas  of  Frisch  and  Durrenmatt. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 
84 


GREEK 

Greek  is  not  offered  as  a  major. 

1-2    NEW  TESTAMENT  GRAMMAR  AND  READINGS 

Fundamentals  of  New  Testament  Greek  grammar  and  readings  of  selected 
passages  of  the  Greek  text.  Alternate  years. 

11  READINGS  IN  THE  SYNOPTIC  GOSPELS 

A  comparative  study  of  the  Synoptic  tradition  in  Greek.  Prerequisite:  Greek  2 
or  equivalent.  Alternate  years. 

12  READINGS  IN  THE  PAULINE  EPISTLES 

Selected  readings  from  the  letters  of  Paul  in  Greek.  Prerequisite:  Greek  11  or 
equivalent.  Alternate  years. 

HEBREW 

Hebrew  is  not  offered  as  a  major. 

1-2     OLD  TESTAMENT  GRAMMAR  AND  READINGS 

Fundamentals  of  Old  Testament  Hebrew  grammar  and  readings  of  selected 
passages  of  the  Hebrew  text.  Alternate  years. 

11-12     INTERMEDIATE  OLD  TESTAMENT  HEBREW 

A  critical  reading  of  the  Hebrew  text  with  special  attention  being  given  to 
exegetical  questions.  The  text  read  varies  from  year  to  year.  Prerequisite: 
Hebrew  2  or  equivalent.  Alternate  years. 

SPANISH 

A  major  consists  of  eight  courses  numbered  10  or  above,  including  at  least  one 
numbered  40  or  above.  Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures  38  may  be  included. 
Normally,  Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures  25  does  not  count  toward  the 
major. 

All  majors  who  wish  to  be  certified  for  teaching  must  pass  Foreign 
Languages  and  Literatures  38,  Spanish  31  and  one  from  33,  34  or  35.  A  language 
proficiency  test  is  required  of  these  students  during  their  senior  year. 

1-2     ELEMENTARY 

Aim  of  course  is  to  acquire  the  fundamentals  of  the  language  with  a  view  to 
using  them.  Regular  practice  in  speaking,  understanding  and  reading. 

10-11     INTERMEDIATE 

Review  and  development  of  fundamentals  of  the  language  for  immediate 
use  in  speaking,  understanding  and  reading  with  a  view  to  building 
confidence  in  self-expression.  Prerequisite:  Spanish  2  or  equivalent. 

20     ADVANCED 

The  purpose  of  this  course  is  to  improve  the  student's  ability  in  spontane- 
ous conversations,  focusing  on  everyday  activities  and  matters  of  current 

85 


concern  as  suggested  in  readings  from  Latin  American  and  peninsular 
sources.  Vocabulary  building  is  stressed.  Prerequisite:  Spanish  11  or 
equivalent. 

28     CONTEMPORARY  HISPANIC  LIFE 

To  introduce  students  to  the  Spanish  people — their  values,  customs  and 
institutions,  with  reference  to  the  major  socio-economic,  political  and 
artistic  forces  governing  present-day  Spain.  Readings  will  include  selections 
from  periodical  literature  as  well  as  historical  and  literary  texts.  Lectures  in 
English. 

English  Section:  Not  applicable  toward  satisfying  the  foreign  language 
distribution  requirement.  Prerequisite:  none. 

Spanish  Section:  Students  with  sufficient  language  skill  wishing  to  take 
this  course  for  credit  towards  the  foreign  language  distribution  requirement 
will  be  given  special  readings  and  other  assignments  in  Spanish.  Prere- 
quisite: Spanish  11  or  equivalent  competency  as  determined  by  the  department. 

31     SPANISH  GRAMMATICAL  STRUCTURE 

Study  of  intonation,  complex  grammatical  rules  and  their  practical  applica- 
tion, and  a  brief  survey  of  the  development  of  the  language.  Recommended 
for  all  majors. 

33  SURVEY  OF  SPANISH  LITERATURE  AND  CIVILIZATION  I 

Designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  important  periods  of  Spanish 
literature,  representative  authors  and  major  socio-economic  developments. 
The  course  deals  with  the  literature  from  the  beginning  through  the  17th 
Century.  Open  to  students  majoring  in  other  departments  after  consultation  with 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

34  SURVEY  OF  SPANISH  LITERATURE  AND  CIVILIZATION  II 

Designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  important  periods  of  Spanish 
literature,  representative  authors  and  major  socio-economic  developments. 
The  course  deals  with  the  literature  from  the  18th  Century  to  the  present. 
Open  to  students  majoring  in  other  departments  after  consultation  with  the 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

35  SURVEY  OF  SPANISH  AMERICAN  LITERATURE  AND  CIVILIZATION 

Designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  important  periods  of  Spanish- 
American  literature,  representative  authors  and  major  socio-economic 
developments.  The  course  deals  with  the  literature,  especially  the  essay  and 
poetry  from  16th  Century  to  present.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor. 
Alternate  years. 

44     SPANISH  LITERATURE  OF  THE  GOLDEN  AGE 

A  study  of  representative  works  and  principal  literary  figures  in  the  poetry, 
prose  and  drama  of  the  16th  and  17th  Centuries  from  Fernando  de  Rojas  to 
Calderon.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

86 


47  19TH  CENTURY  NOVEL 

Regionalism,  realism  and  naturalism  in  prose  fiction  with  emphasis  on  the 
works  of  Galdos.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

48  THE  GENERATION  OF  '98 

Principal  literary  figures  of  the  early  20th  Century:  Unamuno,  Azorin,  Valle 
Inclan,  Baroja,  Benavente,  Machado,  Jimenez,  etc.  Prerequisite:  consent  of 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

49  SPANISH  AMERICAN  NOVEL 

Twentieth  Century  novelists  from  Azuela  to  Garcia  Marquez.  Prerequisite: 
consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Recent  studies  include  literary,  linguistic  and  cultural  topics,  and  themes 
such  as  urban  problems  as  reflected  in  the  modern  novel. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 


87 


HISTORY 

Associate  Professor:  Larson,  Piper  (Chairman) 
Assistant  Professor:  Morris 

A  major  consists  of  10  courses,  including  10,  11  and  45.  At  least  seven  courses 
must  be  taken  in  the  department.  The  following  courses  may  be  counted  toward 
fulfilling  the  major  requirements:  American  Studies  10,  Political  Science  39, 
Religion  28  and  46.  Other  appropriate  courses  outside  the  department  may  be 
counted  upon  departmental  approval.  For  history  majors  who  student  teach  in 
history,  the  major  consists  of  nine  courses.  In  addition  to  the  courses  listed 
below,  special  courses,  independent  study  and  honors  are  available.  Special 
courses  recently  taught  and  anticipated  include  a  biographical  study  of  Europe- 
an Monarchs,  the  European  Left,  the  Industrialization  and  Urbanization  of 
Modern  Europe,  Utopian  Movements  in  America,  the  Peace  Movement  in 
America,  The  Vietnam  War  and  American  Legal  History.  History  majors  are 
encouraged  to  participate  in  the  internship  program. 

10  EUROPE  1500-1815 

An  examination  of  the  political,  social,  cultural  and  intellectual  history  of 
Europe  and  its  relations  with  other  areas  of  the  world  from  1500  to  1815. 

11  EUROPE  1815-Present 

An  examination  of  the  political,  social,  cultural  and  intellectual  history  of 
Europe  and  its  relations  with  other  areas  of  the  world  from  1815  to  the 
present. 

12  UNITED  STATES  HISTORY  1603-1877 

A  study  of  the  men,  measures  and  movements  which  have  been  significant 
in  the  development  of  the  United  States  between  1603  and  1877.  Attention 
is  paid  to  the  problems  of  minority  groups  as  well  as  to  majority  and 
national  influences. 

13  UNITED  STATES  HISTORY  1877-present 

A  study  of  the  men,  measures  and  movements  which  have  been  significant 
in  the  development  of  the  United  States  since  1877.  Attention  is  paid  to  the 
problems  of  minority  groups  as  well  as  to  majority  and  national  influences. 

20    ANCIENT  HISTORY 

A  study  of  the  ancient  western  world,  including  the  foundations  of  the 
western  tradition  in  Greece,  the  emergence  and  expansion  of  the  Roman 
state,  its  experience  as  a  republic  and  its  transformation  into  the  Empire. 
The  course  will  focus  on  the  social  and  intellectual  life  of  Greece  and  Rome 
as  well  as  political  and  economic  changes.  Alternate  years. 

22     MEDIEVAL  EUROPE  AND  ITS  NEIGHBORS 

The  history  of  Europe  from  the  dissolution  of  the  Roman  Empire  to  the  mid- 
15th  Century.  The  course  will  deal  with  the  growing  estrangement  of 
western  Catholic  Europe  from  the  Byzantium  and  Islam,  culminating  in  the 
Crusades;  the  rise  of  the  Islamic  Empire  and  its  later  fragmentation;  the 

88 


development  and  growth  of  feudalism;  the  conflict  of  empire  and  papacy, 
and  the  rise  of  towns.  Alternate  years. 

23  EUROPE  IN  THE  ERA  OF  THE  WORLD  WARS 

An  intensive  study  of  the  political  economic,  social  and  cultural  history  of 
Europe  from  1900-1945.  Topics  include  the  rise  of  irrationalism,  the  origins 
of  the  First  World  War,  the  Communist  and  Fascist  Revolutions  and  the 
attempts  to  preserve  peace  before  1939.  Prerequisite:  History  11  or  consent  of 
the  instructor. 

24  CONTEMPORARY  EUROPE 

An  intensive  study  of  the  political,  economic,  social  and  cultural  history  of 
Europe  since  1945.  Topics  include  the  post-war  economic  recovery  of 
Europe,  the  Sovietization  of  Eastern  Europe,  the  origins  of  the  Cold  War, 
decolonization  and  the  flowering  of  the  welfare  state.  Prerequisite:  History  11 
or  consent  of  instructor. 

25  FRENCH  REVOLUTION  AND  NAPOLEON 

An  analysis  of  the  political,  social  and  intellectual  background  of  the  French 
Revolution,  a  survey  of  the  course  of  revolutionary  development  and  an 
estimate  of  the  results  of  the  Napoleonic  conquests  and  administration. 

Prerequisite:  History  10  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

26  COLONIAL  AMERICA  AND  THE  REVOLUTIONARY  ERA 

The  establishment  of  British  settlements  on  the  American  continent,  their 
history  as  colonies,  the  causes  and  events  of  the  American  Revolution,  the 
critical  period  following  independence  and  proposal  and  adoption  of  the 
United  States  Constitution.  Alternate  years. 

27  20TH  CENTURY  UNITED  STATES 

This  course  begins  with  the  Progressive  Era  and  includes  the  political, 
economic  and  social  developments  in  the  20th  Century.  Emphasis  will  be 
placed  on  the  domestic  and  international  demands  which  have  faced  the 
United  States  in  the  period  following  World  War  II. 

28  AFRO-AMERICAN  HISTORY 

A  study  of  the  experiences  and  participation  of  Afro-Americans  in  the 
United  States.  The  course  includes  historical  experiences  such  as  slavery, 
abolition,  reconstruction  and  urbanization.  It  also  raises  the  issue  of  the 
development  and  growth  of  white  racism,  and  the  effect  of  this  racism  on 
contemporary  Afro-American  social,  intellectual  and  political  life.  Alternate 
years. 


29     LATIN  AMERICAN  HISTORY 

An  examination  of  the  native  civilization,  the  age  of  discovery  and  con- 
quest, Spanish  colonial  policy,  the  independence  movements  and  the 
development  of  modern  institutions  and  governments  in  Latin  America. 
Alternate  years. 

89 


33  CONFLICT  IN  WESTERN  CIVILIZATION 

An  in-depth  study  of  the  changing  nature  of  war  and  its  relationship  to  the 
development  of  Western  Civilization  since  the  end  of  the  Middle  Ages. 
Particular  emphasis  will  be  placed  on  the  role  of  war  in  the  development  of 
the  modern  nation  state  and  the  origins  and  nature  of  total  war.  Alternate 
years. 

34  DIPLOMATIC  HISTORY  OF  EUROPE  SINCE  1789 

A  survey  of  the  development  of  the  European  states  system  and  the 
relations  between  the  European  states  since  the  beginning  of  the  French 
Revolution.  Prerequisite:  History  11  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

35  THE  CRISIS  OF  LIBERALISM  AND  NATIONALISM,  EUROPE  1848-1870 

An  in-depth  investigation  of  the  crucial  "Middle  Years"  of  19th  Century 
Europe  from  the  revolutions  of  1848  through  the  unification  of  Germany. 
The  course  centers  on  the  struggles  for  power  within  the  major  states  of 
Europe  at  this  time  and  how  the  vehicle  of  nationalism  was  used  to  bring 
about  one  type  of  solution.  Alternate  years. 

37  AGE  OF  JEFFERSON  AND  JACKSON 

The  theme  of  the  course  is  the  emergence  of  the  political  and  social 
characteristics  that  shaped  modern  America.  The  personalities  of  Thomas 
Jefferson,  John  Marshall,  John  Randolph,  Aaron  Burr  and  Andrew  Jackson 
receive  special  attention.  Special  consideration  is  given  to  the  first  and 
second  party  systems,  the  decline  in  community  cohesiveness,  the  west- 
ward movement  and  the  growing  importance  of  the  family  as  a  unit  of  social 
organization.  Alternate  years. 

38  CIVIL  WAR  AND  RECONSTRUCTION 

The  problems  and  events  leading  to  war,  the  political  and  military  history  of 
the  war  and  the  bitter  aftermath  to  the  Compromise  of  1877. 

39  20TH  CENTURY  UNITED  STATES  RELIGION 

The  study  of  historical  and  cultural  developments  in  American  society 
which  relates  to  religion  or  what  is  commonly  called  religion.  This  involves 
consideration  of  the  institutional  and  intellectual  development  of  several 
faith  groups  as  well  as  discussion  of  certain  problems,  such  as  the 
persistence  of  religious  bigotry  and  the  changing  modes  of  church-state 
relationships.  Alternate  years. 

40  HISTORY  OF  RENAISSANCE  THOUGHT 

A  study  of  the  classical,  humanist  and  scholastic  elements  involved  in  the 
development  of  the  Renaissance  outlook  views  and  values,  both  in  Italy  and 
in  Northern  Europe.  The  various  combinations  of  social  and  political 
circumstances  which  constitute  the  historical  context  of  these  intellectual 
developments  will  be  noted.  Alternate  years. 

41  HISTORY  OF  REFORMATION  THOUGHT 

A  study  of  the  ideas  and  systems  of  ideas   propounded  prior  to  the 

90 


Reformation,  but  which  are  historically  related  to  its  inception  and  of  the 
ideas  and  systems  of  ideas  involved  in  the  formation  of  the  major  Reforma- 
tion, Protestant  traditions  and  in  the  Catholic  Reformation.  Included  are  the 
ideas  of  the  humanists  of  the  Reformation  Era.  Alternate  years. 

42  UNITED  STATES  SOCIAL  AND  INTELLECTUAL  HISTORY  TO  1877 

A  study  of  the  social  and  intellectual  experience  of  the  United  States  from 
its  colonial  antecedents  through  reconstruction.  Among  the  topics  con- 
sidered are  Puritanism,  transcendentalism,  community  life  and  organiza- 
tion, education  and  social  reform  movements.  Prerequisites:  two  courses  from 
History  12,  13,  28  or  consent  of  instructor. 

43  UNITED  STATES  SOCIAL  AND  INTELLECTUAL  HISTORY  SINCE  1877 

A  study  of  the  social  and  intellectual  experience  of  the  United  States  from 
reconstruction  to  the  present  day.  Among  the  topics  considered  are  social 
Darwinism,  pragmatism,  community  life  and  organization,  education  and 
social  reform  movements.  Prerequisites:  two  courses  from  History  12,  13,  28  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

45     HISTORICAL  METHODS 

This  course  focuses  on  the  nature  and  meaning  of  history.  It  will  open  to  the 
student  different  historical  approaches  and  will  provide  the  opportunity  to 
explore  these  approaches  in  terms  of  particular  topics  and  periods.  Majors 
are  required  to  enroll  in  this  course  in  either  their  junior  or  senior  year.  The 
course  is  open  to  other  students  who  have  two  courses  in  history  or  consent 
of  the  instructor. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Typically,  history  interns  work  for  local  government  agencies  engaged  in 
historical  projects  or  for  the  Lycoming  County  Historical  Museum. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Recent  topics  include  studies  of  the  immigration  of  American  blacks, 
political  dissension  in  the  Weimer  Republic,  Indian  relations  before  the 
American  Revolution  and  the  history  of  Lycoming  County. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 

Two  recent  projects  were  the  Germans  in  Pennsylvania  Politics,  1878-1938 
and  the  Reign  of  Tiglath  Pileser  I  (1116-1075B.C). 


91 


INTERNATIONAL  STUDIES 

Associate  Professor:  Larson  (Coordinator) 

The  major  in  International  Studies  is  designed  to  integrate  an  understanding  of 
the  changing  social,  political  and  historical  environment  of  Europe  today  with 
study  of  Europe  in  its  relations  to  the  rest  of  the  world,  particularly  the  United 
States.  It  stresses  the  international  relations  of  the  North  Atlantic  community 
and  offers  the  student  opportunity  to  emphasize  either  European  studies  or 
international  relations.  The  program  provides  multiple  perspectives  on  the 
cultural  traits  that  shape  popular  attitudes  and  institutions.  Study  of  a  single 
country  is  included  as  a  data-base  for  comparisons,  and  study  of  its  language  as 
a  basis  for  direct  communication  with  its  people. 

The  program  is  intended  to  prepare  a  student  either  for  graduate  study  or 
for  careers  which  have  an  international  component.  International  obligations  are 
increasingly  assumed  by  governmental  agencies  and  a  wide  range  of  business, 
social,  religious  and  educational  organizations.  Opportunities  are  found  in  the 
fields  of  journalism,  publishing,  communications,  trade,  banking,  advertising, 
management  and  tourism.  The  program  also  offers  flexible  career  preparation  in 
a  variety  of  essential  skills,  such  as  research,  data  analysis,  report  writing, 
language  skills  and  the  awareness  necessary  for  dealing  with  people  and 
institutions  of  another  culture.  Preparation  for  related  careers  can  be  obtained 
through  the  guided  selection  of  courses  outside  the  major  in  the  areas  of 
business,  economics,  foreign  languages  and  literatures,  government,  history 
and  international  relations  or  through  a  second  major.  Students  should  design 
their  programs  in  consultation  with  members  of  the  Committee  on  International 
Studies. 

By  completing  6-8  additional  courses  in  the  social  sciences  (which  include 
those  courses  needed  to  complete  a  major  in  economics,  history,  political  science 


92 


or  sociology/anthropology)  and  the  required  program  in  education,  students  can 
be  certified  for  the  teacher  education  program  in  social  studies.  By  completing  a 
major  in  the  foreign  language  (five  or  more  courses)  and  the  education  program, 
students  can  be  certified  to  teach  that  language.  The  International  Studies 
program  also  encourages  participation  in  study  abroad  programs,  as  well  as  the 
Washington  and  United  Nations  semesters. 

The  major  includes  eleven  courses  selected  as  follows: 
International  Relations  Courses — Four  or  two  courses  (if  two,  then  four  must  be 
taken  from  Area  Courses).  Courses  within  this  group  are  designed  to  provide  a 
basic  understanding  of  the  international  system  and  of  Europe's  relations  with 
the  rest  of  the  world.  Political  Science  25  is  required. 

Political  Science  25:  World  Politics 

Economics  43:  International  Trade 

History  34:  European  Diplomatic  History 

Political  Science  39:  American  Foreign  Policy 

Area  Courses — Four  or  two  courses  (if  two,  then  four  must  be  taken  from 
International  Relations  Courses).  Courses  within  this  group  are  designed  to 
provide  a  basic  understanding  of  the  European  political,  social  and  economic 
environment.  History  11  and  Economics  22  are  required. 

History  11:  Europe  1815-Present 

Economics  22:  Economic  Systems  of  the  West 

Political  Science  20:  European  Politics 

History  23:  Europe  in  the  Era  of  the  World  Wars 

History  24:  Contemporary  Europe 

National  Courses 

Language — Two  courses  in  one  language. 

French  20,  plus  one  course  numbered  23  or  above  (except  28) 
German  20,  plus  one  course  numbered  31  or  above 
Spanish  20,  plus  one  course  numbered  31  or  above 

Country — One  course.  The  student  must  select,  according  to  his  or  her 
language  preparation,  one  European  country  which  will  serve  as  a  special 
interest  area  throughout  the  program.  The  country  selected  will  serve  as  the 
base  for  individual  projects  in  the  major  courses  wherever  possible. 

France — French  28:  Modern  France 

Germany — History  80:  Topics  in  German  History 

Spain — Spanish  28:  Contemporary  Hispanic  Life 

Elective  Course — One  course  which  should  involve  further  study  of  some  aspect 
of  the  program.  Appropriate  courses  are  any  area  or  international  relations 
courses  not  yet  taken,  History  10,  32,  33;  Economics  23,  45;  Political  Science  26, 
27,  38,  46;  related  foreign  literature  courses  counting  toward  the  fine  arts 
requirement  and  internships. 

49     SENIOR  SEMINAR 

A  one  semester  seminar,  taken  in  the  senior  year,  in  which  students  and 
several  faculty  members  will  pursue  an  integrative  topic  in  the  field  of 
international  studies.  Students  will  work  to  some  extent  independently. 
Guest  speakers  will  be  invited.  The  seminar  will  be  open  to  qualified 
persons  from  outside  the  major  and  the  college.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  the 
instructor. 

93 


LITERATURE 

Associate  Professor:  Maples  (Coordinator) 

This  major  recognizes  literature  as  a  distinct  discipline  beyond  national  bound- 
aries and  combines  the  study  of  any  two  literatures  in  the  areas  of  English, 
French,  German  and  Spanish.  Students  can  thus  explore  two  literatures  widely 
and  intensively  at  the  upper  levels  of  course  offerings  within  each  of  the 
respective  departments  while  developing  and  applying  skills  in  foreign  lan- 
guages. The  major  prepares  students  for  graduate  study  in  either  of  the  two 
literatures  studies  or  in  comparative  literature. 

The  major  requires  at  least  six  literature  courses,  equally  divided  between 
the  two  literatures  concerned.  The  six  must  be  at  the  advanced  level  as 
determined  in  consultation  with  advisors  (normally  courses  numbered  20  and 
above  in  English  and  40  and  above  in  foreign  languages).  In  general,  two  of  the 
advanced  courses  in  each  literature  should  be  period  courses.  The  third  course, 
taken  either  as  a  regular  course  or  as  independent  study,  may  have  as  its  subject 
another  period,  a  particular  author,  genre  or  literary  theme,  or  some  other 
unifying  approach  or  idea.  Beyond  these  six,  the  major  must  include  at  least  two 
additional  courses  from  among  those  counting  toward  a  major  in  the  depart- 
ments involved.  Any  prerequisite  courses  in  the  respective  departments  (for 
example:  English  U,  15,  16,  17,  French  23,  German  33,  34)  should  be  taken 
during  the  freshman  and  sophomore  years.  Students  should  design  their 
programs  in  consultation  with  a  faculty  member  from  each  of  the  literatures 
concerned.  Programs  for  the  major  must  be  approved  by  the  departments 
involved. 


94 


MASS  COMMUNICATIONS 

Associate  Professor:  Madden  (Coordinator) 

The  major  in  Mass  Communications  offers  a  liberal  arts  background  and  a 
professional  sequence  through  a  combination  of  courses  from  the  Departments 
of  Art,  Business  Administration,  English,  Political  Science,  Sociology-An- 
thropology and  the  broadcasting  and  graphic  arts  departments  of  the  Williams- 
port  Area  Community  College.  The  program  assures  a  broadly  based  academic 
foundation  with  special  competency  in  a  selected  concentration,  plus  career 
orientation  in  a  specific  area. 
Students  must: 

1.  Successfully  complete  one  of  the  following  sequences: 

Advertising 

Advertising  Design-Photography 

Broadcast  Journalism 

Newspaper 

Public  Relations 

2.  Take  a  concentration  of  at  least  four  courses  related  to  the  student's 
program  in  a  single  department  of  the  college  in  consultation  with  the 
chairman  of  that  department  and  with  the  approval  of  the  mass  communica- 
tions coordinator. 

3.  Successully  complete  an  internship  or  independent  study  related  to  the 
sequence  chosen. 

Advertising  Sequence: 

Comm.  10  Introduction  to  Mass  Communications 

Bus.  28-29  Marketing  Management 

Bus.  32  Advertising 

Bus.  47  Creative  Advertising 

P.S.  48  Public  Opinion  and  Polling  or 

Soc.  47  Research  Methods 

GCO  511  Layout  and  Design 

GCO  512  Typographic  Composition 

Choose  two  courses  from  the  following  with  consent  of  advisor: 

Art  11,  Art  27,  Eng.  18  or  22,  Eng.  35  or  Eng.  36,  Eng.  34  or  Theatre  11. 

Advertising  Design-Photography  Sequence: 

Comm.  10  Introduction  to  Mass  Communications 

Art  11  Drawing 

Art  15  Two-dimensional  Design 

Art  12  Color  Theory 

Art  27  Photography 

Bus.  32  Advertising  Principles 

GCO  511  Layout  and  Design 

GCO  512  Typographic  Composition 

GCO  521  Process  Camera 

Choose  two  courses  from  the  following  with  consent  of  advisor: 

Art  18,  Art  37,  Art  21,  Bus.  47,  Eng.  35  or  Eng.  36,  Eng.  34  or  Theatre  11. 

Broadcast  Journalism  Sequence: 

Comm.  10  Introduction  to  Mass  Communications 

Eng.  24  News  Writing  for  Radio  and  TV 

95 


P.S.  34  Political  News  Writing 

P.S.  48  Public  Opinion  and  Polling 

Thea.  1  Principles  of  Oral  Communication 

BRC  242  Station  Management  and  Community  Responsibility 

BRC  112  Basic  Electronics  and  FCC  Licensing 

Choose  two  courses  from  the  following  with  consent  of  advisor: 
Art  27,  P.S.  11,  P.S.  32,  Psych.  24,  Soc.  34,  Eng.  34  or  Theatre  11. 

Newspaper  Sequence: 

Comm.  10  Introduction  to  Mass  Communications 

Eng.  23  News  Writing  for  the  Print  Media 

P.S.  34  Political  News  Writing 

P.S.  11  State  and  Local  Government 

P.S.  48  Public  Opinion  and  Polling 

Art  27  Photography 

GCO  512  Typographic  Composition 

Choose  two  courses  from  the  following  with  consent  of  advisor: 

Art  37,  Eng.  18  or  Eng.  22,  Eng.  24,  P.S.  32,  Psych.  24,  Soc.  34,  Eng.  34 

or  Theatre  11. 

Public  Relations  Sequence: 

Comm.  10  Introduction  to  Mass  Communications 

Eng.  23  News  Writing  for  the  Print  Media 

Eng.  37  Public  Relations  and  Publicity 

Bus.  28-29  Marketing  Management 

P.S.  48  Public  Opinion  and  Polling  or 

Soc.  47  Research  Methods 

Art  27  Photography 

Choose  two  courses  from  the  following  with  consent  of  advisor: 

Art  37,  Bus.  32,  Eng.  18  or  Eng.  22,  Eng.  24,  Psych.  24,  Eng.  34  or  Theatre  11. 

10     INTRODUCTION  TO  MASS  COMMUNICATIONS 

Part  1:  Theories  of  the  process  of  mass  communications  and  introduction  to 
the  mass  media;  attention  will  be  given  to  problems  of  censorship  and 
media  ethics.  Part  2:  Analysis  of  the  mass  media's  impact  on  society; 
emphasis  will  be  placed  on  the  social,  psychological  and  political  implica- 
tions of  the  media's  shaping  influence  on  man  and  institutions. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Interns  usually  work  off  campus  in  a  field  related  to  their  communications 
sequence;  some  may  work  with  the  student  newspaper  or  radio  station. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Studies  involve  research  related  to  the  communications  sequence  of  the 
student. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 

Through  special  arrangement,  the  following  courses  offered  at  the  Williamsport 
Area  Community  College  are  available  to  students  in  the  Mass  Communications 
major  only.  The  WACC  courses  are  taken  as  part  of  the  student's  semester 
schedule  and  are  listed  with  Lycoming  offerings  during  registration  periods. 

96 


I »"■  ■ 

:■!■■ 


linn 

ii^     ■iiiii  mBii 


1  ■      *4 


GRAPHIC  ARTS 

511  LAYOUT  AND  DESIGN 

Analysis  of  materials,  tools  and  techniques  used  in  preparation  of  copy  for 
reproduction;  paste-up  and  color  separation  overlays.  4  Cr. 

512  TYPOGRAPHIC  COMPOSITION 

Fundamentals  of  typesetting.  Theory  and  practice  in  the  care  and  use  of 
composing  machines,  both  hot  and  cold  (mechanical)  and  cold  (photo). 
4  Cr. 

521     PROCESS  CAMERA 

Concepts  and  techniques  of  darkroom  procedure  for  reproduction  of  line 
and  halftone  copy  on  process  camera.  4  Cr. 

BROADCASTING 

112     BASIC  ELECTRONICS  AND  FCC  LICENSING 

Fundamental  mechanics  of  operation  of  tape  recorders,  turntables, 
network  facilities  and  multispeaker  systems;  mechanics  necessary  to 
obtain  FCC  licensing;  field  visits  to  at  least  five  different  stations.  3  Cr. 

242     STATION  MANAGEMENT  AND  COMMUNITY  RESPONSIBILITY 

Study  of  problems  related  to  serving  community  needs  while  making  a 
profit;  ratio  of  advertising  to  program  time;  character  of  station;  meeting 
community  responsibility  through  community  interest  programs;  respon- 
sible use  of  editorial  privilege.  3  Cr. 

97 


MATHEMATICAL  SCIENCES 

Associate  Professor:  Getchell,  Haley,  J.  Hubbard  (Chairman) 

Assistant  Professor:  Henninger 

Instructor:  Troxel 

Part-time  Instructor:  Murphy 

Visiting  Instructor:  A.  Hubbard 

The  Department  of  Mathematical  Sciences  offers  major  programs  in 
mathematics  and  in  computer  science. 

MATHEMATICS 

A  major  in  mathematics  consists  of  10  units  of  mathematics  courses  numbered 
10  or  above:  Mathematics  18,  19,  20,  24,  34,  42  and  three  other  mathematics 
courses  numbered  20  or  above.  Students  seeking  secondary  certification  in 
mathematics  are  required  to  complete  Mathematics  30  and  36  and  are  advised  to 
enroll  in  Philosophy  17.  In  addition,  all  majors  are  advised  to  elect  Computer 
Science  15,  Philosophy  20  and  33  and  Astronomy/Physics  25  and  26. 

In  addition  to  the  regular  courses  listed  below,  special  courses  are  occasion- 
ally available  on  an  independent  study  basis.  Recent  topics  include  graph 
theory,  discrete  probability,  actuarial  mathematics,  theory  of  games  of  chance 
and  mathematics  physics. 

1  CONTINUOUS  MODELS 

A  survey  of  the  central  ideas  of  the  infinitesimal  calculus,  its  historical 
development  and  some  of  its  modern  applications.  Students  with  credit  for 
Mathematics  9  or  18  may  not  receive  credit  for  this  course.  One-half  unit  of  credit. 

2  COMPUTERS  IN  SOCIETY 

A  study  of  the  role  of  digital  computers  in  society  today  with  primary 
emphasis  on  what  can  be  done,  rather  than  how  to  do  it.  The  main  goal  of 
the  course  is  to  make  the  student  aware  of  the  growing  influence  which 
computers  are  likely  to  have  on  society  in  the  near  future.  Students  with 
credit  for  Mathematics  15  may  not  receive  credit  for  this  course.  One-half  unit  of 
a  edit. 

5     INDIVIDUALIZED  LABORATORY  INSTRUCTION  IN  BASIC  ALGEBRA 

A  self-paced  study  of  arithmetic  and  decimal  numerals,  fractions,  the  real 
number  line,  factoring,  solutions  to  linear  and  quadratic  equations,  graphs 
of  linear  and  quadratic  functions,  expressions  with  rational  exponents, 
algebraic  functions,  exponential  functions  and  inequalities.  THIS  COURSE 
IS  LIMITED  TO  STUDENTS  PLACED  THEREIN  BY  THE  MATHEMATICS 
DEPARTMENT.  One-half  unit  of  credit. 

7      MATHEMATICS  IN  ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION 

This  course  is  intended  for  prospective  elementary  school  teachers  and  is 
required  of  all  those  seeking  elementary  certification.  Topics  include  sys- 
tems of  numbers  and  of  numeration,  computational  algorithms,  environ- 
mental and  transformation  geometry  measurement  and  mathematical  con- 
cept formation.  Observation  and  participation  in  Greater  Williamsport 
elementary  schools.  Corequisite:  any  education  course  numbered  40  or  above 
which  is  specifically  required  for  elementary  certification  or  consent  of  instructor. 

98 


9     INTRODUCTION  TO  CALCULUS 

An  intuitive  approach  to  the  calculus  concepts  with  applications  to  busi- 
ness, biology  and  social  science  problems.  Not  open  to  students  who  have 
completed  Mathematics  18.  Prerequisite:  credit  for  or  exemption  from 
Mathematics  5.  Alternate  years. 

12  FINITE  MATHEMATICS  FOR  DECISION  MAKING 

An  introduction  to  some  of  the  principal  mathematical  models,  not  involv- 
ing calculus,  which  are  used  in  business  administration,  social  sciences  and 
operations  research.  The  course  will  include  both  deterministic  models  such 
as  graphs,  networks,  linear  programming  and  voting  models  and  probabi- 
listic models  such  as  Markov  chains  and  games.  Prerequisite:  credit  for  or 
exemption  from  Mathematics  5. 

13  INTRODUCTION  TO  STATISTICS 

Empirical  distributions  of  measurements,  probability  and  random  variables, 
discrete  and  continuous  probability  distributions,  statistical  inference  from 
small  samples,  linear  regression  and  correlation,  analysis  of  enumerative 
data.  Prerequisite:  credit  for  or  exemption  from  Mathematics  5. 

14  MULTIVARIATE  STATISTICS 

The  study  of  statistical  techniques  used  in  experimental  designs  involving 
more  than  two  random  variables.  Techniques  include  analysis  of  variance, 
analysis  of  covariance,  multiple  regression  and  correlation,  introduction  to 
factor  analysis  and  discriminative  analysis.  Extensive  use  of  the  PDP11/70 
computer  as  a  problem  solving  tool  will  be  included.  Prerequisite: 
Mathematics  13.  Alternate  years.  One-half  unit  of  credit. 

17  PRECALCULUS  MATHEMATICS 

The  study  of  logarithmic,  exponential,  trigonometric,  polynomial  and 
rational  functions,  their  graphs  and  elementary  properties.  Prerequisite: 
credit  for  or  exemption  from  Mathematics  5. 

18  CALCULUS  WITH  ANALYTIC  GEOMETRY  I 

Differentiation  of  algebraic  functions,  graphing  plane  curves,  applications 
to  related  rate  and  extremal  problems,  integration  of  algebraic  functions, 
areas  of  plane  regions,  volumes  of  solids  of  revolution  and  other  applica- 
tions. Prerequisite:  a  grade  of  C  or  better  in  Mathematics  17  or  its  equivalent  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

19  CALCULUS  WITH  ANALYTIC  GEOMETRY  II 

Differentiation  and  integration  of  transcendental  functions,  parametric 
equations,  polar  coordinates,  the  conic  sections  and  their  applications, 
infinite  sequences  and  series  expansions.  Prerequisite:  a  grade  of  C  or  better  in 
Mathematics  18  or  consent  of  instructor. 

20  MULTIVARIATE  CALCULUS  WITH  MATRIX  ALGEBRA 

Vectors,  linear  transformations  and  their  matrix  representations,  determi- 
nants, matrix  inversion,  solutions  to  systems  of  linear  equations,  differen- 

99 


tiation  and  integration  of  multivariate  functions,  vector  field  theory  and 
applications.  Prerequisite:  a  grade  of  C  or  better  in  Mathematics  19  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

21     DIFFERENTIAL  EQUATIONS 

A  study  of  ordinary  differential  equations  and  their  applications:  first  order 
linear  differential  equations,  the  Picard  Existence  Theorem,  solution  by 
separation  of  variables,  solution  by  numerical  methods;  second  order  linear 
differential  equations,  solution  by  variation  of  parameters,  solution  by 
power  series,  solution  by  Laplace  transforms;  system  of  first  order  equa- 
tions, solutions  by  eigenvalues;  qualitative  theory,  stability  theory 
asymptotic  behavior  and  the  Poincare-Bendixon  theorem.  Besides  the  usual 
applications  in  physics  and  engineering,  considerable  attention  will  be 
given  to  modern  applications  in  the  social  and  life  sciences.  Prerequisite:  a 
grade  of  C  or  better  in  Mathematics  19  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

23  COMPLEX  VARIABLES 

Complex  numbers,  analytic  functions,  complex  integration,  Cauchy's  the- 
orems and  their  applications.  Corequisite:  Mathematics  20.  Alternate  years. 

24  FOUNDATIONS  OF  MATHEMATICS 

Topics  regularly  included  are  the  nature  of  mathematical  systems,  essentials 
of  logical  reasoning  and  axiomatic  foundations  of  set  theory.  Other  topics 
frequently  included  are  approaches  to  the  concepts  of  infinity  and  continui- 
ty, and  the  construction  of  the  real  number  system.  The  course  serves  as  a 
bridge  from  the  elementary  calculus  to  advanced  courses  in  algebra  and 
analysis.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  19  or  consent  of  instructor. 

30  TOPICS  IN  GEOMETRY 

An  axiomatic  treatment  of  Euclidean  geometry,  and  an  introduction  to 
related  geometries.  Prerequisite:  Mathetnatics  18.  Alternate  years. 

31  INTRODUCTION  TO  NUMERICAL  ANALYSIS 

Study  and  analysis  of  tabulated  data  leading  to  interpolation,  numerical 
integration,  numerical  solutions  of  differential  equations  and  systems  of 
equations.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  15.  Alternate  years.  Cross-listed  as 
Computer  Science  31. 

32-33     MATHEMATICAL  STATISTICS  I-II 

A  study  of  probability,  discrete  and  continuous  random  variables,  expected 
values  and  moments,  sampling,  point  estimation,  sampling  distributions, 
interval  estimation,  test  of  hypotheses,  regression  and  linear  hypotheses, 
experimental  design  models.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  19.  Alternate  years. 

34     MODERN  ALGEBRA 

An  integrated  approach  to  groups,  rings,  fields  and  vector  spaces  and 
functions  which  preserve  their  structure.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  24. 

100 


36  CONCEPTS  OF  MATHEMATICS  IN  SECONDARY  EDUCATION 

A  course  designed  for  mathematics  majors  who  are  planning  to  teach  at  the 
secondary  level.  Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  the  mathematics  that  form  the 
foundation  of  secondary  mathematics.  Ideas  will  be  presented  to  familiarize 
the  student  with  various  curriculum  proposals,  to  provide  for  innovation 
within  the  existing  curriculum  and  to  expand  the  boundaries  of  the  existing 
curriculum.  Open  only  to  junior  and  senior  mathematics  majors  enrolled  in  the 
secondary  education  program.  Alternate  years. 

37  COMPUTATIONAL  MATRIX  ALGEBRA 

An  introduction  to  some  of  the  algorithms  which  have  been  developed  for 
producing  numerical  solutions  to  such  linear  algebraic  problems  as  solving 
systems  of  linear  equations,  inverting  matrices,  computing  the  eigenvalues 
of  a  matrix  and  solving  the  linear  least  squares  problem.  Prerequisite: 
Computer  Science  15  and  Mathematics  19  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 
Cross-listed  as  Computer  Science  37. 

38  OPERATIONS  RESEARCH 

Queuing  theory,  including  simulation  techniques;  optimization  theory, 
including  linear  programming,  integer  programming  and  dynamic  pro- 
gramming; game  theory,  including  two-person  zero-sum  games,  coopera- 
tive games  and  multiperson  games.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  12  or 
Mathematics  20.  Alternate  years. 

42    REAL  ANALYSIS 

A  rigorous  analysis  of  the  basic  concepts  of  real  variable  calculus;  the  real 
number  system  as  a  complete,  ordered  field;  the  topology  of  Euclidean 
space,  compact  sets,  the  Heine-Borel  Theorem;  continuity;  the  Intermediate 
Value  Theorem;  derivatives,  the  Mean  Value  Theorem;  Riemann  integrals, 
the  Fundamental  Theorem  of  Calculus;  infinite  series,  and  Taylor's  the- 
orem. Prerequisite:  Mathematics  24. 

48     SEMINAR 

Topics  in  modern  mathematics  of  current  interest  to  the  instructor.  A 
different  topic  is  selected  each  semester.  This  seminar  is  designed  to 
provide  junior  and  senior  mathematics  majors  and  other  qualified  students 
with  more  than  the  usual  opportunity  for  concentrated  and  cooperative 
inquiry.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One-half  unit  of  credit.  This  course 
may  be  repeated  for  credit. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 

COMPUTER  SCIENCE 

A  major  in  computer  science  consists  of  11  courses:  Mathematics  18,  19 
either  21  or  24  and  Computer  Science  15,  26,  27,  31,  37,  44,  45  and  46.  In 
addition,  the  following  cognate  courses  are  recommended:  Mathematics  13,  14, 
20,  38,  Physics  27,  Philosophy  19,  20  and  Psychology  37. 

101 


2     COMPUTERS  IN  SOCIETY 

A  study  of  the  role  of  digital  computers  in  society  today  with  primary 
emphasis  on  what  can  be  done,  rather  than  how  to  do  it.  The  main  goal  of 
the  course  is  to  make  the  student  aware  of  the  growing  influence  which 
computers  are  likely  to  have  on  society  in  the  near  future.  Students  with 
credit  for  Mathematics  15  may  not  receive  credit  for  this  course.  One-half  unit  of 
credit. 

15     INTRODUCTION  TO  COMPUTER  SCIENCE 

Introduction  to  programming  utilizing  BASIC  and  FORTRAN  IV.  Topics 
include  program  structure,  computer  configuration,  memory  allocation, 
algorithms  and  applications.  Includes  laboratory  experience  on  the 
PDP11/70  computer.  Prerequisite:  credit  for  or  exemption  from  Mathematics  5. 

26  PRINCIPLES  OF  ADVANCED  PROGRAMMING 

Principles  of  effective  programming,  including  structured  programming, 
step-wise  refinement,  assertion  proving,  style,  debugging,  control  struc- 
ture, decision  tables,  finite  state  machines,  recursion  and  encoding.  Prere- 
quisite: Computer  Science  15. 

27  DATA  STRUCTURES 

Representation  of  data  and  algorithms  associated  with  data  structures. 
Topics  include  representation  of  lists,  trees,  graphs  and  strings,  algorithms 
for  searching  and  sorting.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  26. 

31     INTRODUCTION  TO  NUMERICAL  ANALYSIS 

Study  and  analysis  of  tabulated  data  leading  to  interpolation,  numerical 
integration,  numerical  solutions  of  differential  equations  and  systems  of 
equations.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  15.  Alternate  years.  Cross-listed  as 
Mathematics  31. 

37     COMPUTATIONAL  MATRIX  ALGEBRA 

An  introduction  to  some  of  the  algorithms  which  have  been  developed  for 
producing  numerical  solutions  to  such  linear  algebraic  problems  as  solving 
systems  of  linear  equations,  inverting  matrices,  computing  the  eigenvalues 
of  a  matrix  and  solving  the  linear  least  squares  problem.  Prerequisite: 
Computer  Science  15  and  Mathematics  19  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 
Cross-listed  as  Mathematics  37. 

44  MACHINE  LANGUAGE 

Principles  of  machine  language  programming;  computer  organization  and 
representation  of  numbers,  strings,  arrays  and  list  structures  at  the  machine 
level;  interrupt  programming,  relocatable  code,  linking  loaders;  interfacing 
with  operating  systems.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  26.  Alternate  years. 

45  SYSTEMS  PROGRAMMING 

The  emphasis  in  this  course  is  on  the  algorithms  used  in  programming  the 
various   parts   of  a   computer  system.   These   parts   include  assemblers, 

102 


loaders,  editors,  interrupt  processors,  input/output  schedulers,  processor 
and  job  schedulers  and  memory  managers.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  27. 
Alternate  years. 

46    COMPILER  CONSTRUCTION 

The  emphasis  in  this  course  is  on  the  construction  of  translators  for 
programming  languages.  Topics  include  lexical  analysis,  block  structure, 
grammars,  parsing,  program  representation  and  run-time  organization. 
Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  27.  Alternate  years. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 


103 


MUSIC 

Assistant  Professors:  Boerckel,  Jex,  Thayer  (Chairman) 
Part-Time  Instructors:  Lakey,  Mclver,  Nacinovich,  Russell, 
Serang,  Shellenberger 

The  music  major  is  required  to  take  a  balanced  program  of  theory,  applied 
music,  music  history  and  music  ensemble.  A  minimum  of  eight  courses 
(exclusive  of  applied  music  and  ensemble)  is  required,  and  these  must  include 
Music  10,  11,  17,  32  and  any  two  from  35,  36,  45,  46.  Music  17  is  not  required  of 
the  music  major  who  completes  Music  35,  36,  45  and  46.  Each  major  must 
participate  in  an  ensemble  (Music  68  and/or  69)  and  take  one  hour  of  applied 
music  per  week  for  a  minimum  of  four  semesters.  (See  Music  60-66).  The  major 
must  include  piano  in  the  applied  program  unless  a  piano  proficiency  test  is 
requested  and  passed.  Anyone  declaring  music  as  a  second  major  must  do  so  by 
the  beginning  of  the  junior  year. 

10-11     MUSIC  THEORY  I  AND  II 

A  two-semester  course  open  to  all  students.  An  examination  of  the 
fundamental  components  and  theoretical  concepts  of  music.  The  student 
will  develop  musicianship  through  application  of  applied  skills.  (Music  10  is 
prerequisite  to  Music  11). 

16  INTRODUCTION  TO  MUSIC 

A  basic  course  in  the  materials  and  techniques  of  music.  Examples,  drawn 
from  various  periods  and  styles,  are  designed  to  enhance  perception  and 
appreciation  through  careful  and  informed  listening. 

17  SURVEY  OF  WESTERN  MUSIC 

A  chronological  survey  of  Western  music  from  the  Middle  Ages  to  the 
present  for  the  major  or  non-major. 

18  AMERICAN  MUSIC  I 

For  the  major  or  non-major  interested  in  studying  all  types  of  American 
music,  from  pre-Revolutionary  days  through  World  War  I.  Areas  explored 
will  include  Indian,  African  and  European  roots  influencing  the  serious 
music  for  small  and  large  ensembles,  the  development  of  show  music  from 
minstrels  to  Broadway  musicals,  the  evolution  of  "Tin  Pan  Alley"  and  the 
beginnings  of  jazz.  Alternate  years. 

19  AMERICAN  MUSIC  II 

For  the  major  or  non-major  interested  in  studying  all  types  of  American 
music.  American  Music  II  will  cover  post-World  War  I  days  to  the  present. 
Areas  explored  will  include  indigenous  serious  music  for  small  and  large 
ensembles,  the  mature  Broadway  musical,  the  evolution  of  jazz,  the 
development  of  rock  and  the  fusion  of  musical  styles  in  the  1970's.  Alternate 
years. 

20-21     MUSIC  THEORY  III  AND  IV 

A  continuation  of  the  integrated  theory  course  moving  toward  newer  uses 
of  music  materials.  Prerequisite:  Music  11.  Alternate  years. 

104 


28  COUNTERPOINT 

A  study  of  the  five  species  in  two,  three  and  four-part  writing.  Alternate 
years. 

29  ORCHESTRATION 

A  study  of  modern  orchestral  instruments,  and  examination  of  their  use  by 
the  great  masters  with  practical  problems  in  instrumentation.  Alternate 
years. 

30  COMPOSITION 

Creative  writing  in  smaller  vocal  and  instrumental  forms.  The  college  music 
organizations  serve  to  make  performance  possible.  Alternate  years. 

31  CONDUCTING 

A  study  of  the  fundamentals  of  conducting  with  frequent  opportunity  for 
practical  experience.  Alternate  years. 

32  ELECTRONIC  MUSIC  I 

Largely  a  non-technical  introduction  to  electronic  music  designed  for  the 
major  and  non-major.  The  course  traces  the  development  of  electronic 
music,  introduces  the  student  to  simple  tape-splicing  and  recorder  manipu- 
lation, and  progresses  to  the  present-day  synthesizer  and  multi-track 
techniques.  Students  will  work  collectively  and  individually  in  the  elec- 
tronic studios.  Alternate  years. 

33  ELECTRONIC  MUSIC  II 

An  in-depth  study  of  the  Moog  synthesizer  including  alternating  and  direct 
current,  signal  generators  and  the  characteristics  of  their  waveforms, 
control  voltage  and  its  sources,  the  transient  and  periodic  modulations. 
Basic  mixing  and  filtering  techniques  will  be  examined.  Students  will  be 
assigned  studio  hours  to  complete  the  recording  assignments.  Prerequisite: 
Music  32.  Alternate  years. 

35  MUSIC  HISTORY  TO  J.S.  BACH 

A  survey  of  Western  music  from  Gregorian  chant  to  the  masterworks  of 
Handel  and  Bach.  Church  music  of  the  Middle  Ages,  Renaissance  and 
Baroque  periods  is  of  primary  importance  with  the  origins  of  instrumental 
music  and  opera  receiving  secondary  consideration.  Prerequisite:  Music  17  or 
consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

36  MUSIC  HISTORY  OF  THE  18TH  CENTURY 

The  symphonies,  operas,  chamber  music  and  piano  works  of  Haydn, 
Mozart  and  Beethoven  are  studied  within  the  social  and  cultural  climate  of 
late  18th-Century  Europe.  Rococo  music  in  France  and  Italy  will  be 
considered  with  the  expressive  style  of  Germany  and  Austria.  Prerequisite: 
Music  17  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

105 


42  ELECTRONIC  MUSIC  III 

An  introduction  to  acoustic  theory,  echo  technique,  location  modulation, 
application  of  equalization,  phasing  and  microphones.  The  student  will 
write  and  perform  an  electronic  composition  utilizing  real-time  networks. 
Prerequisite:  Music  33.  Alternate  years. 

43  ELECTRONIC  MUSIC  IV 

A  study  of  major  compositions  and  genres  of  electronic  music.  The  student 
will  complete  an  original  composition  based  upon  a  study  of  these  techni- 
ques and  forms.  Prerequisite:  Music  42.  Alternate  years. 

45  MUSIC  OF  THE  19TH  CENTURY 

A  study  of  the  music  of  the  Romantic  period  with  emphasis  on  Beethoven, 
Schubert,  Chopin,  Berlioz,  Liszt,  Schumann,  Brahms,  Wagner,  Verdi, 
Tchaikovsky  and  others.  Close  examination  of  short  lyric  forms,  program 
music,  opera  and  the  sonata  genre.  Prerequisite:  Music  17  or  consent 
of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

46  MUSIC  OF  THE  20TH  CENTURY 

Beginning  with  Debussy,  Strauss,  Mahler  and  Sibelius,  the  course  traces 
some  of  the  main  currents  in  the  music  of  our  time.  Emphasis  given  to  such 
composers  as  Stravinsky,  Bartok,  Ives,  Shostakovich,  Berg,  Gershwin  and 
others.  Prerequisite:  Music  17  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 


APPLIED  MUSIC  AND  ENSEMBLE 

The  study  of  performance  in  piano,  voice,  organ,  strings,  woodwinds,  and 
percussion  is  designed  to  develop  sound  technique  and  a  knowledge  of  the 
appropriate  literature  for  the  instrument.  Student  recitals  offer  opportunities  to 
gain  experience  in  public  performance.  Music  majors  and  other  students 
qualified  in  performance  may  present  formal  recitals. 

Credit  for  applied  music  courses  (private  lessons)  and  ensemble  (choir  and 
band)  is  earned  on  a  fractional  basis.  For  a  description  of  this,  see  page  17.  An 
applied  course  or  ensemble  should  NOT  be  substituted  for.  an  academic  course, 
but  should  in  every  case  be  in  addition  to  the  normal  four  academic  courses. 
Extra  fees  apply  for  private  lessons  (Music  60-66)  as  follows:  $130  per  semester 
for  a  half-hour  lesson  per  week.  Private  lessons  are  given  for  13  weeks. 

60  Piano  62  Strings  64  Brass  66  Percussion 

61  Voice  63  Organ  65  Woodwinds 

68    CHORAL  ENSEMBLE  (CHOIR) 

Participation  in  the  college  choir  is  designed  to  enable  any  student  possess- 
ing at  least  average  talent  an  opportunity  to  study  choral  technique. 
Emphasis  is  placed  upon  acquaintance  with  choral  literature,  tone  produc- 
tion, diction  and  phrasing.  Students  desiring  credit  for  choir  are  allowed  a 
maximum  of  one  hour  per  semester.  A  student  who  is  enrolled  in  choir  and 
not  band  should  elect  Music  68-B  (one  hour  credit).  Students  enrolled  in 
both  band  and  choir  should  elect  68- A  and  69- A  (V2  hr.  in  each). 

106 


69     INSTRUMENTAL  ENSEMBLE  (BAND) 

The  college  band  allows  students  with  some  instrumental  experience  to 
become  acquainted  with  good  band  literature  and  develop  personal  musi- 
cianship through  participation  in  group  instrumental  activity.  Students 
desiring  credit  for  ensemble  are  allowed  a  maximum  of  one  hour  per 
semester.  A  student  who  is  enrolled  in  band,  but  not  choir,  should  elect 
Music  69-B  (one  hour  credit).  A  student  enrolled  in  both  band  and  choir 
should  elect  68-A  and  69-B  (V2  hr.  in  each). 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 


107 


NEAR  EAST  CULTURE  AND  ARCHEOLOGY 

Professor:  Guerra  (Coordinator) 

The  Near  East  Culture  and  Archeology  interdisciplinary  major  is  designed  to 
acquaint  students  with  the  "cradle  of  Western  civilization/'  both  in  its  ancient 
and  modern  aspects.  Majors  will  complete  a  minimum  of  eight  to  10  courses 
related  to  the  Near  East. 

Required  courses  are  described  in  their  departmental  sections  and  include: 

1 .  Four  courses  (semesters)  in  language  and  culture  from: 
History  and  Culture  of  the  Ancient  Near  East  (Religion  28) 
History  of  Art  (Art  22) 

Ancient  History  (History  20) 

Old  Testament  Faith  and  History  (Religion  13) 

Judaism  and  Islam  (Religion  24) 

Two  semesters  of  foreign  language  (Hebrew  1,  2  or  Greek  1,  2) 

2.  Two  courses  (semesters)  in  archeology  from: 
Bible,  Archeology  and  Faith  (Religion  46) 

Special  Archeology  courses,  such  as  independent  studies  or  in  May 
term  or  summer  sessions  in  the  Near  East. 

3.  Two  courses  (semesters)  in  the  cooperating  departments  (Art,  History, 
Political  Science,  Religion  and  Sociology-Anthropology)  or  related  depart- 
ments. These  two  courses,  usually  taken  in  the  junior  or  senior  years,  can 
be  independent  study.  Topics  should  be  related  either  to  the  ancient  or  the 
modern  Near  East  and  must  be  approved  in  advance  by  the  committee 
supervising  the  interdisciplinary  program.  The  study  of  modern  Arabic  or 
Hebrew  is  encouraged. 

Other  courses  may  be  suggested  by  the  supervisory  committee  within  the 
limits  of  a  10-course  major.  The  number  of  courses  taken  within  this  program 
applicable  toward  fulfilling  the  college  distribution  requirements  will  vary 
according  to  the  selection  of  courses. 

PHILOSOPHY 

Associate  Professor:  Griffith 

Assistant  Professor:  Herring  (Chairman),  Whelan 

The  study  of  philosophy  develops  a  critical  understanding  of  the  basic  concepts 
and  presuppositions  around  which  we  organize  our  thought  in  science,  religion, 
education,  morality,  the  arts  and  other  human  enterprises.  A  major  in 
philosophy,  together  with  appropriate  other  courses,  can  provide  an  excellent 
preparation  for  policy-making  positions  of  many  kinds,  for  graduate  study  in 
several  fields  and  for  careers  in  education,  law  and  the  ministry.  The  major  in 
philosophy  consists  of  at  least  eight  courses  numbered  10  or  above,  of  which  six 
must  be  numbered  20  or  above  and  must  include  21  or  23,  22  or  24  and  49.  In 
addition  to  the  courses  listed  below,  special  courses  are  often  offered. 

5    PRACTICAL  REASONING 

A  general  introduction  to  topics  in  logic  and  their  application  to  practical 
reasoning,  with  primary  emphasis  on  detecting  fallacies,  evaluating  induc- 
tive reasoning,  and  understanding  the  rudiments  of  scientific  method. 

108 


10    INTRODUCTION  TO  PHILOSOPHICAL  PROBLEMS 

An  introductory  course  designed  to  show  the  nature  of  philosophy  by 
examination  of  several  examples  of  problems  which  have  received  extended 
attention  in  philosophical  literature.  These  topics  often  include  the  relation 
of  the  mind  to  the  body,  the  possibility  of  human  freedom,  arguments  about 
the  existence  of  God,  the  conditions  of  knowledge  and  the  relation  of 
language  to  thought.  Some  attention  is  also  given  to  the  principles  of 
acceptable  reasoning. 

14  PHILOSOPHY  AND  PERSONAL  CHOICE 

An  introductory  philosophical  examination  of  a  number  of  contemporary 
moral  issues  which  call  for  personal  decision.  Topics  often  investigated 
include:  the  "good"  life,  obligation  to  others,  sexual  ethics,  abortion,  suicide 
and  death,  violence  and  pacifism,  obedience  to  the  law,  the  relevance  of 
personal  beliefs  to  morality.  Discussion  centers  on  some  of  the  suggestions 
philosophers  have  made  about  how  to  make  such  decisions. 

15  PHILOSOPHY  AND  PUBLIC  POLICY 

An  introductory  philosophical  examination  of  the  moral  and  conceptual 
dimension  of  various  contemporary  public  issues,  such  as  the  relation  of 
ethics  to  politics  and  the  law,  the  enforcement  of  morals,  the  problem  of  fair 
distribution  of  goods  and  opportunities,  the  legitimacy  to  restricting  the  use 
of  natural  resources  and  the  application  of  ethics  to  business  practice. 
Discussion  centers  on  some  of  the  suggestions  philosophers  have  made 
about  how  to  deal  with  these  issues. 

16  ETHICAL  ISSUES  IN  BUSINESS 

An  introductory  philosophical  examination  of  a  variety  of  moral  problems 
that  arise  concerning  the  American  business  system.  Included  are  a 
systematic  consideration  of  typical  moral  problems  faced  by  individuals  and 
an  examination  of  common  moral  criticisms  of  the  business  system  itself. 

17  PHILOSOPHICAL  ISSUES  IN  EDUCATION 

An  examination  of  the  basic  concepts  involved  in  thought  about  education, 
and  a  consideration  of  the  various  methods  for  justifying  educational 
proposals.  Typical  of  the  issues  discussed  are:  Are  education  and  indoctri- 
nation different?  What  is  a  liberal  education?  Are  education  and  schooling 
compatible?  What  do  we  need  to  learn?  Alternate  years. 

18  PHILOSOPHICAL  ISSUES  IN  CRIMINAL  JUSTICE 

An  introductory  examination  of  various  philosophical  issues  and  concepts 
which  are  of  special  importance  in  legal  contexts.  Discussion  includes  both 
general  topics,  such  as  the  justification  of  punishment,  and  more  specific 
topics,  such  as  the  insanity  defense  and  the  rights  of  the  accused.  Readings 
are  arranged  topically  and  include  both  classical  and  contemporary  sources. 

19  ETHICAL  ISSUES  IN  BIOLOGY  AND  MEDICINE 

A  philosophical  investigation  of  some  of  the  ethical  issues  which  arise  as  a 
result  of  contemporary  medical  and  biological  technology.  Typical  of  these 

109 


issues  are  euthanasia,  behavior  control,  patient  rights,  experimentation  on 
humans,  fetal  research,  abortion,  genetic  engineering,  population  control 
and  distribution  of  health  resources. 

20  SYMBOLIC  LOGIC 

A  study  of  modern  symbolic  logic  and  its  application  to  the  analysis  of 
arguments.  Included  are  truth-functional  relations,  the  logic  of  proposi- 
tional  functions  and  deductive  systems.  Attention  is  also  given  to  various 
topics  in  the  philosophy  of  logic. 

21  ANCIENT  GREEK  ETHICAL  AND  POLITICAL  PHILOSOPHY 

An  examination  of  the  ethical  and  political  views  of  Socrates,  Plato  and 
Aristotle.  Considerable  attention  is  paid  to  the  relationship  between  these 
views  and  the  social  and  intellectual  milieu  out  of  which  they  developed. 
However,  the  primary  emphasis  is  on  understanding  the  philosophical 
issues  raised  in  selected  Aristotelian  and  Platonic  texts.  Prerequisite:  freshmen 
must  have  instructor's  permission.  Alternate  years. 

22  HISTORY  OF  MODERN  POLITICAL  PHILOSOPHY 

An  historical  survey  of  the  most  important  social  and  political  philosophers 
of  the  modern  period.  Particular  attention  is  paid  to  the  social  contract 
theories  of  Hobbes,  Locke  and  Rousseau,  and  some  consideration  will  be 
given  to  the  political  philosophies  of  Hegal,  Marx  and  Mill.  Prerequisite: 
freshmen  must  have  instructor's  permission.  Alternate  years. 

23  ANCIENT  GREEK  SCIENCE  AND  METAPHYSICS 

An  historical  survey  of  the  first  attempts  to  understand  the  physical 
universe  scientifically.  Particular  attention  is  paid  to  the  common  origins  of 
philosophy  and  science  in  the  works  of  the  pre-Platonic  philosophers,  to  the 
question  of  how  scientific  and  philosophical  thinking  is  distinct  from 
mythological  and  technological  thinking,  and  to  the  interaction  between 
philosophy  and  science  in  formulating  the  fundamental  problems  about  the 
physical  universe  and  in  developing  and  criticizing  the  various  concepts 
introduced  in  attempts  to  solve  those  problems.  Prerequisite:  freshmen  must 
have  instructor's  permission.  Alternate  years. 

24  EARLY  MODERN  SCIENCE  AND  METAPHYSICS 

An  historical  survey  of  the  early  modern  attempt  to  understand  the  physical 
universe.  Particular  attention  is  paid  to  the  continuities  and  discontinuities 
between  early  modern  science  and  metaphysics  and  ancient  Greek  science 
and  metaphysics,  to  the  rationalism-empiricism  dispute  in  science  and 
metaphysics,  and  to  the  interaction  between  philosophy  and  science  in 
formulating  fundamental  questions  about  the  physical  universe  and  in 
developing  and  criticizing  concepts  designed  to  answer  them.  Prerequisite: 
freshmen  must  have  instructor's  permission.  Alternate  years. 

31     PHILOSOPHICAL  ISSUES  IN  CONTEMPORARY  PSYCHOLOGY 

Theories  in  psychology  which  attempt  to  explain  human  behavior  seem  to 
conflict  in  various  ways  with  religion,  with  common  ideas  about  morality 
and  with  common-sensical  ways  of  explaining  human  behavior.  This  course 
examines   some   of   those   conflicts   philosophically.   Prerequisite:   students 

110 


without  previous  study  in  philosophy  must  have  instructor's  perrnission.  Alternate 
years. 

32  PHILOSOPHY  OF  RELIGION 

A  philosophical  examination  of  religion.  Included  are  such  topics  as  the 
nature  of  religious  discourse,  arguments  for  and  against  the  existence  of 
God,  and  the  relation  between  religion  and  science.  Readings  from  classical 
and  contemporary  sources.  Prerequisite:  students  without  previous  study  in 
philosophy  must  have  instructor's  permission.  Alternate  years. 

33  PHILOSOPHY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCE 

A  consideration  of  philosophically  important  conceptual  problems  arising 
from  reflection  about  natural  science,  including  such  topics  as  the  nature  of 
scientific  laws  and  theories,  the  character  of  explanation,  the  import  of 
prediction,  the  existence  of  "non-observable"  theoretical  entities  such  as 
electrons  and  genes,  the  problem  of  justifying  induction  and  various 
puzzles  associated  with  probability.  Prerequisite:  students  without  previous 
study  in  philosophy  must  have  instructor's  permission.  Alternate  years. 

34  SOCIAL  AND  POLITICAL  PHILOSOPHY 

A  systematic  philosophical  investigation  of  the  relation  between  human 
nature  and  the  proper  social  and  political  order.  Topics  studied  include  the 
purpose  of  government,  the  nature  of  legitimate  authority,  the  foundation 
of  human  rights  and  the  limits  of  human  freedom.  Emphasis  is  placed  on 
the  logic  of  social  and  political  thought  and  on  the  analysis  of  basic 
principles  and  concepts.  Prerequisite:  students  without  previous  study  in 
philosophy  must  have  instructor's  permission. 

35  ETHICAL  THEORY 

An  inquiry  concerning  the  grounds  which  distinguish  morally  right  from 
morally  wrong  actions.  Central  to  the  course  is  critical  consideration  of  the 
proposals  and  the  rationale  of  relativists,  egoists,  utilitarians  and  other 
ethical  theorists.  Various  topics  in  metaethics  are  also  included.  Prerequisite: 
students  without  previous  study  in  philosophy  must  have  instructor's  permission. 

49     DEPARTMENTAL  SEMINAR 

An  investigation,  carried  on  by  discussions  and  papers,  into  one 
philosophical  problem,  text,  philosopher  or  movement.  A  different  topic  is 
selected  each  semester.  Recent  topics  include  Sidgwick's  ethics,  religious 
language,  Kierkegaard,  legal  punishment,  Wittgenstein,  personal  identity 
and  human  rights.  This  seminar  is  designed  to  provide  junior  and  senior 
philosophy  majors  and  other  qualified  students  with  more  than  the  usual 
opportunity  for  concentrated  and  cooperative  inquiry.  Prerequisite:  consent  of 
the  instructor.  This  seminar  may  be  repeated  for  credit. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

80     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 

Recent  independent  studies  in  philosophy  include  Nietzsche,  moral  educa- 
tion, Rawls'  theory  of  justice,  existentialism,  euthanasia,  Plato's  ethics  and 
philosophical  aesthetics. 

90     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

111 


PHYSICAL  EDUCATION 

Associate  Professor:  Burch  (Chairman) 
Assistant  Professor:  Whitehall 
Instructor:  Holmes 
Visiting  Instructor:  Hair 

1       PHYSICAL  EDUCATION 

Coeducational  physical  education  classes.  Basic  instructions  in  fundamen- 
tals, knowledge  and  appreciation  of  sports  that  include  swimming,  tennis, 
bowling,  volleyball,  archery,  field  hockey,  soccer,  golf,  badminton,  modern 
dance,  skiing,  elementary  games  (for  elementary  teachers),  toneastics, 
physical  fitness  and  other  activities.  Orienteering,  backpacking,  cross- 
country and  alpine  skiing,  jogging  and  cycling  are  offered  on  a  contract 
basis.  Beginning  swimming  is  required  for  all  nonswimmers.  Students  may 
select  any  activity  offered.  A  reasonable  degree  of  proficiency  is  required  in 
the  activities.  Emphasis  is  on  the  potential  use  of  activities  as  recreational 
and  leisure-time  interests.  Two  semesters  of  physical  education  (two  hours 
per  week)  are  required.  All  physical  education  classes  are  open  to  men  and 
women. 


POLITICAL  SCIENCE 

Associate  Professor:  Giglio,  Roskin 
Assistant  Professor:  Grogan  (Chairman) 
Part-time  Instructor:  Carlucci 

The  major  is  designed  to  provide  a  systematic  understanding  of  government  and 
politics  at  the  international,  national,  state  and  local  levels.  Majors  are  en- 
couraged to  develop  their  faculties  to  make  independent,  objective  analyses 
which  can  be  applied  to  the  broad  spectrum  of  the  social  sciences. 

Although  the  political  science  major  is  not  designed  as  a  vocational  major, 
students  with  such  training  may  go  directly  into  government  service,  journal- 
ism, teaching  or  private  administrative  agencies.  A  political  science  major  can 
provide  the  base  for  the  study  of  law,  or  for  graduate  studies  leading  to 
administrative  work  in  federal,  state  or  local  government,  international  or- 
ganizations or  college  teaching.  Students  seeking  certification  to  teach  secon- 
dary school  social  studies  may  major  in  political  science  but  should  consult  their 
advisors  and  the  education  department. 

A  major  consists  of  eight  political  science  courses,  including  Political 
Science  15  and  at  least  one  course  in  each  of  the  five  areas  (A  to  E)  below. 
Students  entering  the  major  as  juniors  or  seniors  may,  with  departmental 
permission,  substitute  Political  Science  20  for  Political  Science  15.  To  encourage 
familiarity  with  other  social  sciences,  at  least  two  courses  must  be  completed 
from  the  following:  American  Studies  10;  Business  35  and  36  (recommended  for 
pre-law);  Economics  10,  11,  32,  45;  History  24,  32,  33,  34;  Philosophy  21,  22; 
Sociology  and  Anthropology  26,  38. 

15     INTRODUCTION  TO  POLITICS 

The  behavior  and  misbehavior  of  the  political  animal,  man.  Why  he  forms 
political  communities;  how  he  may  improve  and  destroy  them.  Required  of 
all  political  science  majors;  open  to  a  limited  number  of  other  interested  students. 

112 


A.  AMERICAN  GOVERNMENT 

10  GOVERNMENT  AND  POLITICS  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES 

An  introduction  to  American  national  government  which  emphasizes  both 
structural-functional  analysis  and  policymaking  processes.  In  addition  to 
the  legislative,  executive  and  judicial  branches  of  government,  attention  will 
be  given  to  political  parties  and  interest  groups,  elections  and  voting 
behavior  and  constitutional  rights.  Recommended  to  all  social  science 
education  majors  and  to  those  students  who  have  had  inadequate  or 
insufficient  preparation  in  American  government. 

11  STATE  AND  LOCAL  GOVERNMENT 

An  examination  of  the  general  principles,  major  problems  and  political 
processes  of  the  states  and  their  subdivisions,  together  with  their  role  in  a 
federal  type  of  government. 

30  THE  AMERICAN  CONSTITUTIONAL  SYSTEM 

An  analysis  of  the  Supreme  Court  in  the  American  system  of  government 
with  some  attention  paid  to  judicial  decision  making.  Topics  include: 
judicial  review,  federalism,  constitutional  limits  on  legislative  and  executive 
powers,  elections  and  representation.  Alternate  years. 

31  CIVIL  RIGHTS  AND  LIBERTIES 

What  are  our  rights  and  liberties  as  Americans?  What  should  they  be?  A 
frank  discussion  of  the  nature  and  scope  of  the  constitutional  guarantees. 
First  Amendment  rights,  the  rights  of  criminal  suspects  and  defendants, 
racial  and  sexual  equality,  and  equal  protection  of  the  laws.  Students  will 
read  and  brief  the  more  important  Supreme  Court  decisions.  Prerequisite: 
junior  or  senior  standing  or  consent  of  instructor. 

33    BUREAUCRACY  AND  PUBLIC  ADMINISTRATION 

What  is  a  bureaucracy?  Why  and  how  do  bureaucracies  arise?  What  has 
been  the  political  impact  of  growth  of  bureaucracy  in  government?  These 
questions,  among  others,  will  be  considered  in  this  examination  of  public 
bureaucracies.  This  course  is  highly  recommended  to  students  planning  to 
take  an  internship  in  city  or  county  government  through  the  political 
science  department. 

B.  AMERICAN  POLITICS 

22  POLITICAL  PARTIES  AND  INTEREST  GROUPS 

An  examination  of  the  history,  organization,  functions  and  methods  of 
American  political  parties.  Special  attention  is  devoted  to  the  role  of 
organized  interest  groups  in  the  political  process.  Alternate  years. 

23  AMERICAN  PRESIDENCY 

A  study  of  the  office  and  powers  of  the  president  with  analysis  of  his  major 
roles  as  chief  administrator,  legislator,  political  leader,  foreign  policy  maker 
and  commander  in  chief.  Special  attention  is  given  to  those  presidents  who 
led  the  nation  boldly. 

113 


24    THE  LEGISLATIVE  PROCESS 

A  study  of  the  role  of  the  legislature  in  the  framework  of  the  national  and 
state  governments.  Consideration  of  the  influence  of  the  parties,  pressure 
groups,  public  opinion,  constituencies,  the  "committee  system,"  the  "ad- 
ministration" and  the  constitution  in  the  lawmaking  process.  Alternate  years. 

28  CONTEMPORARY  ISSUES  IN  PUBLIC  POLICY  I 

An  introduction  to  basic  principles  of  policy  analysis,  including  identi- 
fication of  contemporary  public  policy  problems,  alternative  solutions, 
formal  government  and  other  participants  in  the  policy-making  process 
and  evaluation  of  policy  impact.  Includes  a  detailed  case-study  analysis  of 
one  major  policy  controversy.  This  is  a  one-half  unit  course  (first 
seven  weeks  of  semester).  Students  wishing  to  register  in  a  full  unit  course 
should  register  for  both  PS  28  and  PS  29;  those  wishing  to  register  for  a  one- 
half  unit  course  only  should  register  for  PS  28.  Alternate  years. 

29  CONTEMPORARY  ISSUES  IN  PUBLIC  POLICY  II 

A  continuation  of  PS  28  with  an  emphasis  on  the  variety  of  major  issues  in 
public  policy  confronting  American  government  and  society.  Includes  a 
detailed  case-study  analysis  of  one  major  public  policy  controversy  (will 
differ  from  that  analyzed  in  PS  28).  This  is  a  one-half  unit  course  (second 
seven  weeks  of  semester).  Prerequisite:  PS  28.  Students  wishing  to  register  in  a 
full  unit  course  should  register  for  both  PS  28  and  PS  29.  Alternate  years. 

32    THE  POLITICS  OF  CITIES  AND  SUBURBS 

An  examination  of  the  history,  legal  basis,  power,  forms,  services  and 
problems  of  the  cities  and  their  suburbs,  with  special  reference  to  current 
experiments  in  the  solution  of  the  problems  of  metropolitan  areas. 


C.  POLITICAL  THEORY  AND  METHODOLOGY 

35     LAW  AND  SOCIETY 

An  examination  into  the  nature,  sources,  functions  and  limits  of  law  as  an 
instrument  of  political  and  social  control.  Included  for  discussion  are  legal 
problems  pertaining  to  the  family,  crime,  deviant  behavior,  poverty  and 
minority  groups.  Prerequisite:  junior  or  senior  standing  or  consent  of  instructor. 

46  CONTEMPORARY  POLITICAL  IDEOLOGIES 

The  growth,  development  and  current  status  of  liberalism,  conservatism, 
nationalism,  socialism,  communism  and  fascism.  Alternate  years. 

47  THE  AMERICAN  POLITICAL  TRADITION 

An  examination  of  the  significant  ideas  which  have  shaped  the  American 
political  tradition  from  their  European  origins  to  the  present,  with  emphasis 
on  the  influence  of  these  ideas  in  the  development  of  American  democracy. 
Special  attention  will  be  paid  to  an  analysis  of  contemporary  ideological 
movements:  Black  power,  new  left  and  radical  feminism.  Alternate  years. 

114 


48    PUBLIC  OPINION  AND  POLLING 

A  course  dealing  with  the  general  topic  and  methodology  of  polling. 
Content  includes  exploration  of  the  processes  by  which  people's  political 
opinions  are  formed,  the  manipulation  of  public  opinion  through  the  uses 
of  propaganda  and  the  American  response  to  politics  and  political  issues. 

D.  COMPARATIVE  POLITICS 

20    EUROPEAN  POLITICS 

A  study  of  the  political  systems  of  East  and  West  Europe  with  emphasis  on 
comparison  and  patterns  of  government.  The  course  will  review  politics  in 
Northern  (Britain,  West  Germany,  Sweden),  Latin  (France,  Italy,  Spain) 
and  Eastern  (Soviet  Union,  East  Germany,  Yugoslavia)  Europe  and  attempt 
to  find  underlying  similarities  and  differences. 

26  POLITICAL  CULTURES 

An  exploration  of  the  "people"  aspects  of  political  life  in  several  countries. 
The  way  people  interact  with  each  other  and  with  government,  what  they 
expect  from  the  system,  how  they  acquire  their  political  attitudes  and  styles 
and  how  these  contribute  to  the  type  of  government.  Alternate  years. 

38  POLITICS  OF  DEVELOPING  AREAS 

The  causes  and  possible  cures  for  socio-political  backwardness  in  Asia, 
Africa  and  Latin  America.  Alternate  years. 

E.  INTERNATIONAL  RELATIONS 

25     WORLD  POLITICS 

Why  is  there  war?  An  introduction  to  international  relations  with  emphasis 
on  the  varieties  of  conflicts  which  may  grow  into  war. 

27  CRISIS  AREAS  IN  WORLD  POLITICS 

The  study  of  several  current  areas  of  international  tension  and  conflict, 
including  relations  among  the  United  States,  Soviet  Union  and  China,  plus 
the  Middle  East  and  whatever  new  danger  spots  arise  over  time.  Alternate 
years. 

39  AMERICAN  FOREIGN  POLICY 

The  U.S.  role  in  the  world  in  geographic,  strategic,  historical  and  ideological 
perspectives,  plus  an  examination  of  the  domestic  forces  shaping  U.S. 
policy.  Alternate  years. 

F.  NON-AREA  ELECTIVES 

34    POLITICAL  NEWSWRLTING 

A  workshop  course  in  the  reporting  and  rewriting  of  public  affairs  at  the 
local,  national  and  international  levels.  There  will  be  neither  texts  nor 
examinations,  but  short  written  assignments  will  be  due  every  class 
meeting.  Prerequisite:  English  23  or  24  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

115 


G.  SPECIAL  PROGRAMS 

70-79    INTERNSHIPS  (See  Index) 

Students  may  receive  academic  credit  for  serving  as  interns  in  structured 
learning  situations  with  a  wide  variety  of  public  and  private  agencies  and 
organizations.  Students  have  served  as  interns  with  the  Public  Defender's 
Office,  the  Lycoming  County  Court  Administrator  and  the  Williamsport  city 
government. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Current  studies  relate  to  elections — local,  state  and  federal — while  past 
studies  have  included  Soviet  and  world  politics. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 


116 


PSYCHOLOGY 

Professor:  Hancock 

Assistant  Professor:  Berthold  (Chairman) 

Part-time  Instructor:  Vestermark 

A  major  consists  of  Psychology  10,  31,  32,  36  and  four  other  psychology  courses. 
Mathematics  13  also  is  required.  In  addition  to  the  departmental  requirements, 
majors  are  urged  to  include  courses  in  biology  and  sociology. 

10    INTRODUCTORY  PSYCHOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  empirical  study  of  human  and  other  animal 
behavior.  Areas  considered  may  include:  learning,  personality,  social, 
physiological,  sensory,  cognition  and  developmental. 

12     GROUP  PROCESSES  AND  INTERPERSONAL  COMMUNICATION 

The  introduction  to  the  research  and  theory  from  social  psychology  related 
to  small  group  dynamics  and  interpersonal  communication.  Topics  covered 
will  include  communication  processes,  interpretation  of  motivation,  con- 
ceptualization of  individual  personalities,  problem  solving  and  leadership. 
The  first  stage  of  the  course  will  focus  on  research  and  theory;  the  second 
half  will  emphasize  the  development  of  skills  and  techniques  where 
students  become  members  of  a  self-analytic — practicing  the  skills  and 
making  a  case  study  of  the  processes  involved.  May  term  only. 

15  ORGANIZATIONAL  AND  INDUSTRIAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

The  application  of  the  principles  and  methods  of  pscyhology  to  selected 
organizational  and  industrial  situations.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  10. 

16  ABNORMAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  patterns  of  deviant  behavior  with  emphasis  on 
cause,  function  and  treatment.  The  various  models  for  the  conceptualiza- 
tion of  abnormal  behavior  are  critically  examined.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  10. 

17  DEVELOPMENTAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

A  study  of  the  basic  principles  of  early  human  growth  and  development. 
Prerequisite:  Psychology  10. 

18  ADOLESCENT  PSYCHOLOGY 

The  study  areas  will  include  theories  of  adolescence;  current  issues  raised 
by  as  well  as  about  the  "generation  of  youth;"  research  findings  bearing  on 
theories  and  issues  of  growth  beyond  childhood,  and  self-exploration. 
Prerequisite:  Psychology  10. 

24     SOCIAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

An  examination  of  behavior  in  social  contexts,  including  motivation, 
perception,  group  processes  and  leadership,  attitudes  and  methods  of 
research.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  10. 

117 


31  LEARNING  EXPERIMENTAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

Learning  processes.  The  examination  of  the  basic  methods  and  principles  of 
animal  and  human  learning.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  10,  Mathematics  13. 

32  SENSORY  EXPERIMENTAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

The  examination  of  psychophysical  methodology  and  basic  neu- 
rophysiological  methods  as  they  are  applied  to  the  understanding  of 
sensory  processes.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  10,  Mathematics  23. 

33  PHYSIOLOGICAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  physiological  psychologist's  method  of  approach  to 
the  understanding  of  behavior  as  well  as  the  set  of  principles  that  relate  the 
function  and  organization  of  the  nervous  system  to  the  phenomena  of 
behavior.  The  course  emphasis  is  on  the  relationship  between  brain 
function  and  the  physiological  bases  of  learning,  perception  and  motiva- 
tion. Laboratory  experience  includes  both  behavioral  testing  and  basic 
small-animal  neurosurgical  technique  as  well  as  histological  methodology. 
Prerequisite:  Psychology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

34  PRINCIPLES  OF  MEASUREMENT 

Psychometric  methods  and  theory,  including  scale  transformation,  norms, 
standardization,  validation  procedures  and  estimation  of  reliability.  Prere- 
quisite: Psychology  10,  Mathematics  13. 

35  HISTORY  AND  SYSTEMS  OF  PSYCHOLOGY 

The  growth  of  scientific  psychology  and  the  theories  and  systems  that  have 
accompanied  its  development.  Prerequisite:  four  courses  in  psychology. 

36  PERSONALITY  THEORY 

Theories  of  personality.  A  comparison  of  different  theoretical  views  on  the 
development  and  functioning  of  personality.  Examined  in  detail  are  three 
general  viewpoints  of  personality:  psychoanalytic,  stimulus-response  (be- 
havioristic)  and  phenomenological.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  10. 

37  COGNITION 

An  investigation  of  human  mental  processes  along  the  two  major 
dimensions  of  directed  and  undirected  thought.  Topic  areas  include: 
recognition,  attention,  conceptualization,  problem-solving,  fantasy,  lan- 
guage, dreaming  and  creativity.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  10. 

38  EDUCATIONAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  empirical  study  of  the  teaching-learning  process. 
Areas  considered  may  include  educational  objectives,  pupil  and  teacher 
characteristics,  concept  learning,  problem  solving  and  creativity,  attitudes 
and  values,  motivation,  retention  and  transfer,  evaluation  and  meas- 
urement. Prerequisite:  Psychology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

118 


39     BEHAVIOR  MODIFICATION 

A  detailed  examination  of  the  applied  analysis  of  behavior.  Focus  will  be  on 
the  application  of  experimental  method  to  the  individual  clinical  case.  The 
course  will  cover  targeting,  behavior,  base-rating,  intervention  strategies 
and  outcome  evaluation.  Learning-based  modification  techniques  such  as 
contingency  management,  counter-conditioning,  extinction,  discrimination 
training,  aversive  conditioning  and  negative  practice  will  be  examined. 
Prerequisite:  Psychology  31  or  consent  of  instructor. 

41     PSYCHOLOGY  OF  WOMEN 

A  review  of  contemporary  theory  and  research  on  the  psychology  of 
women.  Topics  of  discussion  include  the  conflicts  of  women  in  today's 
society,  psychological  sex  differences,  achievement  motivation,  the  behav- 
ioral effect  of  hormones  and  women  in  therapy.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  10. 

48-49    PRACTICUM  IN  PSYCHOLOGY 

An  off-campus  involvement  in  the  application  of  psychological  skills  and 
principles  in  institutional  settings.  The  experience  includes  training  in 
behavior  modification  and  traditional  counseling  techniques  as  applied  in 
prisons,  mental  health  centers  and  schools  for  the  mentally  retarded. 
Classroom  training  focuses  on  various  therapeutic  techniques  and  on 
students'  understanding  of  themselves  in  the  counselor  role.  Prerequisite: 
consent  of  instructor. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Internships  give  students  an  opportunity  to  relate  on-campus  academic 
experiences  to  society  in  general  and  to  their  post-baccalaureate  objectives 
in  particular.  Students  have,  for  example,  worked  in  prisons,  public  and 
private  schools,  county  government  and  for  the  American  Red  Cross. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Independent  Study  is  an  opportunity  for  students  to  pursue  special 
interests  in  areas  for  which  courses  are  not  offered.  In  addition,  students 
have  an  opportunity  to  study  a  topic  in  more  depth  than  is  possible  in  the 
regular  classroom  situation.  Studies  in  the  past  have  included  child  abuse, 
counseling  of  hospital  patients  and  research  in  the  psychology  of  natural 
disasters. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 

Honors  in  Psychology  requires  original  contributions  to  the  literature  of 
psychology  through  independent  study.  The  most  recent  honors  project  was 
a  study  of  the  relationship  between  socio-economic  status  and  visual  vs. 
auditory  learning. 


119 


RELIGION 

Professor:  Guerra 

Associate  Professor:  Hughes  (Chairman) 

Assistant  Professor:  Robinson 

A  major  consists  of  10  courses  including  11,  12,  13  and  14.  At  least  seven  courses 
must  be  taken  in  the  department.  The  following  courses  may  be  counted  toward 
fulfilling  the  major  requirements:  Greek  11  and  12,  Hebrew  11  and  12,  History 
39  and  41,  Philosophy  32  and  Sociology  33. 

11  DEATH  AND  DYING 

A  study  of  death  from  personal,  social  and  universal  standpoints  with 
emphasis  upon  what  the  dying  may  teach  the  living.  Principal  issues  are  the 
stages  of  dying,  bereavement,  suicide,  funeral  conduct  and  the  religious 
doctrines  of  death  and  immortality.  Course  includes,  as  optional,  practical 
projects  with  terminal  patients  under  professional  supervision. 

12  RELIGION  AND  THE  SPIRIT  OF  SCIENCE 

A  comparison  of  the  approaches  taken  by  religion  and  science  toward  such 
topics  as:  evolution,  psychic  phenomena,  primitive  creation  myths,  modern 
astronomy,  depth  psychology  and  the  concept  of  "revelation."  The  role  of 
"faith,"  "fact"  and  "intuition"  in  each  discipline  will  be  examined.  Scien- 
tists, engineers  and  technicians  will  be  invited  to  share  their  views  informal- 
ly with  the  class. 

13  OLD  TESTAMENT  FAITH  AND  HISTORY 

A  critical  examination  of  the  literature  within  its  historical  setting  and  in  the 
light  of  archeological  findings  to  show  the  faith  and  religious  life  of  the 
Hebrew-Jewish  community  in  the  biblical  period,  and  an  introduction  to  the 
history  of  interpretation  with  an  emphasis  on  contemporary  Old  Testament 
criticism  and  theology. 

14  NEW  TESTAMENT  FAITH  AND  HISTORY 

A  critical  examination  of  the  literature  within  its  historical  setting  to  show 
the  faith  and  religious  life  of  the  Christian  community  in  the  biblical  period, 
and  an  introduction  to  the  history  of  interpretation  with  an  emphasis  on 
contemporary  New  Testament  criticism  and  theology. 

22  PROTESTANTISM  IN  THE  MODERN  WORLD 

An  examination  of  changing  Protestant  thought  and  life  from  Luther  to  the 
present  against  the  backdrop  of  a  culture  rapidly  changing  from  the  17th 
Century  scientific  revolution  to  Marxism,  Darwinism  and  depth  psy- 
chology. Special  attention  will  be  paid  to  the  constant  interaction  between 
Protestantism  and  the  world  in  which  it  finds  itself. 

23  AFRICAN  RELIGIONS 

An  examination  of  the  integrated  life  of  the  Black  man  in  Africa  before  it  was 
altered  by  Western  imperialism.  We  will  emphasize  the  "religious"  side  of 
the  African's  life,  examining  the  way  in  which  it  is  interwoven  with  his  daily 

120 


activities  from  before  his  birth  to  after  his  death.  Some  attention  will  be 
given  to  Western  influences  on  this  traditional  lifestyle. 

24  JUDAISM  AND  ISLAM 

An  examination  of  the  rise,  growth  and  expansion  of  Judaism  and  Islam 
with  special  attention  given  to  the  theological  contents  of  the  literatures  of 
these  religions  as  far  as  they  are  normative  in  matters  of  faith,  practice  and 
organization.  Also,  a  review  of  their  contributions  to  the  spiritual  heritage 
of  mankind. 

25  ORIENTAL  RELIGION 

A  phenomenological  study  of  the  basic  content  of  Hinduism,  Buddhism  and 
Chinese  Taoism  with  special  attention  to  social  and  political  relations, 
mythical  and  aesthetic  forms,  and  the  East-West  dialogue. 

28    HISTORY  AND  CULTURE  OF  THE  ANCIENT  NEAR  EAST 

A  study  of  the  history  and  culture  of  Mesopotamia,  Anatolia,  Syria- 
Palestine  and  Egypt  from  the  rise  of  the  Sumerian  culture  to  Alexander  the 
Great.  Careful  attention  will  be  given  to  the  religious  views  prevalent  in  the 
ancient  Near  East  as  far  as  these  views  interacted  with  the  culture  and  faith 
of  Biblical  man. 

30  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  RELIGION 

A  study  into  the  broad  insights  of  psychology  in  relation  to  the  phenomena 
of  religion  and  religious  behavior.  The  course  concentrates  on  religious 
experience  or  manifestations  rather  than  concepts.  Tenative  solutions  will 
be  sought  to  questions  such  as:  What  does  it  feel  like  to  be  religious  or  to 
have  a  religious  experience?  What  is  the  religious  function  in  human 
development?  How  does  one  think  psychologically  about  theological  prob- 
lems? 

31  CHRISTIAN  SOCIAL  ETHICS 

A  study  of  Christian  ethics  as  a  normative  perspective  for  contemporary 
moral  problems  with  emphasis  upon  the  interaction  of  law  and  religion, 
decision  making  in  the  field  of  biomedical  practice,  and  the  reconstruction 
ot  society  in  a  planetary  civilization. 

32  CONTEMPORARY  PROBLEMS  IN  CHRISTIAN  SOCIAL  ETHICS 

An  examination  of  the  approach  of  religion  and  other  disciplines  to  an  issue 
of  current  concern;  current  topics  include  the  theological  significance  of  law, 
the  ethics  of  love  and  the  holocaust.  The  course  may  be  repeated  for  credit. 

33  ROMAN  CATHOLIC  THOUGHT 

The  development  of  Thomism,  Neo-Thomism  and  Transcendental  Thom- 
ism;  limited  attention  given  to  pastoral  and  ecclesiological  issues  in  the  post- 
conciliar  era  after  Vatican  II. 

121 


37    BIBLICAL  TOPICS 

An  in-depth  study  of  Biblical  topics  related  to  the  Old  and  New  Testaments. 
Topics  include  prophecy,  wisdom,  literature,  the  Dead  Sea  Scrolls,  the 
teachings  of  Jesus,  Pauline  theology,  Judaism  and  Christian  origins,  redac- 
tion criticism — the  way  the  Synoptic  Gospels  and  John  give  final  form  to 
their  message.  Course  will  vary  from  year  to  year  and  may  be  taken  for  credit  a 
second  time  if  the  topic  is  different  from  one  previously  studied. 

41  CONTEMPORARY  RELIGIOUS  ISSUES 

A  study  of  the  theological  significance  of  some  contemporary  intellectual 
developments  in  western  culture.  The  content  of  this  course  will  vary  from 
year  to  year.  Subjects  studied  in  recent  years  include:  the  theological 
significance  of  Freud,  Marx  and  Nietzsche;  Christianity  and  existentialism; 
theology  and  depth  psychology,  the  religious  dimension  of  contemporary 
literature. 

42  THE  NATURE  AND  MISSION  OF  THE  CHURCH 

A  study  of  the  nature  of  the  church  as  "The  People  of  God"  with  reference 
to  the  Biblical,  Protestant,  Orthodox  and  Roman  Catholic  traditions. 

43  THE  EDUCATIONAL  MINISTRY  OF  THE  CHURCH 

A  study  of  religious  education  as  a  function  of  the  church  with  special 
attention  given  to  the  nature  and  objectives  of  Christian  education,  methods 
of  teaching  religion  and  the  relations  between  faith  and  learning. 

46     BIBLE,  ARCHEOLOGY  AND  FAITH 

A  study  of  the  role  of  archeology  in  reconstructing  the  world  in  which  the 
Biblical  literature  originated  with  special  attention  given  to  archeological 
results  that  throw  light  on  the  clarification  of  the  Biblical  text.  Also,  an 
introduction  to  basic  archeological  method  and  a  study  in  depth  of  several 
representative  excavations  along  with  the  artifacts  and  material  culture 
recovered  from  different  historical  periods. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Interns  in  religion  usually  work  in  local  churches  under  the  supervision  of 
the  pastor  and  a  member  of  the  faculty. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Current  study  areas  are  in  the  biblical  languages,  New  Testament  theology, 
comparative  religions  and  the  ethics  of  technology. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 

A  recent  project  was  on  the  theology  of  hope  with  reference  to  the  thought 
of  Ernst  Bloch  and  Alfred  North  Whitehead. 


122 


SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY 

Professor:  McCrary 

Associate  Professor:  Wilk 

Assistant  Professor:  Jo  (Chairman),  McGuire,  Strauser 

Part-time  Instructor:  Slotter 

A  major  consists  of  Sociology- Anthropology  10,  14,  16,  44,  47  and  three  other 
courses  within  the  department  with  the  exception  of  15,  23  and  40.  Religion  46 
may  also  be  counted  toward  the  major.  Sociology-Anthropology  majors  are 
encouraged  to  participate  in  the  internship  program. 

10     INTRODUCTION  TO  SOCIOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  problems,  concepts  and  methods  in  sociology  today, 
including  analysis  of  stratification,  organization  of  groups  and  institutions, 
social  movements  and  deviants  in  social  structure. 

14  INTRODUCTION  TO  ANTHROPOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  subfields  of  anthropology;  its  subject  matter, 
methodology  and  goals.  Examination  of  biological  and  cultural  evolution, 
the  fossil  evidence  for  human  evolution  and  questions  raised  in  relation  to 
human  evolution.  Other  topics  include  race,  human  nature,  primate 
behavior  and  prehistoric  cultural  development. 

15  INTRODUCTION  TO  AMERICAN  CRIMINAL  JUSTICE  SYSTEM 

An  introduction  to  the  role  of  law  enforcement,  courts  and  corrections  in  the 
administration  of  justice;  the  historical  development  of  police,  courts  and 
corrections;  jurisdiction  and  procedures  of  courts;  an  introduction  to  the 
studies,  literature  and  research  in  criminal  justice,  careers  in  criminal 
justice. 

6     CULTURAL  ANTHROPOLOGY 

An  examination  of  cultural  and  social  anthropology  designed  to  familiarize 
the  student  with  the  analytical  approaches  to  the  diverse  cultures  of  the 
world.  The  relevancy  of  cultural  anthropology  for  an  understanding  of  the 
human  condition  will  be  stressed.  Topics  to  be  covered  include:  the  nature 
of  primitive  societies  in  contrast  to  civilizations,  the  concept  of  culture  and 
cultural  relativism,  the  individual  and  culture,  the  social  patterning  of 
behavior  and  social  control,  an  anthropological  perspective  on  the  culture  of 
the  United  States. 

20  MARRIAGE  AND  THE  FAMILY 

The  history,  structure  and  functions  of  modern  American  family  life, 
emphasizing  dating,  courtship,  factors  in  marital  adjustment  and  the 
changing  status  of  family  members.  Prerequisite:  Sociology -Anthropology  10  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

21  JUVENILE  DELINQUENCY 

A  multidisciplinary  approach  to  the  study  of  the  constellation  of  factors  that 
relate  to  juvenile  delinquency  causation,  handling  the  juvenile  delinquent 

123 


in  the  criminal  justice  system,  treatment  strategies,  prevention  and  com- 
munity responsibility.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- Anthropology  10  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

22  PEOPLES  AND  CULTURES  OF  MEXICO 

Examination  of  the  diverse  cultures  of  Mesoamerica  from  preconquest 
indigenous  peoples  to  modern  Mexican  state,  including  the  rise  and  fall  of 
Aztec  and  Maya  civilization,  transformation  from  primitive  agriculturalist  to 
peasant,  concepts  of  folk  society  and  culture  of  poverty;  an  analysis  of 
contemporary  problems  of  rural  Mexico,  and  the  role  of  peasants  in  modern 
revolutionary  movements.  Offered  at  least  once  every  three  years. 

23  INTRODUCTION  TO  LAW  ENFORCEMENT 

Principles,  theories  and  doctrines  of  the  law  of  crimes,  elements  in  crime, 
analysis  of  criminal  investigation,  important  case  law.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- 
Anthropology  15  or  consent  of  instructor. 

24  RURAL  AND  URBAN  COMMUNITIES 

The  concept  of  community  is  treated  as  it  operates  and  affects  individual 
and  group  behavior  in  rural,  suburban  and  urban  settings.  Emphasis  is 
placed  upon  characteristic  institutions  and  problems  of  modern  city  life. 
Prerequisite:  Sociology -Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

26  SOCIAL  MOVEMENTS 

An  analysis  of  the  dynamics,  structure  and  reaction  to  social  movements 
with  focus  on  contemporary  social  movements.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- 
Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

27  SOCIALIZATION  THROUGH  THE  LIFE  SPAN 

Examination  of  the  relationship  between  the  individual  and  society  in  the 
development  of  behavior  potentials  of  groups  and  cultures.  The  course  will 
study  the  continual  process  of  learning  how  to  be  "human,"  which  occurs 
throughout  the  life  span.  A  cross-cultural  approach  is  utilized  to  examine 
the  process  of  acquisition  of  skills,  motives  and  attitudes  necessary  for  role 
performance  in  childhood  and  adolescence  with  an  emphasis  on  young 
adulthood,  adulthood,  middle  age  and  old  age.  Life  span  developmental 
theory  will  be  used  in  conjunction  with  socialization  theory  and  role  theory. 
Prerequisite:  Sociology-Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

28  AGING  AND  SOCIETY 

Analysis  of  cross-cultural  characteristics  of  the  aged  as  individuals  and  as 
members  of  groups.  Emphasis  is  placed  upon  variables:  health,  housing, 
socio-economic  status,  personal  adjustment,  retirement  and  social  partici- 
pation. Sociological,  social  psychological  and  anthropological  frames  of 
reference  utilized  in  analysis  and  description  of  aging  and  its  relationship  to 
society,  culture  and  personality. 

29  20TH  CENTURY  CHINESE  SOCIETY 

An  analysis  of  the  interaction  between  the  individual  and  society  under- 

124 


going  rapid  social  change  in  the  Chinese  cultural  context.  Topics  include 
Confucian  examination  system  and  social  mobility,  the  traditional  Chinese 
village  and  family,  origins  of  Chinese  Marxism  and  how  it  has  been 
implemented  in  social  institutions  of  The  People's  Republic  of  China. 
Alternate  years. 

30  CRIMINOLOGY 

Analysis  of  the  sociology  of  law,  conditions  under  which  criminal  laws 
develop,  etiology  of  crime,  epidemiology  of  crime,  including  explanation  of 
statistical  distribution  of  criminal  behavior  in  terms  of  time,  space  and  social 
location.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

31  SOCIOLOGY  OF  WOMEN 

A  sociological  examination  of  the  role  of  women  in  American  society 
through  an  analysis  of  the  social  institutions  which  affect  their  develop- 
ment. Role  analysis  theory  will  be  applied  to  the  past,  present  and  future 
experience  of  women  as  it  relates  to  the  role  options  of  society  as  a  whole. 
Students  will  do  an  original  research  project  on  the  role  of  women. 
Prerequisite:  Sociology-Anthropology  10.  Alternate  years. 

32  INSTITUTIONS 

Introduces  the  student  to  the  sociological  concept  of  social  institution,  the 
types  of  social  institutions  to  be  found  in  all  societies  and  the  interrela- 
tionships between  the  social  institutions  within  a  society.  The  course  is 
divided  into  two  basic  parts:  1.  That  aspect  which  deals  with  the  systematic 
organization  of  society  in  general,  and  2.  The  concentration  on  a  particular 
social  institution:  economic,  political,  educational  or  social  welfare.  Prere- 
quisite: Sociology -Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

33  SOCIOLOGY  OF  RELIGION 

An  examination  of  the  major  theories  of  the  relationship  of  religion  to 
society  and  a  survey  of  sociological  studies  of  religious  behavior.  Prere- 
quisite: Sociology- Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

34  RACIAL  AND  CULTURAL  MINORITIES 

Study  of  racial,  cultural  and  national  groups  within  the  framework  of 
American  cultural  values.  An  analysis  will  include  historical,  cultural  and 
social  factors  underlying  ethnic  and  racial  conflict.  Field  trips  and  individual 
reports  are  part  of  the  requirements  for  the  course.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- 
Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

35  CULTURE  AND  PERSONALITY 

Introduction  to  psychological  anthropology,  its  theories  and  method- 
ologies. Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  the  relationship  between  individual  and 
culture,  national  character,  cognition  and  culture,  culture  and  mental 
disorders  and  cross-cultural  considerations  of  the  concept  of  self.  Prere- 
quisite: Sociology -Anthropology  16  or  consent  of  instructor.  Offered  at  least  once 
every  three  years. 

125 


36  THE  ANTHROPOLOGY  OF  PRIMITIVE  RELIGIONS 

The  course  will  familiarize  the  student  with  the  wealth  of  anthropological 
data  on  the  religions  and  world  views  developed  by  primitive  peoples.  The 
functions  of  primitive  religion  in  regard  to  the  individual,  society  and 
various  cultural  institutions  will  be  examined.  Subjects  to  be  surveyed 
include  myth,  witchcraft,  vision  quests,  spirit  possession,  the  cultural  use  of 
dreams  and  revitalization  movements.  Particular  emphasis  will  be  given  to 
shamanism,  transcultural  religious  experience  and  the  creation  of  cultural 
realities  through  religions.  Both  a  social  scientific  and  existentialist  per- 
spective will  be  employed.  Prerequisite:  Sociology-Anthropology  16  or  consent  of 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

37  THE  ANTHROPOLOGY  OF  AMERICAN  INDIANS 

An  ethnographic  survey  of  native  North  American  Indian  and  Eskimo 
cultures,  such  as  the  Iroquois,  Plains  Indians,  Pueblos,  Kwakiutl  and 
Netsilik.  Changes  in  native  lifeways  due  to  European  contacts  and  United 
States  expansion  will  be  considered.  Recent  cultural  developments  among 
American  Indians  will  be  placed  in  an  anthropological  perspective.  Offered 
at  least  once  every  three  years. 

38  LEGAL  AND  POLITICAL  ANTHROPOLOGY 

The  course  is  designed  to  familiarize  the  student  with  the  techniques  of 
conflict  resolution  and  the  utilization  of  public  power  in  primitive  society  as 
well  as  the  various  theories  of  primitive  law  and  government.  The  rise  of  the 
state  and  an  anthropological  perspective  on  modern  law  and  government 
will  be  included.  The  concepts  of  self- regulation  and  social  control,  legit- 
imacy, coercion  and  exploitation  will  be  the  organizing  focus.  Prerequisite: 
Sociology -Anthropology  16  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

39  THE  AMERICAN  PRISON  SYSTEM 

Nature  and  history  of  punishment,  evolution  of  the  prison  and  prison 
methods  with  emphasis  on  prison  community,  prison  architecture,  institu- 
tional programs,  inmate  rights  and  sentences.  Review  of  punishment  vs. 
treatment,  detention  facilities,  jails,  reformatories,  prison  organization  and 
administration,  custody  and  discipline.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- Anthropology 
15. 

40  PROBATION  AND  PAROLE 

A  course  designed  for  the  advanced  criminal  justice  major.  While  the  course 
concerns  the  study  of  probation  and  parole  as  parts  of  the  criminal  justice 
system  and  their  impact  on  the  system  as  a  whole,  the  primary  emphasis  is 
the  impact  on  the  offender.  Particular  attention  is  given  to  diagnostic  report 
writing  on  offenders,  pre-sentence  investigation,  offender  classification  and 
parole  planning.  Prerequisites:  Sociology-Anthropology  15  and  39.  Alternate 
years. 

41  SOCIAL  STRATIFICATION 

An  analysis  of  stratification  systems  with  specific  reference  to  American 
society.  The  course  will  include  an  analysis  of  poverty,  wealth  and  power  in 
the  United  States.    Particular  attention  will  be  given   to  factors  which 

126 


generate  and  maintain  inequality,  along  with  the  impacts  of  inequality  on 
the  lives  of  Americans.  Prerequisite:  Sociology-Anthropology  10  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

42  INTRODUCTION  TO  SOCIAL  WORK 

Consideration  of  basic  social  work  concepts,  principles  and  techniques  of 
interviewing,  individual  case  work,  group  work  and  community  organiza- 
tion, development  of  skills  and  techniques  of  social  work  applied  to  the 
correctional  setting.  Prerequisite:  Sociology-Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  in- 
structor. 

43  ALTERNATIVE  LIFE  STYLES 

Analysis  of  new  life  styles  in  American  society:  life  styles  of  minority  groups 
and  others  who  are  considered  by  society  to  be  nonconforming.  Examina- 
tion of  the  challenges  to  conformity  and  ramifications  of  nonconformity  in 
American  society.  Will  include  an  inquiry  into  behavior  which  has  his- 
torically been  labeled  deviant,  covering  such  topics  as:  mental  illness, 
addiction  to  alcohol  and  narcotics,  homosexuality  and  prostitution.  Prere- 
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

44  SOCIAL  THEORY 

The  history  of  the  development  of  sociological  thought  from  its  earliest 
philosophical  beginnings  is  treated  through  discussions  and  reports.  Em- 
phasis  is   placed   upon   sociological   thought   since   the   time  of  Comte. 

Prerequisite:  Sociology -Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

45  ANTHROPOLOGICAL  THEORY 

The  history  of  the  development  of  anthropological  thought  from  the  18th 
Century  to  the  present.  Emphasis  is  placed  upon  anthropological  thought 
since  1850.  Topics  include  evolutionism,  historical-particularism,  cultural 
idealism,  cultural  materialism,  functionalism,  structuralism  and 
ethnoscence.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- Anthropology  16  or  consent  of  instructor. 
Offered  at  least  once  every  three  years. 

46  PEOPLE  AND  CULTURES  OF  THE  AMERICAN  SOUTHWEST 

Field  experience  in  the  analysis  of  tri-cultural  communities  of  Northern 
New  Mexico,  Southern  Colorado  and  Northeastern  Arizona,  including  the 
Eastern  Pueblos  of  New  Mexico,  Zuni  Navajo  and  Apache  reservations, 
isolated  Spanish-American  mountain  villages  of  Northern  New  Mexico, 
religious  ashrams  and  communes,  and  cities  of  the  Southwest  and  Juarez, 
Mexico.  Emphasis  upon  Taos,  Rio  Arriba,  Santa  Fe  and  Los  Alamos 
counties  of  New  Mexico.  Prerequisite:  Sociology  10  or  consent  of  instructor.  May 
or  summer  only. 

47  RESEARCH  METHODS  IN  SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY 

Study  of  the  research  process  in  sociology-anthropology.  Attention  is  given 
to  the  process  of  designing  and  administerting  research  and  the  application 
of  research.  Different  methodological  skills  are  considered,  including  field 
work,  questionnaire  construction  and  other  methods  of  data  gathering  and 
the  analysis  of  data.  Prerequisite:  Sociology-Anthropology  10  and  Mathematics  13 
or  consent  of  instructor. 

127 


48-49    PRACTICUM  IN  SOCIOLOGY 

Introduces  the  student  to  a  practical  work  experience  involving  community 
agencies  in  order  to  effect  a  synthesis  of  the  student's  academic  course  work 
and  its  practical  applications  in  a  community  agency.  Specifics  of  the  course 
to  be  worked  out  in  conjunction  with  department,  student  and  agency. 
Prerequisite:  Sociology- Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Interns  in  sociology-anthropology  typically  work  off  campus  with  social 
service  agencies  under  the  supervision  of  administrators.  However,  other 
internship  experiences,  such  as  with  the  Lycoming  County  Historical 
Museum,  are  available. 

Interns  in  criminal  justice  work  off  campus  in  criminal  justice  agencies, 
such  as  penal  insitutions  and  probation  and  parole  departments,  under  the 
supervision  of  administrative  personnel. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

An  opportunity  to  pursue  specific  interests  and  topics  not  usually  covered 
in  regular  courses.  Through  a  program  of  readings  and  tutorials,  the 
student  will  have  the  opportunity  to  pursue  these  interests  and  topics  in 
greater  depth  than  is  usually  possible  in  a  regular  course. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 


128 


THEATRE 

Professor:  Falk  (Chairman) 
Associate  Professor:  G.  Dartt 
Part-rime  Instructor:  B.  Dartt 

The  major  consists  of  eight  courses,  except  Theatre  1,  wth  a  concentration  in 
acting,  directing  or  design.  The  fine  arts  requirement  may  be  satisfied  by 
selecting  any  two  courses,  except  Theatre  1.  In  addition  to  the  departmental 
requirements,  majors  are  urged  to  include  courses  in  art,  music,  psychology  and 
English. 

1     FUNDAMENTALS  OF  ORAL  COMMUNICATION 

The  dynamics  of  oral  communication.  The  development  of  elementary 
principles  of  simple  oral  communication  through  lectures,  prepared  assign- 
ments in  speaking  and  informal  class  exercises.  Utilizes  video  tape  se- 
quences for  "instant  feedback"  to  students. 

10  INTRODUCTION  TO  THEATRE 

Designed  as  a  comprehensive  introduction  to  the  aesthetics  of  theatre.  From 
the  spectator's  point  of  view,  the  nature  of  theatre  will  be  explored, 
including  dramatic  literature  and  the  integrated  functioning  of  acting, 
directing  and  all  production  aspects. 

11  INTRODUCTION  TO  FILM 

A  basic  course  in  understanding  the  film  medium.  The  class  will  investigate 
film  technique  through  lectures  and  by  viewing  regular  weekly  films  chosen 
from  classic,  contemporary  and  experimental  short  films. 

12  HISTORY  OF  THEATRE  I 

A  detailed  study  of  the  development  of  theatre  from  the  Greeks  to  the 
Restoration.  Alternate  years. 

13  HISTORY  OF  THEATRE  II 

The  history  of  the  theatre  from  1660.  Alternate  years. 

14  ORAL  INTERPRETATION  OF  LITERATURE 

The  fundamental  principles  and  methods  of  oral  reading  and  the  interpreta- 
tion of  literature  are  introduced.  Materials  will  be  chosen  from  poetry, 
prose,  the  novel  and  drama.  Alternate  years. 

15  PLAYWRITING  AND  DRAMATIC  CRITICISM 

An  investigation  of  the  techniques  of  playwriting  with  an  emphasis  on 
creative  writing,  culminating  in  a  written  one-act  play,  plus  an  historical 
survey  of  dramatic  criticism  from  Aristotle  to  the  present  with  emphasis 
upon  developing  the  student's  ability  to  write  reviews  and  criticism  of 
theatrical  productions  and  films.  Alternate  years. 

129 


18     PLAY  PRODUCTION  FOR  COMMUNITY  AND  SECONDARY  SCHOOLS 

Stagecraft  and  the  various  other  aspects  of  play  production  are  introduced. 
Through  material  presented  in  the  course  and  laboratory  work  on  the  Arena 
Theatre  stage,  the  student  will  acquire  experience  to  produce  theatrical 
scenery  for  community  and  secondary  school  theatre. 

24    INTRODUCTION  TO  ACTING 

An  introductory  study  of  the  actor's  preparation  with  emphasis  on  develop- 
ing the  actor's  creative  imagination  through  improvisations  and  scene 
study. 

26    INTRODUCTION  TO  DIRECTING 

An  introductory  study  of  the  function  of  the  director  in  preparation, 
rehearsal  and  performance.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  developing  the  student's 
ability  to  analyze  scripts,  and  on  the  development  of  the  student's  imagina- 
tion. 

28  INTRODUCTION  TO  SCENE  DESIGN  AND  STAGECRAFT 

An  introduction  to  the  theatre  with  an  emphasis  on  stagecraft.  The 
productions  each  semester  serve  as  the  laboratory  to  provide  the  practical 
experience  necessary  to  understand  the  material  presented  in  the 
classroom. 

29  MARIONETTE  PRODUCTION 

Introduces  the  construction,  costuming  and  performing  of  a  play  through 
the  medium  of  string  puppets.  Alternate  years. 

31     ADVANCED  TECHNIQUES  OF  PLAY  PRODUCTION 

A  detailed  consideration  of  the  interrelated  problems  and  techniques  of  play 
analysis,  production  styles  and  design.  Offered  summer  only. 

34  INTERMEDIATE  STUDIO:  ACTING 

Instruction  and  practice  in  character  analysis  and  projection  with  emphasis 
on  vocal  and  body  techniques. 

35  THEORIES  OF  THE  MODERN  THEATRE 

An  advanced  course  exploring  the  philosophical  roots  of  the  modern  theatre 
from  the  birth  of  realism  to  the  present  and  the  influences  on  modern 
theatre  practice.  Selected  readings  from  Nietzsche,  Marx,  Jung,  Freud, 
Whitehead,  Kierkegaard,  Sartre,  Camus,  Antoine,  Copeau,  Stanislavski, 
Shaw,  Meyerhold,  Artaud,  Brecht,  Brook,  Grotowski.  Alternate  years. 

36  INTERMEDIATE  STUDIO:  DIRECTING 

Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  student's  ability  to  function  in  preparation  and 
rehearsal.  Practical  experience  involves  the  directing  of  two  one-act  plays 
from  the  contemporary  theatre. 

130 


38     INTERMEDIATE  STUDIO:  SCENE  AND  LIGHTING  DESIGN 

The  theory  of  stage  and  lighting  design  with  emphasis  on  their  practical 
application  to  the  theatre. 

40     MASTERS  OF  WORLD  DRAMA 

An  intensive  and  detailed  analysis  of  the  plays  and  related  works,  including 
criticism  of  great  authors  that  have  shaped  world  theatre.  Authors  to  be 
selected  on  the  basis  of  interest  of  students  and  faculty.  At  times,  more  than 
one  author  will  be  treated  in  a  term.  Ibsen,  Brecht,  Moliere,  Williams, 
Albee.  Alternate  years.  May  be  accepted  toward  English  major  with  consent  of 
English  department. 

42  ADVANCED  STUDIO:  COSTUME  DESIGN 

The  theory  of  costuming  for  the  stage,  elements  of  design,  planning, 
production  and  construction  of  costumes  for  the  theatre.  Students  will 
participate  in  the  design  of  a  production. 

43  ADVANCED  STUDIO:  PROPERTIES  DESIGN 

The  theory  of  properties  design  for  the  stage,  including  the  production  of 
specific  properties  for  staging  use.  Elements  of  design,  fabrication  and  the 
construction  of  properties  employing  a  variety  of  materials  and  the  applica- 
tion of  new  theatrical  technology. 

44  ADVANCED  STUDIO:  ACTING 

Preparation  of  monologues  and  two-character  scenes,  contemporary  and 
classical.  The  student  will  appear  in  major  campus  productions. 

46    ADVANCED  STUDIO:  DIRECTING 

Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  the  student's  ability  to  produce  a  major  three- 
act  play  from  the  script  to  the  stage  for  public  performance. 

48    ADVANCED  STUDIO:  DESIGN 

Independent  work  in  conceptual  and  practical  design.  The  student  will 
design  one  full  production  as  his  major  project. 

70-79    INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Interns  in  theatre  work  off  campus  in  theatres  such  as  the  Guthrie  Theatre, 
Minneapolis,  and  at  the  New  Jersey  Shakespeare  Festival. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Some  recent  independent  studies  have  been  the  roles  of  women  as 
characters  in  drama,  scene  design  and  lighting  design  for  an  Arena 
production. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 
A  typical  study  could  be  the  writing  and  production  of  an  original  play. 

131 


CHAPTER  VII 
COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 


BOARD  OF  TRUSTEES 

OFFICERS 

W.  Gibbs  McKenney,  LL.D Chairman 

Nathan  W.  Stuart,  J.D Vice  Chairman 

Paul  G.  Gilmore  Secretary 

William  L .  Baker Treasurer 

Fred  A.  Pennington,  LL.D Chairman  Emeritus 

HONORARY  TRUSTEES 

Bishop  Hermann  W.  Kaebnick,  D.D.,  L.H.D.,  LL.D Hershey 

Ralph  E.  Kelchner Jersey  Shore 

Arnold  A.  Phipps,  II Williamsport 

Mrs.  Donald  G.  Remley Williamsport 

George  L.  Stearns,  II Williamsport 


TRUSTEES 

Term  Expires  1981 
Elected 

1978         Howard  C.  Beach Sarasota,  FL 

1969         Samuel  H.  Evert Bloomsburg 

1972        The  Rev.  Brian  A.  Fetterman Harrisburg 

1978        Harold  D.  Hershberger,  Jr Williamsport 

1969        Kenneth  E.  Himes Williamsport 

1978        John  C.  Lundy Williamsport 

1978        Ms.  Onalee  R.  Sabin Elmira,  NY 

(Alumni  Representative) 

1978        John  Y.  Schreyer Little  Falls,  NJ 

1978         M.  L.  Sharrah,  Ph.D New  Canaan,  CT 

1972        Harold  H.  Shreckengast,  Jr Jenkintown 


Term  Expires  1982 
Elected 

1979  David  Y.  Brouse  Williamsport 

1951  Paul  G.  Gilmore Williamsport 

1978  Mrs.  Robert  B.  Jones  Caledonia,  NY 

1973  Robert  G.  Little,  M.D Harrisburg 

1979  David  J.  Loomis,  Ph.D Troy 

(Alumni  Representative) 

1964  W.  Gibbs  McKenney,  LL.D Baltimore,  MD 

1973  G.  Jackson  Miller Altoona 

1958  Fred  A.  Pennington,  LL.D Mechanicsburg 

1979  The  Rev.  Walter  M.  Schell  Montoursville 

1961  The  Rev.  Wallace  F.  Stettler,  HH.D Kingston 

132 


COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 

Term  Expires  1983 
Elected 

1980  Richard  W.  DeWald Montoursville 

1974  Daniel  G.  Fultz  Pittsford,  NY 

1980  David  M.  Heiney,  Ed.D Hughesville 

(Alumni  Representative) 

1965  James  G.  Law,  D.  Text.  Sci Bloomsburg 

1970  John  E.  Person,  Jr Williamsport 

1965  Hon.  Herman  T.  Schneebeli Williamsport 

1972  Donald  E.  Shearer,  M.D Montoursville 

1961  Nathan  W.  Stuart,  J.D Williamsport 

1971  Willis  W.  Willard,  III,  M.D Hershey 

1958  W.  Russell  Zacharias  Allentown 


133 


COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 

ADMINISTRATIVE  STAFF 

FREDERICK  E.  BLUMER  (1976)  President 

B.A.,  Millsapis  College;  B.D.,  Ph.D.,  Emory  University 
SHIRLEY  VAN  MARTER  (1979)  Dean  of  the  College 

B.A.,  Mundelein  College;  M.A.,  Northwestern  University 

M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Chicago 
WILLIAM  L.  BAKER  (1965)  Treasurer 

B.S.,  Lycoming  College 
JACK  C.  BUCKLE  (1957)  Dean  of  Student  Services 

A.B.,  Juniata  College;  M.S.,  Syracuse  University 
GEORGE  P.  FLrNT  (1977) Director  of  Institutional  Relations 

A.B.,  Bowdoin  College;  A.M.,  P.D.,  Columbia  University 
JOHN  W.  BETLYON  (1980) Campus  Minister 

B.A.,  Bucknell  University;  S.T.M.,  Ph.D.,  Harvard  University 

RUSSELL  A.  BLOODGOOD  (1969)  Manager  of  Food  Services 

DALE  V.  BOWER  (1968) Director  of  Alumni  Affairs 

B.S.,  Lycoming  College;  B.D.,  United  Theological  Seminary 
CLARENCE  W.  BURCH  (1962) Director  of  Athletics 

B.S,  M.Ed.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 
LOUISE  A.  CALIGIURI  (1978)  Assistant  Dean  of  Student  Services 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Duquesne  University 
PHILIP  D.  CHRISTMAN  (1979) Assistant  Dean  of  Admissions 

B.A.,  Bloomsburg  State  College 
ROBERT  L.  CURRY,  JR.  (1972) Assistant  in  Athletics 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College 
DEBRA  A.  D'AGUILLO  (1976) Associate  Dean  of  Student  Services 

B.A.,  SUNY  at  Binghamton;  M.S.,  SUNY  at  Albany; 

Ed.S.,  SUNY  at  Albany 
ROBERT  A.  DOYLE  (1978) Director  of  Admissions 

B.A.,  Juniata  College 

ROBERT  L.  EDDINGER  (1967)  Director  of  Buildings  &  Grounds 

ROBERT  J.  GLUNK  (1965) Registrar  and  Assistant  to  the  Dean 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College;  M.A.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
THOMAS  J.  HENNINGER  (1966) Director  of  Computer  Services 

B.S.,  Wake  Forest  College;  M.A.,  University  of  Kansas 
MARY  E.  HERRING  (1978)  Assistant  Director  of  Admissions 

B.A.,  Albright  College 
RICHARD  A.  HUGHES  (1970) Chaplain  of  the  College 

B.A.,  Indiana  Central  College;  S.T.B.,  Ph.D.,  Boston  University 
HAROLD  H.  HUTSON  (1969) President  Emeritus 

B.A.,  LL.D.,  Wofford  College;  B.D.,  Duke  University 

Ph.D.,  University  of  Chicago;  L.H.D.,  Ohio  Wesleyan  University 
DOUGLAS  J.  KEIPER  (1970) Assistant  Director  of  Admissions 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College;  M.Ed.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
WELLES  B.  LOBB  (1980)  Assistant  Director  of  Public  Relations 

B.S.,  Mansfield  State  College 
JACK  D.  MURPHY  (1978) Systems  Analyst 

B.S.,  M.S.  Drexel  University 
BETTY  J.  PARIS  (1963) Recorder 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College 

134 


COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 

JULIANN  T.  PAWLAK  (1979) Director  of  Student  Financial  Aid 

B.A.,  Lycoming  College;  M.A.,  Bucknell  University 
WILLIAM  H.  RUPP  (1979) Director  of  Public  Relations 

B.A.,  M.A.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 

DOROTHY  ).  STREETER  (1946) Book  Store  Manager 

BETTY  JUNE  SW ANGER  (1961) Director  of  Accounting  Services 

CHARLES  E.  WEYANT  (1971) Director  of  Library  Services 

B.A.,  The  American  University;  M.S.,  Simmons  College 
THOMAS  P.  WOZNIAK  (1979) Assistant  Dean  of  Student  Services 

B.A.,  Merrimack  College;  M.Ed.,  Worcester  State  College 
RALPH  E.  ZEIGLER,  JR.  (1980) Assistant  Director  of  Admissions 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College;  M.A.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 


MEDICAL  STAFF 

FREDERIC  C.  LECHNER,  M.D College  Physician 

B.S.,  Franklin  and  Marshall  College; 

M.D.,  Jefferson  Medical  College 
RICHARD  MAYS,  M.D Psychiatrist 

B.A.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University; 

M.D.,  Jefferson  Medical  College 
ROBERT  S.  YASUI,  M.D College  Surgeon 

M.D.,  Temple  University 
EMALINE  W.  DEIBERT,  R.N College  Nurse 

Williamsport  Hospital  School  of  Nursing 
EVELYN  L.  SEAMAN,  R.N College  Nurse 

Williamsport  Hospital  School  of  Nursing 


UNITED  CAMPUS  MINISTRY 

ROGER  ALLING,  JR.  (1978) Chaplain  to  Episcopal  Students 

B.A.,  Kenyon  College;  B.Ltt.,  Diploma  in  Theology,  Oxford  University 
PETER  S.  ELY  (1978) Chaplain  to  Baptist  Students 

B.S.,  Muhlenberg  College;  M.Div.,  Vanderbilt  University 
JAMES  W.  GRUBB  (1977) Chaplain  to  United  Methodist  Students 

A.B.,  Albright  College;  M.Div.,  United  Theological  Seminary 
DALE  E.  JOHNSON  (1978) Chaplain  to  Lutheran  Students 

B.A.,  Thiel  College;  M.Div.,  Lutheran  Theological  Seminary 
DAVID  L.  REED  (1977) Chaplain  to  United  Methodist  Students 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College;  M.Div.,  United  Theological  Seminary 
WILLIAM  J.  RUMSEY  (1978) Chaplain  to  Presbyterian  Students 

B.A.,  Maryville  College;  M.Div.,  Pittsburgh  Theological  Seminary 
DERWOOD  A.  STRUNK,  JR.  (1977)  ..  Chaplain  to  United  Methodist  Students 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College;  M.Div.,  Lancaster  Theological  Seminary 
JOHN  J.  TAMALIS  (1976) Chaplain  to  Roman  Catholic  Students 

B.S.,  University  of  Scran  ton 


135 


COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 

FACULTY 

EMERITI 

MABEL  K.  BAUER  Professor  Emeritus  of  Chemistry 

B.S.,  Cornell  University;  M.S.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

DAVID  G .  BUSEY  Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of 

Physical  Education 

B.S.,  M.S.,  University  of  Illinois 

LEROY  F.  DERR Professor  Emeritus  of  Education 

A.B.,  Ursinus  College;  M.A.,  Bucknell  University 

Ed.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 
ROBERT  H.  EWING  Professor  Emeritus  of  History 

A.B.,  College  of  Wooster;  M.A.,  University  of  Michigan 

HH.D.,  Lycoming  College 
W.  ARTHUR  FAUS  Professor  Emeritus  of  Philosophy 

A.B.,  Dickinson  College;  S.T.B.,  Ph.D.,  Boston  University 
PHIL  G.  GILLETTE  Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Spanish 

A.B.,  Ohio  University;  M.A.,  Columbia  University 
JOHN  P.  GRAHAM  Professor  Emeritus  of  English 

Ph.B.,  Dickinson  College;  M.Ed.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 

HAROLD  W.  HAYDEN Librarian  Emeritus 

and  Professor  Emeritus  of  Library  Services 

A.B.,  Nebraska  State  Teachers  College;  B.S.,  University  of  Illinois; 

M.A.  in  L.S.,  University  of  Michigan 
GEORGE  W.  HOWE Professor  Emeritus  of  Geology 

A.B.,  M.S.,  Syracuse  University;  Ph.D.,  Cornell  Universih/ 
M.  RAYMOND  JAMISON  Assistant  Professor  Emeritus  of  Physics 

B.S.,  Ursinus  College;  M.S.,  Bucknell  University 
WALTER  G.  McIVER  Professor  Emeritus  of  Music 

Mus.B.,  Westminster  Choir  College; 

A.B.,  Bucknell  Universih/;  M.A.,  Neiv  York  Universih/ 
LORING  B.  PRIEST Professor  Emeritus  of  History 

Litt.B.,  Rutgers  Universih/;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Harvard  Universih/ 

DONALD  G.  REMLEY  Assistant  Professor  Emeritus  of 

Mathematics  and  Physics 

A.B.,  Dickinson  College;  M.A.,  Columbia  Universih/ 
MARY  LANDON  RUSSELL Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Music 

Mus.B.,  Susquehanna  Universih/  Conservatory  of  Music; 

M.A.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
LOUISE  R.  SCHAEFFER  Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Education 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College;  M.A.,  Bucknell  University 

D.Ed.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
JAMES  W.  SHEAFFER Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Music 

B.S.,  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania; 

M.S.,  Universih/  of  Pennsylvania 
FRANCES  K.  SKEATH Professor  Emeritus  of  Mathematics 

A.B.,  M.A.,  Bucknell  Universih/ 

D.Ed.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
JOHN  A.  STUART Professor  Emeritus  of  English 

B.A.,  William  Jezoell  College;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Northwestern  University 
HELEN  B.  WEIDMAN Professor  Emeritus  of  Political  Science 

A.B.,  M.A.,  Bucknell  University;  Ph.D.,  Syracuse  University 

136 


COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 
PROFESSORS 

ROBERT  F.  FALK  (1970) Theatre 

B.A.,  B.D.,  Drezv  University;  Marshal  of  the  College 

M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Wayne  State  University 

MORTON  A.  FINEMAN  (1966)  Physics 

A.B.,  Indiana  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 
EDUARDO  GUERRA  (I960)** Religion 

B.D.,  Southern  Methodist  University; 

S.T.M.,  Ph.D.,  Union  Theological  Seminary 
JOHN  G.  HANCOCK  (1967) Psychology 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Bucknell  University; 

Ph.D.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
JOHN  G.  HOLLENBACK  (1952)  Business  Administration 

B.S.,  M.B.A.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 
JAMES  K.  HUMMER  (1962)  Chemistry 

B.N.S.,  Tufts  University;  M.S.,  Middlebury  College; 

Ph.D.,  University  of  North  Carolina 
JACK  S.  McCRARY  (1969) Sociology 

B.A.,  M.A.,  Southern  Methodist  University; 

Ph.D.,  Washington  University 
ROGER  W.  OPDAHL  (1963) Economics 

A.B.,  Hofstra  University;  M.A.,  Columbia  University; 

D.Ed.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
ROBERT  W.  RABOLD  (1955) Economics 

B.A.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University; 

M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh' 
JOHN  A.  RADSPINNER  (1957) Chemistry 

B.S.,  University  of  Richmond;  M.S.,  Virginia  Polytechnic  Institute; 

D.Sc,  Carnegie-Mellon  University 
LOGAN  A.  RICHMOND  (1954) Accounting 

B.S.,  Lycoming  College;  M.B.A.,  New  York  University; 

C.P.A.,  (Pennsylvania) 
SHIRLEY  A.  VAN  MARTER  (1979) Dean  of  the  College 

B.A.,  Mundelein  College;  M.A.,  Northwestern  University;  English 

M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Chicago 


On  Sabbatical  Fall  Semester  1980-81 
On  Sabbatical  Spring  Semester  1980-81 
On  Sabbatical  Academic  Year  1980-81 


137 


COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 
ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS 

ROBERT  B.  ANGSTADT  (1967)  Biology 

B.S.,  Ursinus  College;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  Cornell  University 
CLARENCE  W.  BURCH  (1962) Physical  Education 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 
GARY  E.  DARTT  (1969) Theatre 

B.S.,  Augustana  College;  M.F.A.,  University  of  Minnesota 
BERNARD  P.  FLAM  (1963) Spanish 

A.B.,  Neiv  York  University;  M.A.,  Harvard  University; 

Ph.D.,  University  of  Wisconsin 
WILLIAM  D.  FORD  (1972) English 

B.A.,  Occidental  College;  M.A.,  M.F.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Iowa 
DAVID  A.  FRANZ  (1970)***  " Chemistry 

A.B.,  Princeton  University;  M.A.T.,  The  Johns  Hopkins  University; 

Ph.D.,  University  of  Virginia 
CHARLES  L.  GETCHELL  (1967) Mathematics 

B.S.,  University  of  Massachusetts;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Hari'ard  University 
ERNEST  D.  GIGLIO  (1972)*  Political  Science 

B.A.,  Queens  College;  M.A.,  SUNY  at  Albany; 

Ph.D.,  Syracuse  University 
STEPHEN  R.  GRIFFITH  (1970)  Philosophy 

A.B.,  Cornell  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 
DAVID  K.  HALEY  (1980)" ' Mathematics 

B.A.,  Acadia  University;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  Queen's  University 
JOHN  R.  HUBBARD  (1975) * Mathematics 

A.B.,  University  of  Rochester;  A.M.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Michigan 
RICHARD  A.  HUGHES  (1970) Religion 

B.A.,  Indiana  Central  College;  S.T.B.,  Ph.D.,  Boston  University 
EMILY  R.  JENSEN  (1969) English 

B.A.,  Jamestown  College;  M.A.,  University  of  Denver; 

Ph.D.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
FORREST  E.  KEESBURY  (1970)    Education 

B.S.,  Defiance  College;  M.A.,  Bowling  Green  State  University; 

Ed.D.,  Lehigh  University 
ROBERT  H.  LARSON  (1969) History 

B.A.,  The  Citadel;  M. A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Virginia 
PAUL  A.  MacKENZIE  (1970) ' German 

A.B.,  A.M.,  Ph.D.,  Boston  University 
GERTRUDE  B.  MADDEN  (1958) English 

A.B.,  University  of  Pennsylvania;  M.A.,  Bucknell  University 
ROBERT  J.  B.  MAPLES  (1969) French 

A.B.,  University  of  Rochester;  Ph.D.,  Yale  University 
JOHN  F.  PIPER,  JR.  (1969) History 

A.B.,  Lafayette  College;  B.D.,  Yale  University;  Ph.D.,  Duke  University 
DAVID  J.  RIFE  (1970) English 

B.A.,  University  of  Florida; 

M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Southern  Illinois  University 
MICHAEL  G.  ROSKIN  (1972) Political  Science 

A.B.,  University  of  California  at  Berkeley; 

M.A.,  University  of  California  at  Los  Angeles; 

Ph.D.,  The  American  University 

138 


COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 

ROGER  D.  SHIPLEY  (1967) Art 

B.A.,  Otterbein  College;  M.F.A.,  Cranbrook  Academy  of  Art 

STANLEY  T.  WILK  (1973)**  Anthropology 

B.A.,  Hunter  College;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 


ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS 

SUSAN  K.  BEIDLER  (1975) Library  Services 

B.A.,  University  of  Delaware;  M.L.S.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 
HOWARD  C.  BERTHOLD,  JR.  (1976) Psychology 

B.A.,  Franklin  and  Marshall  College;  M.A.,  The  University  of  Iowa; 

Ph.D.,  The  University  of  Massachusetts 
GARY  M.  BOERCKEL  (1979) Music 

B.M.,  Oberlin  College;  M.M.,  Ohio  University; 

D.M.A.,  University  of  Iowa 
JON  R.  BOGLE  (1976) Art 

B.F.A.,  B.S.,  M.F.A.,  Tyler  School  of  Art,  Temple  University 
JOHN  H.  CONRAD  (1959)" Education 

B.S.,  Mansfield  State  College;  M.A.,  Nezo  York  University 
JACK  D.  DIEHL,  JR.  (1971) Biology 

B.S.,  M.A.,  Sam  Houston  State  College; 

M.S.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Connecticut 
RICHARD  R.  ERICKSON"(1973)  Astronomy  and  Physics 

B.A.,  University  of  Minnesota;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Chicago 
EDWARD  G.  GABRIEL  (1977) Biology 

B.A.,  M.S.,  Alfred  University;  Ph.D.,  The  Ohio  State  University 
FRED  L.  GROGAN  (1977)  Political  Science 

A.B.,  Bates  College;  M.A.  Arizona  State  University; 

Ph.D.,  University  of  Missouri 
THOMAS  J.  HENNINGER  (1966) Director  of  Computer  Services 

B.S.,  Wake  Forest  College;  M.A.,  University  of  Kansas                   Mathematics 
OWEN  F.  HERRING  (1965) Philosophy 

B.A.,  Wake  Forest  College 
DAVID  N.  JEX  (1978) Music 

B.M.,  Universitxi  of  Toledo;  M.M.,  Bowling  Green  State  University; 

D.M.A.,  Cleveland  Institute  of  Music 
MOON  H.  JO  (1975) Sociology 

B.A.,  Valparaiso  University;  M.A.,  Howard  University; 

Ph.D.,  New  York  Universitxi 
DAN  O.  KING  (1977) Biology 

B.A.,  University  of  South  Florida;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Indiana  University 
ELIZABETH  H.  KING  (1956) Business  Administration 

B.S.,  Geneva  College;  M.Ed.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  Universitxi 
ELDON  F.  KUHNS,  II  (1979) Accounting 

B.A.,  Lycoming  College;  M.  Accounting,  University  of  Oklahoma; 

C.P.A.  (Pennsylvania) 


On  Sabbatical  Fall  Semester  1980-81 
On  Sabbatical  Spring  Semester  1980-81 
On  Sabbatical  Academic  Year  1980-81 


139 


COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 

STEVEN  J.  McGUIRE  (1979) Sociology 

B.A.,  University  of  Iowa;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  SUNY  at  Stony  Brook 
RICHARD  J.  MORRIS  (1976) History 

B.A.,  Boston  State  College;  M.A.,  Ohio  University; 

Ph.D.,  New  York  University 
STEPHEN  E.  ROBINSON  (1979) Religion 

B.A.,  M.A.,  Brigham  Young  University;  Ph.D.,  Duke  University 
LARRY  R.  STRAUSER  (1973) Sociology 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College;  M.P.A.,  University  of  Arizona 
CATHERINE  E.  STUDIER  (1978) Education 

B.S.,  SUNY  at  Oneonta;  Ed.M.,  Ed.D.,  University  of  Georgia 
FRED  M.  THAYER,  JR.  (1976)  Music 

A.B.,  Syracuse  University;  B.M.,  Ithaca  College; 

MM.,  SUNY  at  Binghamton;  DM. A.,  Cornell  University 
MARY  ELLEN  VERZARO  (1979) Library  Services 

B.A.,  Ithaca  College;  M.L.S.,  University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill 
H.  BRUCE  WEAVER  (1974) Business  Administration 

B.B.A.,  Stetson  University;  J. D.,  Vanderbilt  University; 

M.B.A.,  Florida  Technological  University 
CHARLES  E.  WEYANT  (1971)  Library  Services 

B.A.,  The  American  University;  M.S.,  Simmons  College 
JOHN  M.  WHELAN,  JR.  (1971)  Philosophy 

B.A.,  University  of  Notre  Dame; 

Ph.D.,  The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 
BUDD  F.  WHITEHILL  (1957) Physical  Education 

B.S.,  Lock  Haven  State  College; 

M.Ed.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
FREDERIC  M.  WILD,  JR.  (1978) English 

B.A.,  Emory  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Ohio  State  University; 

M.Div.,  Yale  Divinity  School 

ROBERT  A.  ZACCARIA  (1973) Biology 

B.A.,  Bridgeivater  College;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Virginia 
MELVIN  C.  ZIMMERMAN  (1979) Biology 

B.S.,  SUNY  at  Cortland;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  Miami  University 


INSTRUCTORS 

DAVID  A.  HAIR  (1979)  Physical  Education 

B.S.,  East  Stroudsburg  State  College 
DEBORAH  J.  HOLMES  (1976) Physical  Education 

B.S.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
ANITA  S.  HUBBARD  (1977) Mathematics 

B.S.,  Universih/  of  Tennessee;  M.S.,  Universih/  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill 
WILLIAM  E.  KEIG  (1980) Astronomy  and  Physics 

A.B.,  Universih/  of  California  at  Santa  Cruz; 

M.S.,  Universih/  of  Chicago 


On  Sabbatical  Fall  Semester  1980-81 
On  Sabbatical  Spring  Semester  1980-81 
On  Leave  Academic  Year  1980-81 


140 


COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 

DIANE  M.  LESKO  (1978) Art 

B.A.,  M.A.,  SUNY  at  Binghamton 
SYED  Q.  SHAREEF  (1979)  Business  Administration 

B.S.,  Middle  East  Technical  University  (Turkey); 

M.B.A.,  University  of  Cincinnati 
RICHARD  D.  TROXEL  (1978) Mathematics 

B.A.,  Oberlin  College;  M.A.,  Indiana  University 

LECTURERS 

CATHERINE  P.  BLAIR  (1980) English 

A.B.,  Regis  College;  M.A.,  University  of  North  Carolina 
DON  M.  LARRABEE  II  (1972)  Lecturer  in  Law 

A.B.,  Franklin  and  Marshall;  LL.B.,  Fordham  University 

PART-TIME  INSTRUCTORS 

MARY  P.  BAGGETT  (1977) Chemistry 

B.A.,  Regis  College;  M.A.,  Wellesley  College 
WILLIAM  P.  CARLUCCI  (1980) Political  Science 

B.A.,  Lycoming  College;  J.D.,  Temple  University 
BARRY  W.  SLOTTER  (1978) Sociology 

B.A.,  Lycoming  College 
MARY  J.  VESTERMARK  (1977)  Psychology 

A.B.,  Oberlin  College;  M.A.,  Stetson  University; 

Ph.D.,  University  of  North  Caroluia  at  Chapel  Hill 
MARILYN  L.  WENTZLER  (1979)  French  and  Spanish 

B.A.,  Lycoming  College;  M.A.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
TERRY  WILD  (1972) Art 

B.A.,  Lycoming  College;  B.F.A.,  Art  Center  College  of  Design 

APPLIED  MUSIC  TEACHERS 

RICHARD  J.  LAKEY  (1979) Organ  and  Piano 

WALTER  G.  McIVER  (1979) Voice 

A.B.,  Bucknell  University 

M.B.,  Westminster  Choir  College 

M.A.,  Neiv  York  University 
ALBERT  J.  NACINOVICH  (1972) Brass 

B.S.  in  Music  Education,  Mansfield  State  College; 

M.S.  in  Music  Education,  Ithaca  College 
MARY  L.  RUSSELL  (1936) Piano 

Mus.B.,  Susquelianna  University 

M.A.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 

JUANITA  M.  SERANG  (1975)  Strings 

THOMAS  H.  SHELLENBERGER  (1980)  French  Horn 


141 


COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 

ADMINISTRATIVE  ASSISTANTS 

Louise  S.  Banks  Periodicals  Assistant  in  Library 

Betty  S.  Beck Assistant  Bookstore  Manager 

Emily  C.  Biichle Coordinator  Facilities  Scheduling/Purchasing 

Barbara  J.  Bodner Secretary  to  Director  of  Admissions 

Pauline  M.  Brungard  Student  Loan  Coordinator 

(B.S.,  Lycoming  College) 
James  Buriak Athletic  Trainer 

(B.S.,  Lock  Haven  State  College) 

(M.S.,  University  of  Illinois) 

Shirley  M.  Campbell  Assistant  in  Treasurer's  Office 

Richard  L.  Cowher Press  Operator 

Elizabeth  G.  Cowles Career  Development  Secretary 

Mary  Dahlgren  Data  Terminal  Operator/Secretary,  Computer  Center 

Julie  Dangle Secretary,  Athletic  Office 

June  L.  Evans Secretary,  Education  Office 

Irene  Everdale Secretary  to  Director  of  Buildings  and  Grounds 

S.  Jean  Gair Secretary,  Music  and  Art  Departments 

Anne  S.  Gibbon  Secretary,  Biology  and  Chemistry  Departments 

Ralph  W.  Hellan  Computer  Operations  Programmer 

(A.B.,  Lycoming  College) 

Helen  C.  Heller Secretary  to  the  Registrar 

Mary  C.  Hendricks Supervisor  of  Housekeeping 

Esther  L.  Henninger Administrative  Assistant  for 

Admission  Computer  Applications 

Audrey  D.  Herrold Receptionist/Secretary 

Office  of  Student  Services 

Isabel  C.  Hess Library  Assistant 

Bernadine  G.  Hileman  Office  Services  Coordinator 

Phyllis  M.  Holmes Secretary  to  the  President 

Barbara  E.  Horn Secretary  to  the  Athletic  Director 

Dee  A.  Horn  Secretary  to  the  Treasurer 

Dagmar  W.  Howard Secretary  to  Director  of  Student  Financial  Aid 

Naomi  E.  Kepner Switchboard  Operator 

Doris  F.  McCoy Secretary  in  Institutional  Relations  Office 

Gertrude  C.  McCoy Secretary  in  Admissions  Office 

Vivian  D.  Meikrantz  Secretary  to  the  Dean  of  the  College 

Marilyn  Mullings  Faculty  Secretary 

Phyllis  B.  Myers  Secretary  to  the  Director  of  Alumni  Affairs 

Marion  R.  Nyman Cashier/Bookkeeper 

Marian  L.  Rubendall Secretary  to  Dean  of  Student  Services 

Sheran  L.  Swank Faculty  Secretary 

Patricia  J .  Triaca  Library  Assistant 

Helen  I.  Vincent Library  Assistant 

J  une  Wagner Faculty  Secretary 

Deborah  E.  Weaver Damage  Assessment  Clerk 

Geraldine  H.  Wescott Secretary  to  the  Librarian/AV  Coordinator 

Loretta  M.  Whipkey  Secretary,  Public  Relations 

Linda  S.  Wright Secretary  to  Director  of  Institutional  Relations 

Cheryl  A.  Yearick Library  Assistant 


142 


COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 

THE  ALUMNI  ASSOCIATION 

The  Alumni  Association  of  Lycoming  College  has  a  membership  of  more  than 
8,000  men  and  women.  It  is  governed  by  an  executive  board  consisting  of  four 
officers  and  21  members-at-large,  elected  through  mail  ballot  by  the  member- 
ship of  the  association.  The  board  also  has  members  representing  specific 
geographic  areas  of  alumni  concentration,  the  senior  class  president,  the  student 
body  president  and  a  representative  of  the  last  graduating  class.  The  association 
annually  nominates  one  alumni  representative  for  a  three-year  term  on  the 
college  board  of  trustees.  The  Director  of  Alumni  Affairs  directs  the  activities  of 
the  alumni  office.  The  alumni  association  has  the  following  purpose  as  stated  in 
its  constitution:  "As  an  off-campus  constituency,  the  Association's  purpose  is  to 
seek  ways  of  maintaining  an  active  and  mutually  beneficial  relationshp  between 
the  college  and  its  alumni,  utilizing  their  talents,  resources  and  counsel  to 
further  the  objective  and  program  of  Lycoming  College." 

All  former  students  of  Williamsport  Dickinson  Seminary  and  all  former 
students  who  have  successfully  completed  one  year  of  study  at  Willimsport 
Dickinson  Junior  College  or  Lycoming  College  shall  be  members  of  the  associa- 
tion. Any  person  who  leaves  Lycoming  College  after  successfully  completing 
one  year  and  re-enters  as  a  student  within  four  years  of  his/her  initial 
matriculation  shall  not  be  a  member  of  the  alumni  association  while  enrolled  as 
a  student  at  Lycoming  College. 

Acting  as  the  representative  of  alumni  on  the  campus  and  working  also 
with  undergraduates,  the  alumni  office  aids  in  keeping  alumni  informed  and 
interested  in  the  programs,  growth  and  activities  of  the  college  through  regular 
publications  mailed  to  all  alumni  on  record.  Arrangements  for  Homecoming, 
Alumni  Day,  class  reunions,  club  meetings  and  similar  activities  are  coordinated 
through  this  office.  The  alumni  association  promotes  group  travel  programs, 
supplies  back-year  class  rings,  sells  water  colors  and  bronze  etchings  of  the 
campus  and  alumni  chairs.  Through  The  Lycoming  College  Annual  Giving 
Fund,  the  alumni  office  is  closely  associated  with  the  development  program  of 
the  college.  Lycoming  College  holds  membership  in  the  Council  for  Advance- 
ment and  Support  of  Education.  Communications  to  the  alumni  association 
should  be  addressed  to  the  Office  of  Alumni  Affairs. 

ALUMNI  ASSOCIATION  OFFICERS  AND  EXECUTIVE  BOARD 

President— John  B.  Ernst  '58—211  Belmont  Ave.,  Doylestown,  PA  18901 
Vice-President  for  Campus  Affairs — Kent  T.  Baldwin  '64, 

2446  Waldman  Drive,  Williamsport,  PA  17701 
Vice-President  for  Regional  Affairs — Ralph  Zeigler  '70, 

350  Rural  Ave.,  Williamsport,  PA  17701 
Secretary — Mrs.  David  Loomis  (Eleanor  Layton  '60), 

R.D.  #1,  Box  167A,  Troy,  PA  16947 
Last  Retiring  President — George  Nichols  '59, 

RD  #2,  Newton  Rd.,  Clarks  Summit,  PA  18411 

Term  Expires  (June,  1981) 

Rev.  H.  Emerson  Abram  '53,  Hillcrest  Road,  Newtown  Square,  PA  19073 
Mrs.  Mary  Landon  Russell  '33,  812  Lincoln  Ave.,  Williamsport,  PA  17701 
Mrs.  Barry  L.  Boyer  (Nancy  Snyder  '64), 

2901  Orchard  Ave.,  R.D.  #3,  Montoursville,  PA  17754 
Andrew  J.  Fedore  '77,  710  Prospect  Street,  Portage,  PA  15946 

143 


Miss  Doris  T.  Heller  '54,  716  Grampian  Blvd.,  Williamsport,  PA  17701 
Dr.  Hess  S.  Wertz,  Jr.  '62,  1195  Sheridan  Street,  Williamsport,  PA  17701 
Rev.  Jay  E.  Zimmerman  '74,  R.D.  #3,  Box  111,  Tyrone,  PA  16686 

Term  Expires  (June,  1982) 

Mrs.  Howard  F.  Chambers  (Amy  Gehron  '70), 

48  Ross  St.,  Williamsport,  PA  17701 
Mrs.  Herman  S.  Horn  (Nancy  Dorrance  '57), 

201  N.  Broad  St.,  Honeybrook,  PA  19344 
Charles  K.  Post,  '57,  9403  Victoria  Court,  Upper  Marlboro,  MD  20870 
Miss  Andrea  D.  Seuren  '76,  60  Hunter  Drive,  Fox  Ridge  Aprs.,  HiNella,  NJ  08083 
Mrs.  Larry  R.  Strauser  (Keigh  Cronauer  '58),  R.D.  #3,  Montoursville,  PA  17754 
Miss  Karen  A.  Suplee  '74,  Box  156  George  School,  Newtown,  PA  18940 
Daniel  P.  Wright  '74,  1204  Tule  St.,  Montoursville,  PA  17754 

Members  of  the  Board  Serving  a  One-Year  Term 

Student  Association  of  Lycoming  College,  President — 

Robert  W.  Bucknam,  Jr  '81 
Senior  Class  President — Debra  Suplee 
Representative  of  the  Class  of  1980 — Miss  Donna  Petrizzi, 

225  Green  Lane,  Bristol,  PA  19007 

Alumni  Representatives  to  Lycoming  College  Board  of  Trustees 

1981— Ms.  Onalee  R.  (Barton  '62)  Sabin,  513  W.  Gray  Street,  Elmira,  NY  14905 
1982— Dr.  David  J.  Loomis  '61,  R.D.  #1,  Box  167 A,  Troy,  PA  16947 
1983— Dr.  David  M.  Heiney  '62, 

R.D.  #2,  Woodbine  Road,  Hughesville,  PA  17737 


144 


COMMUNICATION  WITH  THE  COLLEGE 

This  document  contains  pertinent  information  about  the  college,  its  philosophy, 
programs,  policies,  regulations  and  offerings.  All  students  and  prospective 
students  are  urged  to  read  it  carefully  and  completely. 

Inquiries  of  a  specific  nature  should  be  addressed  as  follows: 

Director  of  Admissions: 

Admission  to  the  freshman  class. 
Admission  with  advanced  standing. 
Re-entry  of  students  to  Lycoming  College. 
Request  for  catalogs. 

Treasurer: 

Payment  of  college  bills. 
Inquiries  concerning  expenses. 

Director  of  Student  Financial  Aid 

Scholarships  and  loan  funds  for  students  in  college. 
Financial  assistance  for  entering  students. 

Dean  of  the  College: 

Information  about  faculty  and  faculty  activities. 
Academic  work  of  students  in  college. 

Dean  of  Student  Services: 
Student  activities. 
Residence  halls. 
Religious  life. 
Health  services. 
Academic  support  services. 

Registrar: 

Student  records. 
Transcript  requests. 
Academic  policies. 

Career  Development  Center: 

Career  counseling  and  employment  opportunities. 

Director  of  Institutional  Relations 

Development,  annual  fund  and  gift  programs. 

Director  of  Alumni  Affairs 

Director  of  Public  Relations 
Publications 

Address:  LYCOMING  COLLEGE,  Williamsport,  Pennsylvania  17701 
Telephone:  326-1951,  Area  Code  717 

All  of  the  provisions  in  this  catalog  are  effective  July  1,  1980. 

Lycoming  College  reserves  the  right  to  make  any  necessary  changes  in  the  academic  calendar, 
charges,  courses  or  any  other  section  of  this  catalog. 

145 


ACADEMIC  CALENDAR— 1980-1981 

FALL  SEMESTER 
August 

29  Friday  -  Orientation  of  new  faculty 

-  Fall  semester  bills  are  due 


September 

1 

2 

Monday 

Tuesday 

3 

5 

Wednesday 
Friday 

9 

Tuesday 

16 

Tuesday 

October 

3,  4,  5 
10,  11,  12 
14 

Fri.,  Sat.,  Sun 
Fri.,  Sat.,  Sun 
Tuesday 

27 


16 


146 


Monday 


November 

10-14 

25 

Mon.-Fri 
Tuesday 

December 

1 
19 

Monday 
Friday 

January 

2 
4 
5 
6 

Friday 
Sunday 
Monday 
Tuesday 

Friday 


Friday 


Residence  halls  open  10  a.m.  to  8  p.m. 

Processing  of  drop/add  begins. 

AFTERNOONS  ONLY. 

Classes  begin  first  period. 

Last  day  for  payment  without  re-registration 

fee  of  $25.00. 

Last  day  for  drop/add  without  instructor's 

approval. 

Last  day  for  drop/add. 

Last  day  to  elect  audit  and 

satisfactory/unsatisfactory  grades. 

Homecoming  Weekend. 
Parents'  Weekend. 

Last  day  for  submission  of  final  grades  for 
courses  for  which  Incomplete  grades  were 
recorded  in  spring,  May  and  summer  terms. 
Mid-Semester  Deficiency  Reports  for 
freshmen  due  in  Office  of  Registrar  at  12 
noon. 


-  Preregistration. 

-  Last  day  to  withdraw  from  courses  with  W, 
WP,  WF  grades. 

-  Thanksgiving  Recess  begins  4:30  p.m. 

-  Residence  halls  close  7  p.m. 

-  Classes  resume  first  period. 

-  Semester  ends  4:30  p.m. 

-  Residence  halls  close  7  p.m. 

SPRING  SEMESTER 

-  Spring  semester  bills  are  due. 

-  Residence  halls  open  12  noon. 

-  Classes  begin  first  period. 

-  Processing  of  drop/add  begins. 
AFTERNOONS  ONLY. 

-  Last  day  for  payment  without  re-registration 
fee  of  $25.00. 

-  Last  day  for  drop/add  without  instructor's 
approval. 

-  Last  day  for  drop/add — instructor's  approval 
required  for  the  add. 

-  Last  day  to  elect  audit  and 
satisfactory/unsatisfactory  grades. 


February 

13 


23 


27 
28 

March 

9 
23-27 

April 

3 

7 

17 

24 

May 

1 


Friday 

Monday 


Friday 
Saturday 


Monday 
Mon.-Fri. 


Friday 

Tuesday 

Friday 

Friday 


Friday 
Sunday 


-  Last  day  for  submission  of  final  grades  for 
courses  for  which  Incomplete  grades  were 
recorded  in  the  fall  semester. 

-  Mid-Semester  Deficiency  Reports  for 
freshmen  due  in  Office  of  Registrar  at  12 
noon. 

-  Spring  recess  begins  4:30  p.m. 

-  Residence  halls  close  10  a.m. 


Classes  resume  first  period. 
Preregistration. 


Last  day  to  withdraw  from  courses  with  W, 

WP,  WF  grades. 

Honors  Day. 

Good  Friday.  Afternoon  classes  suspended. 

Semester  ends  4:30  p.m. 

Residence  halls  close  7  p.m. 


-  Residence  halls  open  12  noon  for  partici- 
pants in  Commencement. 

-  Commencement. 


May 

3 
4 


22 


July 

17 

31 


Sunday 
Monday 
Friday 


Friday 


25 
26 
29 

Monday 
Tuesday 
Friday 

June 

21 
22 
26 

Sunday 
Monday 
Friday 

Friday 
Friday 


MAY  TERM 

-  Residence  halls  open  2  p.m. 

-  Classes  begin. 

-  Last  day  for  drop/add — instructor's  approval 
required  for  the  add. 

-  Last  day  to  elect  audit  and 
satisfactory/unsatisfactory  grades. 

-  Last  day  to  withdraw  from  courses  with  W, 
WP,  WF  grades. 

-  Memorial  Day  recess.  Classes  suspended. 

-  Classes  resume  first  period. 

-  Term  ends.  Residence  halls  close  9  p.m. 

SUMMER  TERM 

-  Residence  halls  open  12  noon. 

-  Classes  begin. 

-  Last  day  for  drop/add — instructor's  approval 
required  for  the  add. 

-  Last  day  to  elect  audit  and 
satisfactory/unsatisfactory  grades. 


-  Last  day  to  withdraw  from  courses  with  W, 
WP,  WF  grades. 

-  Term  ends.  Residence  halls  close  9  p.m. 


147 


CAMPUS  FACILITIES 

RESIDENTIAL 

1.  North  Hall  (1965) — 146  students  in  two-room  suites  with  bath. 

4.  East  Hall  (1962) — Houses  chapters  of  national  fraternities  and  other  students.  The  fraternity  units, 

distinct  self-contained,  provide  dormitory  facilities,  lounge  and  a  chapter  room  for  each  group. 
All  students  share  a  large  social  area  on  the  ground  floor. 

5.  Forrest  Hall  (1968) — 92  students  in  two-room  suites  with  bath.  Honors  Dr.  and  Mrs.  Fletcher  Bliss 

Forrest  and  Anna  Forrest  Burfiendt  '30,  the  parents  and  sister  of  Katherine  Forrest  Mathers  '28, 
whose  generosity  established  the  memorial. 

6.  Crever  Hall  (1962) — 126  students  in  two-room  suites  with  bath.  Honors  the  college's  founder  and 

first   financial   agent,    the   Rev.    Benjamin   H.    Crever,    who   helped   persuade   the   Baltimore 
Conference  to  purchase  the  institution  from  the  Williamsport  Town  Council  in  1848. 

8.  Wesley  Hall  (1956) — 14  students.  Honors  the  founder  of  Methodism. 

9.  Rich  Hall  (1948) — 105  students  in  two-room  suites  with  bath.  Honors  the  Rich  family  of  Woolrich, 

Pennsylvania.  Houses  the  college  health  service  and  the  Sara  J.  Walter  non-residents  lounge. 

11.  Asbury  Hall   (1962) — 154  students.   Honors  Bishop  Francis  Asbury,   the  father  of  The  United 

Methodist  Church  in  America,  who  made  the  circuit  through  the  upper  "Susquehanna  District" 
in  1812,  the  year  the  Williamsport  Academy  (now  Lycoming)  opened  its  doors. 
18.  Skeath  Hall  (1965) — 212  students.  Honors  the  late  J.  Milton  Skeath,  professor  of  psychology  and 
four-time  dean  of  the  institution  from  1921  to  1967. 

ACADEMIC 

12-15.  The  Academic  Center  (1968) 

12.  Laboratories  and  Arena  Theatre — Language,   business,   mathematics  and  physics  laboratories; 

Detwiler  Planetarium;  204  seat  thrust-stage  theatre;  90  seat  Alumni  Lecture  Hall. 

13.  Faculty  Office  Building — 69  faculty  offices,  seminar  rooms,  735-seat  lecture  hall. 

14.  Wendle  Hall — Spacious  Pennington  Lounge  is  an  informal  meeting  place  for  students  and  faculty. 

Pychology  laboratories,  20  classrooms. 

15.  Library — Can  accommodate  700  students  in  a  variety  of  study  and  reading  situations,  has  a  capacity 

of  250,000  volumes,  computer  center  and  photographic  laboratories. 

2.  Art  Center  (1965)— Studios. 

3.  Fine  Arts  Building  (1940)— Art  studios. 

21.  Science  Building  (1957) — Chemistry  and  biology  lecture  rooms,  laboratories,  offices. 

22.  Art  Gallery  (1980)— Located  in  library. 

CHAPEL 

17.  Clarke  Chapel  (1939) — Worship  services  and  other  events  in  auditorium;  classrooms,  studios  and 
music  department  faculty  offices  on  ground  floor. 

ADMINISTRATION 

10.  John  W.  Long  Hall  (1951) — College  administration  offices:  president,  college  deans,  treasurer, 
registrar,  admissions,  alumni  affairs,  public  relations,  Career  Development  Center,  publications, 
development  and  financial  aid.  Reception  area,  central  communications,  printing  and  bulk  mail 
services. 

22.  Maintenance. 


RECREATION 

7.  Wertz  Student  Center  (1959) — Dining  room,  Burchfield  Lounge,  recreation  area,  game  room,  music 
room,  book  store,  post  office  and  student  organization  offices.  Honors  Bishop  D.  Frederick 
Wertz,  president  of  Lycoming  from  1955  until  1968. 

19.  Physical  Education /Recreation  Center  (1980) — Basketball  and  other  courts,  swimming  pool,  physical 
education  offices,  classrooms,  all-purpose  room. 

16.  Gymnasium  (1923) — Basketball  and  other  courts,  bowling  alleys. 

148 


•2     D     60 

«  u   c 
X  „  15  »   [2  ii  « 


32 
>%  "3! 


?*  ^«  .a  •«  *- 


c/)  S  < 


£  o  x 

3     - 


60 

C 

gi 

.5     3 
<f>   CO 


tH         C  IH 

<  £  £  j  O  U 


f    v 


cn  m  ij»  io  ^o  t^ 


l- 
01 

K 

UJ 

c 

H 

0) 

U 

z 

W 

c 

u 

01   _ 

^y 

5  x 

= 

(0 

X  s 

n  _oj 

(0 

I 

X 

r§ 

01      01 

u 

5 

C 
0 

16 
<  < 

in 

n  oo  a>  o 


W 

P-H 

H 

-J 


fc        It 

CD 

p 


X  X 


^  .1=  .a    «    o  rfc, 
Z  u,  u,  u  u.  U 


m  n  ^  in  <c 


149 


ACADEMIC  CALENDAR  1980-1981 


Sun 

Mon 

Tues 

Wed 

Thur 

Fn 
1 

Sat 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

SEPTEMBER 

Sun      Mon     Tues     Wed     Thur 


12  3  4 
7  8  9  10  11 
14     15     16     17     18     19 


5       6 
12     13 


20 


21      22     23     24     25     26     27 
28     29     30 


OCTOBER 

Sun      Mon    Tues     Wed     Thur  Fri  Sal 

12  3  4 

5   6   7   8   9  10  11 

12  13  14  15  16  17  18 

19  20  21  22  23  24  25 

26  27  28  29  30  31 


NOVEMBER 


Sun 

Mon 

Tues 

Wed 

Thur 

Fn 

Sat 
1 

8 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 
30 


24     25     26     27     28     29 


DECEMBER 


Sun 

Mon 

Tues 

Wed 

Thur 

Fn 

Sat 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21     22     23     24     25     26     27 
28     29     30     31 


JANUARY 

Sun      Mon    Tues     Wed     Thur      Fri 


1 

2 

9 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

FEBRUARY 


Sun 

Mon 

Tues 

Wed 

Thur 

Fn 

Sat 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

MARCH 

Sun  Mon  Tues  Wed  Thur  Fri  Sat 

1  2       3  4       5  6  7 

8  9  10  11  12  13  14 

15  16  17  18  19  20  21 

22  23  24  25  26  27  28 

29  30  31 


APRIL 


Sun      Mon     Tues     Wed     Thur       Fr 


Sat 


1 

2 

3 

4 

8 

9 

10 

11 

15 

16 

17 

18 

5  6  7 

12  13  14 

19  20  21      22     23     24     25 

26  27  28     29     30 


MAY 

Sun 

Mon 

Tues     Wed     Thur 

Fn 
1 

Sat 
2 

3 

4 

5       6       7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12     13     14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19     20     21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26     27     28 

29 

30 

JUNE 

Sun      Mon    Tues     Wed     Thur  Fn  Sat 

12       3       4  5  6 

7       8       9      10     11  12  13 

14     15     16     17     18  19  20 


D  =  Fall  and  Spring  Semesters 

D  =  May  Term 

I  =  Summer  Session 


JULY 

Sun      Mon    Tues     Wed  Thur  Fri  Sat 

1  2  3j  4 

5   6   7   8  9  10  11 

12  13  14  15  16  17  18 

19  20  21  22  23  24  25 

27  28  29  30  31 


INDEX 


Academic  Advisement  19 

Academic  Calendar 146 

Academic  Honesty  23 

Academic  Honors 24 

Academic  Program 15 

Academic  Standing  23 

Accounting  Curriculum  41 

Accounting-Mathematics  (EIM) 45 

Accreditation  5 

Administrative  Assistants 142 

Administrative  Staff 134 

Admission  7 

Admissions  Deposit 8 

Admissions  Office 8 

Admission  Policy  7 

Admission  Standards 7 

Advanced  Placement 24 

Advanced  Standing  by  Transfer 7 

Advisory  Committees 19 

Health  Professions 19 

Legal  Professions 19 

Medical  Technology  19 

Theological  Professions 19 

Allopathic    Medicine,    Advisement    for    ...    19 

Alumni  Association  143 

American  Studies  (EIM) 45 

Anthropology  Curriculum  123 

Application  Fee  and  Deposits  10 

Application  Process 7 

Applied  Music  Requirements 16 

Art  Curriculum  47 

Astronomy  and  Phvsics  Curriculum  51 

Attendance,  Class 23 

Audit 28 

Awards 25 

Basic  Educational  Opportunity 

Grants  (BEOG)  12 

Biology  Curriculum  56 

Board  of  Trustees 132 

Books  and  Supplies 10 

Building  Descriptions 148 

Business  Administration  Curriculum  60 

Calendar,  Academic 146 

Campus  Map  149 

Career  Development  Services 36 

Chemistry  Curriculum  63 

Christian  Ministry,  Advisement  for 19 

Class  Attendance 23 

College  and  the  Church  38 

College  Directory  132 

College  Level  Examination  Program 

(CLEP) 24 

Communication  with  the  College 145 

Community  Scholarships 14 

Conduct,  Standards  of 38 

Contents 3 

Contingency  Deposit  10 

Cooperative  Programs 29 

Engineering 29 

Environmental  Studies 29 

Foresty 29 

Medical  Technology  30 

Military  Science 31 

Podiatry 31 


Counseling,  Academic 19 

Counseling,  Personal 35 

Course  Credit  by  Examination  24 

Course  Descriptions 41 

Criminal  Justice  (EIM) 67 

Curriculum  41 

Damage  Charges 37 

Degree  Programs 15 

Degree  Requirements 15 

Dental  School,  Advisement  for 19 

Departmental  Honors 25 

Departmental  Majors 18 

Deposits 9 

Deposit  Refund 10 

Discrimination    Compliance    Statement    ...    7 

Distribution  Requirements 15 

English  16 

Fine  Arts 16 

Foreign  Language 16 

History  and  Social  Science 17 

Mathematics 16 

Natural  Science 17 

Philosophy 16 

Religion  16 

Early  Admission  Procedure  7 

Economics  Curriculum  69 

Education  Curriculum  72 

Education  Financing  Plans 14 

Educational  Opportunity  Grants 12 

Engineering,  Cooperative  Program 29 

English  Curriculum  75 

English  Requirement 16 

Entrance  Examinations  (CEEB) 24 

Entry  Fees  and  Deposits 10 

Environmental  Studies 29 

Established  Interdisciplinary 

Major  (EIM) 18 

Expenses 9 

Faculty 136 

Facilities 148 

Federal  Grants  and  Loans 12 

Fees 9 

Financial  Aid 12 

Financial  Assistance 12 

Financial  Information  9 

Fine  Arts  Requirements 16 

Foreign  Language  Requirement 16 

Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures 

Curriculum 80 

Forestry,  Cooperative  Program 29 

French  Curriculum 80 

General  Expenses 9 

German  Curriculum  83 

Grading  System  21 

Graduation  Requirements 15 

Grants-in-Aid 12 

Greek  Curriculum  85 

Handbooks  for  Students 
(Guidepost,  Pathfinder, 

Residence  Halls) 37 

Health  Professions  Careers 19 

Health  Services 35 

Hebrew  Curriculum  85 

History  Curriculum  88 

History  of  the  College 6 

History  Requirement 17 

Honor  Societies 25 


151 


Honors,  Academic 24 

Honors,  Departmental 25 

Independent  Study 27 

Interdisciplinary  Majors 18 

Established  Majors  (EIM) 18 

Individual  Majors  (IIM)  18 

International  Studies  (EIM) 92 

Internship  Program  27 

Interviews 8 

Introduction  to  Lycoming 5 

Legal  Professions,  Advisement  for 19 

Literature  (EPM) 94 

Loans 13 

Location 5 

London  Semester  31 

Lycoming  Scholar  Program  32 

Major 17 

Admission  to 17 

Departmental 18 

Interdisciplinary  (EIM,  UM) 18 

Mass  Communications  (EIM) 95 

Mathematics  Curriculum 98 

Mathematics  Requirement 16 

May  Term  28 

Medical  School,  Advisement  for 19 

Medical  History 36 

Medical  Staff 135 

Medical  Technology  30 

Military  Science 31 

Ministerial  Grants-in-Aid  12 

Music  Curriculum  104 

National  Defense  Student  Loans 

(NDSL) 13 

Natural  Science  Requirement  17 

Near  East  Culture  and 

Archeology  (EIM) 108 

Non-Payment  of  Fees  Penalty 11 

Objectives  and  Purpose 5 

Optometry  School,  Advisement  for 19 

Orientation  39 

Osteopathy  School,  Advisement  for 19 

Overseas  Studies  Opportunities 28,  31 

Part-time  Student  Opportunities 29 

Regular  Audit  28 

Special  Student 

(Part-time  for  Credit) 29 

Payment  of  Fees 9 

Payments,  Partial  10 

Penalty  for  Non-Payment  of  Fees 11 

Personal  Counseling 35 

Philosophy  Curriculum  108 

Philosophy  Requirement 16 

Physical  Education  Curriculum 112 

Physics  Curriculum  51 

Placement  Services 36 

Podiatry,  Cooperative  Program  31 

Political  Science  Curriculum 112 

Principal  Aim  of  the  College 5 

Psychology  Curriculum 117 


Purpose  and  Objectives 5 

Quick  Look  at  Lycoming 2 

Reading  Improvement  Course 36 

Refunds 10 

Registration  20 

Regulations  (Standards  of  Conduct) 38 

Religion  Curriculum  120 

Religion  Requirement 16 

Religious  Life 38 

Requirements,  Distribution 15 

Requirements  for  Admission  7 

Requirements  for  Graduation  15 

Reserve  Officer  Training  Corps 

Program  (ROTC) 31 

Scholarships  (ROTC) 14 

Residence 37 

Residence  Halls 37 

Residential  37 

Scholarships 12 

Selection  Process 7 

Social  Science  Requirement 17 

Sociology- Anthropology 

Curriculum 1 23 

Spanish  Curriculum  85 

Special  Features 27 

Departmental  Honors 25 

Independent  Study 27 

Internship  Program 27 

London  Semester 31 

Lycoming  Scholar  Program  32 

May  Term 28 

Overseas  Studies  Opportunities 28,  31 

Student  Enrichment  Semester 31 

United  Nations  Semester 31 

Washington  Semester 31 

Standards  of  Admission  7 

Standards  of  Conduct 38 

State  Grants  and  Loans 14 

Student  Activities 40 

Student  Enrichment  Semester  (SES) 31 

Student  Records 23 

Student  Services 35 

Study  Abroad  28,  31 

Summer  Session  Calendar 147 

Supplemental  Educational  Opportunity 

Grants  (SEOG)  13 

Theatre  Curriculum  129 

Theological  Professions,  Advisement  for  ...  19 

Transfer 7 

Trustees  132 

Unit  Course  System 21 

United  Campus  Ministry  135 

United  Nations  Semester 31 

Veterans,   Approval  7 

Veterinary  School,  Advisement  for 19 

Washington  Semester 31 

Withdrawal  from  College 10 

Work-Study  Grants 13 


152 


Lycoming  College 

Williamsport,  Pennsylvania 

17701